SWV2563 Yaskawa G5 Drive Manual 2 15 12

User Manual: SWV2563

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 297

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

GPD 515/G5 Drive
YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA, INC.
Drives Division 16555 W. Ryerson Rd., New Berlin, WI 53151, U.S.A.
Phone: (800) YASKAWA (800-927-5292) Fax: (262) 782-3418
Internet: http://www.drives.com

YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD.
Head Office: 151 Lorong Chuan, #04-01, New Tech Park Singapore 556741, Singapore
Phone: 65-282-3003 Fax: 65-289-3003
TAIPEI OFFICE (AND YATEC ENGINEERING CORPORATION)
10F 146 Sung Chiang Road, Taipei, Taiwan
Phone: 886-2-2563-0010 Fax: 886-2-2567-4677

MOTOMAN INC.
805 Liberty Lane, West Carrollton, OH 45449, U.S.A.
Phone: (937) 847-6200 Fax: (937) 847-6277
Internet: http://www.motoman.com

YASKAWA JASON (HK) COMPANY LIMITED
Rm. 2909-10, Hong Kong Plaza, 186-191 Connaught Road West, Hong Kong
Phone: 852-2803-2385 Fax: 852-2547-5773

YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
New Pier Takeshiba South Tower, 1-16-1, Kaigan, Minatoku, Tokyo, 105-0022, Japan
Phone: 81-3-5402-4511 Fax: 81-3-5402-4580
Internet: http://www.yaskawa.co.jp

BEIJING OFFICE
Room No. 301 Office Building of Beijing International Club,
21 Jianguomanwai Avenue, Beijing 100020, China
Phone: 86-10-6532-1850 Fax: 86-10-6532-1851

YASKAWA ELETRICO DO BRASIL COMERCIO LTDA.
Avenida Fagundes Filho, 620 Bairro Saude Sao Paolo-SP, Brasil CEP: 04304-000
Phone: 55-11-5071-2552 Fax: 55-11-5581-8795
Internet: http://www.yaskawa.com.br

SHANGHAI OFFICE
27 Hui He Road Shanghai 200437 China
Phone: 86-21-6553-6600 Fax: 86-21-6531-4242

YASKAWA ELECTRIC EUROPE GmbH
Am Kronberger Hang 2, 65824 Schwalbach, Germany
Phone: 49-6196-569-300 Fax: 49-6196-888-301
MOTOMAN ROBOTICS AB
Box 504 S38525, Torsas, Sweden
Phone: 46-486-48800 Fax: 46-486-41410

SHANGHAI YASKAWA-TONJI M & E CO., LTD.
27 Hui He Road Shanghai 200437 China
Phone: 86-21-6533-2828 Fax: 86-21-6553-6677
BEIJING YASKAWA BEIKE AUTOMATION ENGINEERING CO., LTD.
30 Xue Yuan Road, Haidian, Beijing 100083 China
Phone: 86-10-6232-9943 Fax: 86-10-6234-5002

MOTOMAN ROBOTEC GmbH
Kammerfeldstrabe 1, 85391 Allershausen, Germany
Phone: 49-8166-900 Fax: 49-8166-9039

SHOUGANG MOTOMAN ROBOT CO., LTD.
7, Yongchang-North Street, Beijing Economic & Technological Development Area,
Beijing 100076 China
Phone: 86-10-6788-0551 Fax: 86-10-6788-2878

YASKAWA ELECTRIC UK LTD.
1 Hunt Hill Orchardton Woods Cumbernauld, G68 9LF, Scotland, United Kingdom
Phone: 44-12-3673-5000 Fax: 44-12-3645-8182

YEA, TAICHUNG OFFICE IN TAIWAIN
B1, 6F, No.51, Section 2, Kung-Yi Road, Taichung City, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Phone: 886-4-2320-2227 Fax:886-4-2320-2239

GPD 515/G5 Technical Manual

YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA, INC.
Chicago-Corporate Headquarters
2121 Norman Drive South, Waukegan, IL 60085, U.S.A.
Phone: (800) YASKAWA (800-927-5292) Fax: (847) 887-7310
Internet: http://www.yaskawa.com

GPD 515/G5 Drive
Technical Manual

YASKAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CORPORATION
Paik Nam Bldg. 901 188-3, 1-Ga Euljiro, Joong-Gu, Seoul, Korea
Phone: 82-2-776-7844 Fax: 82-2-753-2639

0 4 / 01/02

Data subject to change without notice.

SWV: 01114

Document Number: TM4515 (Supercedes: YEA-TOA-S616-10.11 and 10.12) 04/01/2002 Software Version: 01114

Models: GPD515C- and CIMR-G5M Document Number: TM 4515

CONTENTS

PARAGRAPH

PAGE

SUBJECT

GPD 515/G5 SIMPLIFIED START-UP PROCEDURE ............. i
QUICK REFERENCE FOR GPD 515 PARAMETERS ............... xiv
CURRENT RATINGS & HORSEPOWER RANGE .................... xvii
WARNING/CAUTION STATEMENTS ..................................... xviii
WARRANTY REGISTRATION .................................................. xxi
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.3a
1.4.4
1.4.5
1.4.6
1.4.7

INSTALLATION ....................................................................... 1 - 1
General ....................................................................................... 1 - 1
Receiving .................................................................................... 1 - 1
Physical Installation .................................................................... 1 - 1
Electrical Installation .................................................................. 1 - 2
Main Circuit Input/Output ..................................................... 1 - 2
Grounding ............................................................................. 1 - 1 1
Auxiliary Input and Output Power Option Devices ............... 1 - 1 1
Conformance to European EMC Directive ............................ 1 - 1 3
Control Circuit ...................................................................... 1 - 1 5
Interconnection - 2-Wire Control (Fig. 1-3) ........................ 1 - 2 0
Interconnection - 3-Wire Control (Fig. 1-4) ........................ 1 - 2 2
Encoder/PG-X2 Connections ................................................ 1 - 2 4

2
2.1
2.2
2.2a

2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7

INITIAL START-UP (“LOCAL” CONTROL) ......................... 2 - 1
Pre-power Checks ...................................................................... 2 - 1
Control Method Selection ........................................................... 2 - 2
Power On and Preliminary Checks – Open Loop
Vector Control ............................................................. 2 - 3
Power On and Preliminary Checks – Flux Vector Control ...... 2 - 6
Power On and Preliminary Checks – V/f Control .................. 2 - 1 1
Power On and Preliminary Checks – V/f with PG
Feedback Control ....................................................... 2 - 1 4
Changing the Language on the Digital Operator ...................... 2 - 1 9
Calculating Motor Parameters ................................................... 2 - 2 0
Test Run Using Digital Operator ("Local" Control) ................... 2 - 2 4
Pre-operation Considerations .................................................... 2 - 2 7
Storage Function ...................................................................... 2 - 2 7

3

OPERATION AT LOAD ........................................................... 3 - 1

4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5

DIGITAL OPERATOR ...............................................................
General .......................................................................................
Display and Keypad ....................................................................
Digital Operator Menu Trees ......................................................
Basic Programming .....................................................................
Modes of Operation ...................................................................

2.2b
2.2c
2.2d

Release Date 4/01/2002

xi

4-1
4-1
4-1
4-4
4-8
4-9

CONTENTS - Continued

PARAGRAPH
5
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
5.14
5.15
5.16
5.17
5.18
5.19
5.20
5.21
5.22
5.23
5.24
5.25
5.25 A
5.25 B
5.26
5.27
5.28
5.29
5.30
5.31
5.32

PAGE

SUBJECT

PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES ................................................ 5 - 1
General ....................................................................................... 5 - 1
Accel/Decel Time ....................................................................... 5 - 3
Accel/Decel: S-Curve Characteristics ........................................ 5 - 6
Access Level .............................................................................. 5 - 7
Auto-restart ............................................................................... 5 - 7
Automatic Frequency Regulator (AFR) Gain .............................. 5 - 8
Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR) ............................................ 5 - 9
Carrier Frequency ...................................................................... 5 - 1 2
Critical Frequency Rejection ..................................................... 5 - 1 3
DC Injection Braking .................................................................. 5 - 1 4
Digital Operator Display Selection ............................................ 5 - 1 7
Display – Monitor (at Power-up) Selection ............................... 5 - 1 9
Droop ........................................................................................ 5 - 1 9
Dwell ......................................................................................... 5 - 2 0
Encoder (PG) Parameters ......................................................... 5 - 2 1
Energy Saving Operation ........................................................... 5 - 2 6
External Fault Inputs ................................................................. 5 - 2 8
Frequency Reference Command Bias/Gain ............................... 5 - 2 9
Frequency Reference Input Signals (Auto/Manual) .................. 5 - 3 1
Frequency Reference Loss Detection ....................................... 5 - 3 3
Frequency Reference Retention ................................................ 5 - 3 3
Frequency Reference Upper & Lower Limits ............................ 5 - 3 4
Hunting Prevention ................................................................... 5 - 3 5
Jog Reference ........................................................................... 5 - 3 6
Local Remote and Reference Selection .................................... 5 - 3 9
Local Remote Selection ....................................................... 5 - 3 9
Multiple Speed Reference Configuration [Multi-step
Speed Operation] .......................................................... 5 - 4 0
Miscellaneous Parameters ......................................................... 5 - 4 4
Miscellaneous Protective Features ............................................ 5 - 4 6
MODBUS Control ....................................................................... 5 - 4 8
Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru ............................................. 5 - 5 0
Multi-function Analog Inputs (Term. 14 & 16 ) ....................... 5 - 5 3
Multi-function Analog Monitor Output (Term. 21-23) .............. 5 - 5 7
Multi-function Input Terminals (Term. 3-8) .............................. 5 - 5 8
• Local/Remote ................................................................... 5 - 6 2
• External Base Block .......................................................... 5 - 6 3
• Speed Search .................................................................... 5 - 6 4
• Timer Function .................................................................. 5 - 6 6
• Sample/Hold Command .................................................... 5 - 6 6
• Up/Down Frequency Setting ............................................ 5 - 6 7
• Trim Control ...................................................................... 5 - 6 9

xii

CONTENTS - Continued

PARAGRAPH
5.33

PAGE

SUBJECT

5.34
5.35
5.36
5.37
5.38
5.39
5.40
5.41
5.42
5.43
5.44
5.45
5.45.1
5.46
5.47
5.48
5.49
5.50

Multi-function Output Terminals (Term. 9 & 10; 25-27) ......... 5 - 7 0
• Frequency or Speed Detection Output Signals ................ 5 - 7 3
Phase Loss Detection – Input ................................................... 5 - 7 7
Phase Loss Detection – Output ................................................ 5 - 7 7
PID Control ................................................................................ 5 - 7 8
Reset Codes; 2-Wire, 3-Wire Initialization ................................ 5 - 8 3
Slip Compensation .................................................................... 5 - 8 4
Stall Prevention ......................................................................... 5 - 8 6
Stopping Method ....................................................................... 5 - 8 8
Thermal Overload Protection .................................................... 5 - 9 0
Torque Compensation ............................................................... 5 - 9 3
Torque Control (Command) ...................................................... 5 - 9 5
Torque Detection ...................................................................... 5 - 9 8
Torque Limit ............................................................................ 5 - 1 0 1
Two Motor Operation ............................................................... 5 - 1 0 4
User Parameters ...................................................................... 5 - 1 0 6
V/f Pattern - Standard ............................................................ 5 - 1 0 6
V/f Pattern - Custom .............................................................. 5 - 1 0 8
Zero-Servo Control ................................................................... 5 - 1 1 0
Zero Speed Control .................................................................. 5 - 1 1 2

6
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6

FAULT INDICATION & TROUBLESHOOTING ....................... 6 - 1
General ....................................................................................... 6 - 1
Auto-Tuning Faults and Corrective Actions ............................... 6 - 6
Displaying Faults ........................................................................ 6 - 7
Troubleshooting Flowcharts ...................................................... 6 - 1 0
Diode and IGBT (Transistor) Module Resistance Test .............. 6 - 2 7
Checking Encoder Pulses .......................................................... 6 - 2 9

App. 1

LISTING OF PARAMETERS .................................................... A 1 - 1

App. 2

SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................... A 2 - 1

App. 3

CAPACITY & CONTROL METHOD
RELATED PARAMETERS ....................................................... A 3 - 1

App. 4

G P D 5 1 5 / G 5 S P A R E PARTS ............................................... A 4 - 1

App. 5

GPD 5 1 5 / G 5 D I M E N S I O N S .................................................. A 5 - 1

App. 6

DYNAMIC BRAKING CONNECTIONS ................................... A 6 - 1

Index

..................................................................................................... I-1

xiii

QUICK REFERENCE FOR GPD 515/G5 PARAMETERS (FACTORY SET)
PARA.
REF.

PARAMETER
NUMBER (7)

FACTORY
SETTING

0
2
2

2.3
5.4
2.2

C1-07
C1-08
C1-09

A1-03
A1-04

0
0000

5.37
p. A1-1

A2-01
thru
A2-32

(1)

b1-01
b1-02
b1-03

1
1
0

5.25 A
5.25 A
5.40

b1-04
b1-05
b1-06
b1-07
b1-08

0
0
1
0
0

p. A1-2
5.50
p. A1-2
p. A1-2
5.26

b2-01
b2-02
b2-03
b2-04
b2-08

0.5
50
0.00
0.00
0

5.10
5.10
5.10
5.10
5.10B

b3-01
b3-02
b3-03

0 (6)
100
2.0

5.32 D
5.32 D
5.32 D

b4-01
b4-02

0.0
0.0

5.32 E
5.32 E

b5-01
b5-02
b5-03

0
1.00
1.0

5.36
5.36
5.36

b5-04
b5-05
b5-06

100.0
0.00
100.0

5.36
5.36
5.36

b5-07
b5-08
b5-09
b5-10
b5-11
b5-12
b5-13
b5-14

0.0
0.00
0
1.0
0
0
0
1.0

5.36
5.36
5.36D
5.36D
5.36D
5.36E
5.36E
5.36E

b6-01
b6-02
b6-03
b6-04

0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0

5.14
5.14
5.14
5.14

b7-01
b7-02

0.0
0.05

5.13
5.13

b8-01
b8-02
b8-03
b8-04
b8-05

80
0.0
0
Note 2
Note 2

5.16A
5.16A
5.16B
5.16B
5.16B

b9-01
b9-02

5
10

5.49
5.49

C1-01
C1-02
C1-03

10.0
10.0
10.0

C1-04
C1-05
C1-06

10.0
10.0
10.0

PARAMETER
NUMBER (7)

FACTORY
SETTING

A1-00
A1-01
A1-02

USER
SETTING

(1)

(1)

USER
SETTING

PARA.
REF.

PARAMETER
NUMBER (7)

FACTORY
SETTING

10.0
10.0
10.0

5.2
5.2
5.2

E1-01

230V,
460V or
575V (5)

5.48

C1-10
C1-11

1
0.00

5.2
5.2

C2-01
C2-02
C2-03
C2-04

0.20
0.20
0.20
0.00

5.3
5.3
5.3
5.3

E1-02
E1-03
E1-04

0
F
60.0

5.41
5.47
5.48

E1-05

230.0V,
460.0V or
575.0V (5)

5.48

C3-01
C3-02
C3-03
C3-04
C3-05
C3-06

1.0 (6)
200 (6)
200
0
0
0

5.38
5.38
5.38
5.38
5.38
5.38

E1-06
E1-07
E1-08

60.0
3.0 (6)
(2) (6)

5.48
5.48
5.48

E1-09
E1-10

0.5 (6)
(2) (6)

5.48
5.48

C4-01
C4-02
C4-03
C4-04
C4-05

1.00
20 (6)
0.0
0.0
10

5.42
5.42
5.42
5.42
5.42

E1-11
E1-12
E1-13

0.0
0.0
0.0

5.48
5.48
5.48

C5-01
C5-02

20.00 (6)
0.500 (6)

5.7
5.7

E2-01
E2-02
E2-03

(5)
(5)
(5)

5.41
2.4
2.4

C5-03
C5-04
C5-05

20.00 (6)
0.500 (6)
5.0

5.7
5.7
p. A1-8

E2-04
E2-05
E2-06

4
(5)
(5)

2.4
2.4
2.4

C5-06
C5-07
C5-08

0.004
0.0
400

5.7
5.7
p. A1-8

E2-07
E2-08
E2-09
E2-10

0.50 (5)
0.75 (5)
0.0 (5)

2.4
2.4
2.4
p. A1-13

C6-01
C6-02
C6-03

10.0 (5)
10.0 (5)
0 (5)

5.8
5.8
5.8

C7-01
C7-02

1
1.00

5.23
5.23

C8-08
C8-09
C8-30

1.00
50
2

5.6
5.6
p. A1-9

d1-01
d1-02
d1-03

0.0
0.0
0.0

5.25 B
5.25 B
5.25 B

d1-04
d1-05
d1-06

0.0
0.0
0.0

5.25 B
5.25 B
5.25 B

d1-07
d1-08
d1-09

0.0
0.0
6.0

5.25 B
5.25 B
5.25 B

d2-01
d2-02

100.0
0.0

d3-01
d3-02
d3-03
d3-04

(See Note 3)

USER
SETTING

PARA.
REF.

E3-01

2

E4-01
E4-02
E4-03

60.0
60.0

E4-04
E4-05
E4-06
E4-07

3.0 (6)
(2) (6)
0.5 (6)
(2) (6)

5.45.1
5.45.1
5.45.1
5.45.1

E5-01
E5-02
E5-03

(5)
(5)
(5)

5.45.1
5.45.1
5.45.1

E5-04
E5-05
E5-06

4
(5)
(5)

5.45.1
5.45.1
5.45.1

F1-01
F1-02
F1-03

1024
1
1

5.15 A
5.15 B
5.15 C

5.22
5.22

F1-04
F1-05
F1-06

3
0
1

5.15 D
5.15 E
(8)

0.0
0.0
0.0
1.0

5.9
5.9
5.9
5.9

F1-07
F1-08
F1-09

0
115
0.0 (6)

5.15 F
5.15 C
5.15 C

d4-01
d4-02

0
10

5.21
5.32 H

F1-10
F1-11

10
0.5

5.15 D
5.15 D

5.2
5.2
5.2

d5-01
d5-02
d5-03

0
0
1

5.43
5.43
5.43

F1-12
F1-13
F1-14

0
0
2.0

5.15 G
5.15 G
5.15 B

F2-01

0

(9)

5.2
5.2
5.2

d5-04
d5-05
d5-06

0
10
0

5.43
5.43
5.43

F3-01

0

(10)

xiv

5.45.1
230.0V, 5.45.1
460.0V or 5.45.1
575.0V (5) 5.45.1

QUICK REFERENCE FOR GPD 515/G5 PARAMETERS (FACTORY SET)
PARAMETER
NUMBER (7)

FACTORY
SETTING

F4-01
F4-02
F4-03
F4-04
F4-05
F4-06

USER
SETTING

PARA.
REF.

PARAMETER
NUMBER (7)

FACTORY
SETTING

2
1.00
3
0.50
0.0
0.0

(11)
(11)
(11)
(11)
(11)
(11)

H4-01
H4-02
H4-03

F5-01
F5-02

0
1

(12)
(12)

F6-01

0

(13)

F7-01

1

(14)

F8-01

1

p. A1-17

F9-01
F9-02
F9-03

0
0
1

p. A1-17
p. A1-17
p. A1-17

F9-04
F9-05
F9-06

0
1
1

H1-01
H1-02
H1-03

PARA.
REF.

PARAMETER
NUMBER (7)

FACTORY
SETTING

2
1.00
0.0

5.31
5.31
5.31

L6-04
L6-05
L6-06

0
150
0.1

5.44
5.44
5.44

H4-04
H4-05

3
0.50

5.31
5.31

H4-06
H4-07

0.0
0

5.31
5.31

L7-01
L7-02
L7-03
L7-04

200
200
200
200

5.45
5.45
5.45
5.45

H5-01
H5-02
H5-03
H5-04
H5-05

1F
3
0
3
1

5.28
5.28
5.28
5.28
5.28

L8-01
L8-02
L8-03

0
(5)
3

5.27
5.27
5.27

L1-01
L1-02

1
8.0

5.41
5.41

L8-05
L8-07
L8-10
L8-17
L8-19

0
1
1
1
0

5.34
5.35
5.27
5.27
5.27

p. A1-17
p. A1-17
p. A1-17

L2-01
L2-02
L2-03

0
0.7 (5)
0.5 (5)

5.29
5.29
5.32 D

o1-01
o1-02
o1-03

6
1
0

5.12
5.12
5.11

24
14
3 (0) (3)

5.32
5.32
5.32

L2-04
L2-05
L2-06

(5)
190
0.0

5.29
5.29
p. A1-21

o1-04
o1-05

0
0

5.11
5.11

H1-04
H1-05
H1-06

4 (3) (3)
6 (4) (3)
8 (6) (3)

5.32
5.32
5.32

L3-01
L3-02
L3-03

1
150
50

5.39
5.39
5.39

o2-01
o2-02
o2-03

1
1
0

5.26
5.26
5.46

H2-01
H2-02
H2-03

0
1
2

5.33
5.33
5.33

L3-04
L3-05
L3-06

1
1
160

5.39
5.39
5.39

o2-04
o2-05
o2-06

(5)
0
1

p. A3-1
5.26
5.26

H3-01
H3-02
H3-03

0
100.0
0.0

5.19
5.18
5.18

L4-01
L4-02
L4-03

0.0
2.0
0.0

5.33
5.33
5.33

o2-07
o2-08
o2-09

00000
0
1

5.26
5.26
p. A1-26

H3-04
H3-05
H3-06

0
0
100.0

5.19
5.30
5.18

L4-04
L4-05

2.0
0

5.33
5.20

U1-01
thru
U1-34

(4)

——

(4)

H3-07
H3-08
H3-09

0.0
2
1F

5.18
5.19
5.30

L5-01
L5-02

0
0

5.5
5.5

(4)

——

(4)

H3-10
H3-11
H3-12

100.0
0.0
0.00

5.18
5.18
p. A1-19

L6-01
L6-02
L6-03

0
150
0.1

5.44
5.44
5.44

(4)

——

(4)

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)

USER
SETTING

190,
380, or
546 (5)

U2-01
thru
U2-14
U3-01
thru
U3-08

USER
SETTING

PARA.
REF.

To establish a custom User Access Level, refer to paragraph 5.4.
Initial value is related to V/f curve selected by E1-03 setting.
Settings in parentheses reflect 3-wire control initialization values.
Monitor displays ( UX-XX ) are display or output selections, rather than parameter setup; therefore, user setting is not
possible.
Factory setting depends on drive rating. See Table A3-1.
Factory setting depends on Control Method ( A1-02 ).
Not all parameters are accessible in all Access Levels ( A1-01 ) and Control Methods ( A1-02 ); see Section 5.
Only effective with PG-D2 or PG-B2 option card; see instruction sheet 2Y25-396.
Only effective with AI-14B or AI-14U option card; see instruction sheet 2Y25-296 or -295.
Only effective with DI-08 or DI-16H2 option card; see instruction sheet 2Y25-294 or -400.
Only effective with AO-08, AO-12 or AO-12B2 option card; see instruction sheet 2Y25-297 or -438.
Only effective with DO-02C option card; see instruction sheet 2Y25-402.
Only effective with DO-08 option card; see instruction sheet 2Y25-350.
Only effective with PO-36F option card; see instruction sheet 2Y25-298.

xv

Current Ratings & Horsepower Range
RATED
INPUT

2
3
0
V

4
6
0
V

6
0
0
V

CURRENT
RATING (AMPS)

NOMINAL HORSEPOWER
(150% OL)

NEW DRIVE
MODEL NO.
CIMR-G5M

OLD DRIVE
MODEL NO.
GPD515C-

3.2
6
8
11
17.5
25
33
49
64
80
96
130
160
224
300
1.8
3.4
4.8
8
11
14
21
27
34
41
52
65
80
96
128
165
224
302
340
450
605
3.5
4.1
6.3
9.8
12.5
17
22
27
32
41
52
62
77
99
130
172
200

0.75
1 & 1.5
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25 & 30
30
40 & 50
60
75
100
0.75
1&2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200 & 250
300
350
400 & 500
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200

20P41F
20P71F
21P51F
22P21F
23P71F
25P51F
27P51F
20111F
20151F
20181F
20221F
20300F
20370F
20550F
20750F
40P41F
40P71F
41P51F
43P71F
44P01F
45P51F
47P51F
40111F
40151F
40181F
40221F
40301F
40371F
40451F
40551F
40750F
41100F
41600F
41850F
42200F
43000F
51P51F
52P21F
53P71F
55P51F
57P51F
50111F
50151F
50181F
50221F
50301F
50371F
50451F
50551F
50751F
50900F
51100F
51600F

A003
A006
A008
A011
A017
A025
A033
A049
A064
A080
A096
A130
A160
A224
A300
B001
B003
B004
B008
B011
B014
B021
B027
B034
B041
B052
B065
B080
B096
B128
B165
B224
B302
B340
B450
B605
C003
C004
C006
C010
C012
C017
C022
C027
C032
C041
C052
C062
C077
C099
C130
C172
C200

xvii

WARNING
Do not touch circuit components until main input power has been turned off and
“CHARGE” lamp is extinguished. The capacitors are still charged and can be quite
dangerous.
Do not connect or disconnect wires and connectors while power is applied to the
circuit.

CAUTION
Know your application before using either Initialization function of A1-03 . This
parameter must be set to " 0 " for Drive mode operation.
" 1110 " = User Default Parameter Initialization
" 2220 " = Factory 2-Wire Control Initialization (Maintained RUN Contact)
" 3330 " = Factory 3-Wire Control Initialization (Momentary START/STOP
Contact)
Entering any Initialization code resets all parameters, and automatically returns
A1-03 setting to " 0 ". If the GPD 515 is connected for 3-Wire control and this parameter is set to " 2220 " (2-Wire Control Initialization), the motor may run in reverse
direction WITHOUT A RUN COMMAND APPLIED. Equipment damage or personal
injury may result.

CAUTION
When drive is programmed for auto-restart ( L5-02 = " 1 " thru " 10 "), the motor may
restart unexpectedly — personal injury may result.

Data subject to change without notice.
xviii

IMPORTANT
Wiring should be performed only by qualified personnel.
Always ground the drive using ground terminal (

). See paragraph 1.4.3, "Grounding".

Verify that the rated voltage of the drive matches the voltage of the incoming power.
Never connect main circuit output terminals T1, T2, and T3 to AC main circuit power supply.
All parameters have been factory set. Do not change their settings unnecessarily.
Do not perform a “HIPOT” or withstand voltage test on any part of the drive. Equipment
uses semi-conductors and is vulnerable to high voltage.
The Control PCB employs CMOS ICs which are easily damaged by static electricity. Use proper electrostatic discharge (ESD) procedures when handling the Control PCB.
Any modification of the product by the user is not the responsibility of Yaskawa, and will
void the warranty.

xix

It is important that users of our products have a
totally satisfying ownership experience.
Training is one of the most effective ways to ensure
that satisfaction. Because of this conviction,
Yaskawa Electric has operated a full-time professional
training department since 1965.
Our trainers are full-time instructors, with a
wealth of “real-life” product experience gained
through field service at customer facilities. This
experience, combined with backgrounds in engineering and education, has earned national recognition
for our technical training programs.
Courses are conducted at the headquarters training
facility, in selected cities, and at customer sites.
Courses are available to cover all the issues of
concern to product users: application, theory of
operation, troubleshooting and repair, adjustment
and startup, operation, programming, network communication, and optimizing the functions of Yaskawa drives.

Technical Training

Technical Training

We work hard to make all of our products user-friendly, and our owner manuals easy to use.
In spite of that, the simple fact is that you will learn better and faster in a class environment combined with hands-on practice,
than by self-teaching when under the stress of a maintenance or operations problem.

On-Site Training and Customized Courses
Training courses are also provided at the user’s site. Course content can be customized to the specific installation and application if requested. For further information about on-site training and courses specific to your installation and application, visit our
website at www.drives.com.
Please send training information on:
Name ______________________________________________________________________________________________
Position/Title ________________________________________________________________________________________
Company ___________________________________________________________________________________________
Address ____________________________________________________________________________________________
City _______________________________________________State _______________Zip __________________________
Phone ______________________________________________________________________________________________
Fax ________________________________________________________________________________________________
Representative (if known): ______________________________________________________________________________
FAX this completed form to (847) 887-7185

TM 4515

Section 1.
1.1

RECEIVING AND INSTALLATION

GENERAL

The GPD 515/G5, hereafter referred to as the drive, is a general purpose sine-coded pulse
width modulated AC motor drive which generates an adjustable voltage/frequency three
phase output for complete speed control of most conventional squirrel cage induction
motors. Automatic stall prevention and voltage boost prevents nuisance tripping during load
or line side transient conditions. The drive will not induce any voltage line notching distortion
back to the utility line and maintains a displacement power factor of not less than 0.98
throughout its speed range.
When properly installed, operated and maintained, the drive will provide a lifetime of
service. It is mandatory that the person who operates, inspects, or maintains this
equipment thoroughly read and understand this manual before proceeding.
This manual primarily describes the GPD 515/G5, but contains basic information for the
operator control station as well. This manual is equally applicable to drives labelled
GPD 515 or G5.
1.2

RECEIVING

The drive is thoroughly tested at the factory. After unpacking, verify the part numbers
with the purchase order (invoice). Any damages or shortages evident when the equipment
is received must be reported immediately to the commercial carrier who transported the
equipment. Assistance, if required, is available from your sales representative.
If the drive will be stored after receiving, keep it in its original packaging and store
according to storage temperature specifications in Appendix 2.
1.3

P H Y S I C A L INSTALLATION

Location of the drive is important to achieve proper performance and normal operating life.
The unit should be installed in an area where it will be protected from:
•
•
•

Direct sunlight, rain or moisture.
Corrosive gases or liquids.
Vibration, airborne dust or metallic particles.

When preparing to mount the drive, lift it by its base, n e v e r by the front cover. For
effective cooling as well as proper maintenance, the drive must be installed on a flat, nonflammable vertical surface (wall or panel) using four mounting screws. There MUST be a
MINIMUM 4.7 in. clearance above and below the drive to allow air flow over the heat sink
fins. A minimum 1.2 in. clearance is required on each side on the drive.
A GPD 515/G5 in a free-standing floor-mount cabinet must be positioned with enough
clear-ance for opening the door of the cabinet; this will ensure sufficient air space for
cooling. Make sure air entering the drive is below 113°F (45°C) (for protected chassis
drives), or below 104°F (40°C) (for NEMA 1 drives), by adding a fan or other cooling
device, if needed. See environmental specifications in Appendix 2.

1-1

1.4

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

All basic interconnections (using the Digital Operator) are shown in Figures 1-3 and 1-4.
1.4.1

Main Circuit Input/Output

Complete wire interconnections according to Table 1-2, Figure 1-3 and Figure 1-4. Be sure to
observe the following:
• Use 600V vinyl-sheathed wire or equivalent. Wire size and type should be determined by local
electrical codes.
• Avoid routing power wiring near equipment sensitive to electrical noise.
• Avoid running input and output wiring in the same conduit.
• NEVER connect AC main power to output terminals T1(U), T2(V), and T3(W).
• NEVER allow wire leads to contact metal surfaces. Short-circuit may result.
• NEVER connect power factor correction capacitors to the drive output. Consult
Yaskawa when connecting noise filters to the drive output.
• WIRE SIZING MUST BE SUITABLE FOR CLASS I CIRCUITS.
• When connecting motor to drive’s output terminals, include a separate ground wire. Attach ground
wire solidly to motor frame and to drive’s ground terminal.
• When using armored or shielded cable for connection between drive and motor, solidly connect
armor or shield to motor frame, and to drive’s ground terminal.
• Motor lead length should NOT EXCEED 164 feet (50 meters), and motor wiring should be run in
a separate conduit from other power wiring. If lead length must exceed this distance, reduce
carrier frequency (see paragraph 5.8) and consult factory for proper installation procedures.
• Use UL listed closed loop connectors or CSA certified ring connectors sized for the selected wire
gauge. Install connectors using the correct crimp tool recommended by the connector
manufacturer.
WIRE SIZE
AWG

mm2

20
18
16

0.5
0.75
1.25

14

2

12

3.5

10

5.5

8

8

6
4

14
22

2

38

1/0
3/0

60
80

4/0

100

MCM300
MCM400

150
200

MCM650

325

TERMINAL
SCREW

CLOSED-LOOP
CONNECTOR

M3.5
M4
M4
M4
M5
M4
M5
M4
M5
M5
M6
M6
M8
M8
M10
M10
M10
M10
M12
M12
M12
M12
M16

1.25 - 3.5
1.25 - 4
1.25 - 4
2-4
2-5
3.5 - 4
3.5 - 5
5.5 - 4
5.5 - 5
8-5
8-6
14 - 6
22 - 8
38 - 8
38 - 10
60 - 10
80 - 10
100 - 10
100 - 12
150 - 12
200 - 12
325 - 12
325 - 16

1-2

CLAMPING TORQUE
STEEL
COPPER
lb-in
N-m
lb-in
N-m
7.8
0.9
7.0
0.8
13.0
1.5
10.4
1.2
13.0
1.5
10.4
1.2
13.0
1.5
10.4
1.2
26.1
20.9
3.1
2.4
13.0
1.5
10.4
1.2
26.1
20.9
3.1
2.4
13.0
1.5
10.4
1.2
26.1
20.9
3.1
2.4
26.1
20.9
3.1
2.4
40.9
34.8
4.8
4.1
40.9
34.8
4.8
4.1
100.0
82.6
11.7
10.7
100.0
82.6
11.7
10.7
182.6
156.5
21.4
18.4
182.6
156.5
21.4
18.4
182.6
156.5
21.4
18.4
182.6
156.5
21.4
18.4
313.0
191.3
36.7
23.1
313.0
191.3
36.7
23.1
313.0
191.3
36.7
23.1
313.0
191.3
36.7
23.1
313.0
191.3
36.7
23.1

Table 1-1. Typical Wire Sizing For Main Circuit*
SECTION A. 230V
NEWHP
DRIVE
OLD DRIVE
TERMINAL
MODEL
NO.TERMINAL
MODELSYMBOL
NO.
TERMINAL SYMBOL
RATING
CIMR-G5M
GPD515C–

WIRE SIZE

TERMINAL
SCREW SCREW

AWG
AWG

WIRE SIZE
MM2
mm2

20P41F
20P71F

A003,
A006

L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),
T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W),

, ⊕ 1, ⊕ 2, B1, B2,

M4

14 - 10

2 - 5.5

21P51F

A008

L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),
T2 (V), T3 (W)

, ⊕ 1, ⊕ 2, B1, B2, T1 (U),

M4

14 - 10

2 - 5.5

M4

12 - 10

3.5 - 5.5

22P21F

A011

L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),
T2 (V), T3 (W),

, ⊕ 1, ⊕ 2, B1, B2, T1 (U),

M4

12 - 10

3.5 - 5.5

23P71F

A017

L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),
T2 (V), T3 (W),

, ⊕ 1, ⊕ 2, B1, B2, T1 (U),

M4

10

5.5

25P51F
27P51F

A025,
A033

L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),
T2 (V), T3 (W)

, ⊕ 1, ⊕ 2, B1, B2, T1 (U),

M5

8

8

M5

10 - 8

5.5 - 8

20111F

A049

L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),
T2 (V), T3 (W)

, ⊕ 1, ⊕ 2, ⊕ 3, T1 (U),

M6

4

22

M6

8

8

20151F

A064

L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),
T2 (V), T3 (W)

, ⊕ 1, ⊕ 2, ⊕ 3, T1 (U),

M8

3

30

M6

8

8

20181F
20221F

A080,
A096

L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),
T2 (V), T3 (W)

, ⊕ 1, ⊕ 2, ⊕ 3, T1 (U),

M8

3

30

20300F

A130

M8

6

14

l1 (r), l2 (s)

M4

20 - 10

0.5 - 5.5

L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W)

M10

4/0

100

M8

4

22

, ⊕ 3,
20370F

A160

l1 (r), l2 (s)

M4

20 - 10

0.5 - 5.5

L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W)

M10

1/0 x 2P

60 x 2P

, ⊕ 3,
20550F

A224

M8

4

22

l1 (r), l2 (s)

M4

20 - 10

0.5 - 5.5

L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W)

M10

1/0 x 2P

60 x 2P

M8

3

30

, ⊕ 3,
20750F

A300

l1 (r), l2 (s)

M4

20 - 10

0.5 - 5.5

L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W)

M12

4/0 x 2P

100 x 2P

, ⊕ 3,
l1 (r), l2 (s)
* Consult local electrical codes for wire sizing requirements.

1-3

M8

1

50

M4

20 - 10

0.5 - 5.5

Table 1-1. Typical Wire Sizing For Main Circuit - Continued*
DRIVE
NEW
DRIVE
OLD DRIVE
MODELNO.
NO. TERMINAL
MODEL SYMBOL
NO.
MODEL
TERMINAL SYMBOL
CIMR-G5M
GPD515C–

40P41F

B001

40P71F
41P51F
43P71F
44P01F
45P51F
47P51F

B003,
B004,
B008
B011,
B014
B021

40111F
40151F

B027,
B034

40181F

B041

40221F

40301F

40371F

40451F

B052

M4

14 - 10

2 - 5.5

, ⊕ 1, ⊕ 2, B1, B2, T1 (U),

M4

14 - 10

2 - 5.5

L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),
T2 (V), T3 (W),
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),
T2 (V), T3 (W),
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),
T2 (V), T3 (W)

, ⊕ 1, ⊕ 2, B1, B2, T1 (U),

M4
M4

12 - 10
12 - 10

3.5 - 5.5
3.5 - 5.5

, ⊕ 1, ⊕ 2, B1, B2, T1 (U),

M4

8-6

8 - 14

, ⊕ 1, ⊕ 2, B1, B2, T1 (U),

M5

8-6

8 - 14

L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),
T2 (V), T3 (W)

, ⊕ 1, ⊕ 2, ⊕ 3, T1 (U),

M6
M6

8
6

8
14

, ⊕ 1, ⊕ 2, ⊕ 3, T1 (U),

M8
M4
M6

8
20 - 10
4

8
0.5 - 5.5
22

, ⊕ 1, ⊕ 2, ⊕ 3, T1 (U),

M8
M4
M8

8
20 - 10
4

8
0.5 - 5.5
22

, ⊕ 1, ⊕ 2, ⊕ 3, T1 (U),

M8
M4
M8

8
20 - 10
3

8
0.5 - 5.5
30

, ⊕ 1, ⊕ 2, ⊕ 3, T1 (U),

M8
M4
M8

6
20 - 10
1

14
0.5 - 5.5
50

M8
M4
M10
M8
M4
M10
M8
M4
M10
M8
M4
M12
M8
M4
M16

6
20 - 10
4/0
4
20 - 10
1/0 x 2P
4
20 - 10
1/0 x 2P
3
20 - 10
4/0 x 2P
1
20 - 10
MCM650 x 2P

14
0.5 - 5.5
100
22
0.5 - 5.5
60 x 2P
22
0.5 - 5.5
60 x 2P
30
0.5 - 5.5
100 x 2P
50
0.5 - 5.5
325 x 2P

M8
M4

1/0
20 - 10

60
0.5 - 5.5

l1 (r), l2 (s )
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),
T2 (V), T3 (W)
l1 (r), l2 (s )
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),
T2 (V), T3 (W)

B080

l1 (r), l2 (s )
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),
T2 (V), T3 (W)

B096

l1 (r), l2 (s )
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),
T2 (V), T3 (W)

B128

40750F

B165

41100F

B224

41600F

B302

41850F
42200F
43000F

B340,
B450,
B605

WIRE SIZE
WIRE SIZE
TERMINAL
SCREW
AWG
mm2
SCREW
AWG
mm2

, ⊕ 1, ⊕ 2, B1, B2, T1 (U),

L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),
T2 (V), T3 (W),
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),
T2 (V), T3 (W)

B065

40551F

Section B. 460V
TERMINAL

l1 (r), l2 (s )
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W)
, ⊕ 3,
l1 (r), l2 200 (s 200), l2 400 (s 400)
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W)
, ⊕ 3,
l1 (r), l2 200 (s 200), l2 400 (s 400)
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W)
, ⊕ 3,
l1 (r), l2 200 (s 200), l2 400 (s 400)
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W)
, ⊕ 3,
l1 (r), l2 200 (s 200), l2 400 (s 400)
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), , ⊕ 1, ⊕ 3, T1 (U), T2 (V),
T3 (W)
l1 (r), l2 200 (s 200), l2 400 (s 400)

* Consult local electrical codes for wire sizing requirements.

1-4

Table 1-1. Typical Wire Sizing For Main Circuit - Continued*
DRIVE
TERMINAL
NEW
DRIVE
OLD DRIVE
MODEL
MODEL NO.TERMINAL
NO.
MODELSYMBOL
NO.
TERMINAL SYMBOL
CIMR-G5M
GPD515C–

Section C. 600V
WIRE SIZE

TERMINAL
SCREW
SCREW

WIRE SIZE

AWG

mm2
mm2

AWG

51P51F
52P21F

C003,
C004

L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),
T2 (V), T3 (W)

, ⊕ 1, ⊕ 2, B1, B2, T1 (U),

M4

14-10

2 - 5.5

53P71F

C006

L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),
T2 (V), T3 (W)

, ⊕ 1, ⊕ 2, B1, B2, T1 (U),

M4

14-10

2 - 5.5

55P51F

C010

L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),
T2 (V), T3 (W)

, ⊕ 1, ⊕ 2, B1, B2, T1 (U),

M4

12-10
12-10

3.5-5.5
3.5-5.5

57P51F

C012

L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),
T2 (V), T3 (W)

, ⊕ 1, ⊕ 2, B1, B2, T1 (U),

M4

10

5.5

50111F

C017

L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),
T2 (V), T3 (W)

, ⊕ 1, ⊕ 2, B1, B2, T1 (U),

M5

12-10
10-6

3.5-5.5
5.5-14

50151F

C022

L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),
T2 (V), T3 (W)

, ⊕ 1, ⊕ 2, B1, B2, T1 (U),

M6
M5

8-6

8-14

50181F
50221F

C027
C032

L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),
T2 (V), T3 (W)

,⊕ 1, B1, B2, T1 (U),

M6
M6

10-6
8-6

5.5-14
8-14

50301F

C041

l1 (r), l2(s )
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),

,⊕1, T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W)

50371F

C052

l1 (r), l2(s )
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),

,⊕1, T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W)

50451F

C062

l1 (r), l2(s )
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),

,⊕1, T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W)

50551F

C077

l1 (r), l2(s )
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),

,⊕1, T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W)

50751F

C099

l1 (r), l2(s )
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),

,⊕1, T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W)

50900F

C130

l1 (r), l2(s )
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),

,⊕1, T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W)

51100F

C172

l1 (r), l2(s )
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),

,⊕1, T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W)

51600F

C200

l1 (r), l2(s )
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),

,⊕1, T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W)

◆
M4
M8
◆
M4
M8
◆
M4
M8
◆
M4
M8
◆
M4
M8
◆
M4
M10
◆
M4
M12
◆
M4
M12
◆
M4

10-6
14 - 10
6-1/0
8-2
14 - 10
4-1/0
8-2
14 - 10
3-1/0
8-2
14 - 10
2-1/0
6-2
14 - 10
2/0-1/0
4-2
14 - 10
3/0-300
4-2/0
14 - 10
300-400
4-2/0
14 - 10
350-400
3-2/0
14 - 10

5.5-14
2 - 5.5
14-50
8-30
2 - 5.5
22-50
8-30
2 - 5.5
30-50
8-30
2 - 5.5
30-50
22-30
2 - 5.5
50-60
22-30
2 - 5.5
80-150
22-60
2 - 5.5
150-200
22-60
2 - 5.5
180-200
30-60
2 - 5.5

l1 (r), l2(s )
* Consult local electrical codes for wire sizing requirements.
◆Indicates terminal uses a pressure lug.

1-5

Table 1-2. Terminal Functions and Voltages of Main Circuit
SECTION A. 230V

TERMINAL
TERMINAL

New Model No.
CIMR-G5M
Old
Model No.
1 HP
GPD515C-

20P41F 27P51F
A003 - A033

FUNCTION
SECTION A. 230V
20181F
20111F - 20151F
FUNCTION 20221F
3 TO 40 HP A080, A049 - A064
A096

20300F - 20750F
A130 - A300

L1 (R)
L2 (S)
L3 (T)

Three phase Main circuit input power supply
200 / 208 / 220V at 50 Hz; 200 / 208 / 220 / 230V at 60 Hz

T1 (U)
T2 (V)
T3 (W)

Three phase AC output to motor
0V to max. input voltage level

B1
B2

DB Resistor terminals (B1 & B2)

⊕1
⊕2
⊕3

––––––

DC Reactor terminals (⊕1 & ⊕2)
DC Bus terminals (⊕1 & )

––––––

––––––

l 1 (r)
l 2 (s )

DB Unit terminals (⊕3 &

)

Power for heat sink fan:
l 1 to l 2 : 230 VAC

––––––
Ground terminal (100 ohms or less)
SECTION B. 460V
SECTION B.FUNCTION
460V

TERMINAL
TERMINAL

New Model No.
CIMR-G5M
FUNCTION
Old Model No.
GPD515C-

40P41F - 40151F

40181F - 40451F
1 TO 60 HP

B001 - B034

B041 - B096

L1 (R)
L2 (S)
L3 (T)

Three phase Main circuit input power supply
380 / 400 / 415 / 460V at 50/60 Hz

T1 (U)
T2 (V)
T3 (W)

Three phase AC output to motor
0V to max. input voltage level

B1
B2
⊕1
⊕2
⊕3
l 1 (r)
l 2 (s )
l 2 200 (s 200)
l 2 400 (s 400)

40551F - 43000F

DB Resistor terminals (B1 & B2)

B128 - B605

––––––

DC Reactor terminals (⊕1 & ⊕2)
DC Bus terminals (⊕1 & )

––––––

––––––

DB Unit terminals (⊕3 &
Power for heat sink fan:
l 1 to l 2 : 230 VAC

––––––

––––––
Ground terminal

– – – – – indicates that terminals are not present.

1-6

)

Power for heat sink fan:
l 1 to l 2 200: 230 Vac
l 1 to l 2 400: 460 Vac

Table 1-2. Terminal Functions and Voltages of Main Circuit
SECTION C. 600V
FUNCTION
TERMINAL

New Model No.
CIMR-G5M

51P51F - 50151F

50181F - 50221F

50301F - 51600F

Old Model No.
GPD515C-

C003 - C022

C027 - C032

C041 - C200

L1 (R)
L2 (S)
L3 (T)

Three phase Main circuit input power supply
500 / 575 / 600V at 50 Hz / 60HZ

T1 (U)
T2 (V)
T3 (W)

Three phase AC output to motor
0V to max. input voltage level

B1
B2

⊕1
⊕2

DB Resistor terminals (B1 & B2)

DC Reactor terminals (⊕ 1 & ⊕ 2)
DC Bus terminals (⊕ 1 &
)

DB Units terminals (⊕ 1 &
DC Bus terminals (⊕ 1 &

l 1 (r)
l 2 (s )

Power for heat sink fan:
l 1 to l 2 : 600 VAC
Ground terminal (100 ohms or less)

1-7

) (C041 to C200 only)
)

Main Circuit Configuration Block Diagrams 230V
(DCL
Option)

B1

B2

+ 1
+ 2
L1 (R)

U (T1)

+

L2 (S)

CIMR-G5M20P41F to 27P51F
GPD515C-A003 to -A033

V (T2)

L3 (T)

W (T3)

_

Power
Supply
(RCC)

Control
Circuit

Cooling Fan
(A011 to A033 only)

(DCL
Option)

+ 3
+ 1
+ 2
L1 (R)

U (T1)

+

L2 (S)

V (T2)

L3 (T)

W (T3)

_

Power
Supply

CIMR-G5M20111F to 20151F
GPD515C-A049 to -A064

Control
Circuit

(RCC)
Cooling Fan

+ 3
+ 1
+ 2
L1 (R)

U (T1)

+

L2 (S)

V (T2)

L3 (T)

CIMR-G5M20181F, 20221F
GPD515C-A080, -A096
When using DC input as main circuit
power, connect 230Vac to control power
transformer terminals l (r) and l (s).

W (T3)

_

Cooling Fan

Power
Supply
(RCC)
Internal
Cooling Fan

+ 3

L1 (R)

U (T1)

+

L2 (S)

V (T2)

L3 (T)

W (T3)

CIMR-G5M20300F to 20750F
GPD515C-A130 to -A300

_

Power
Supply
(RCC)
Cooling Fan

When using DC input as main circuit
power, connect 230Vac to control power
transformer terminals l (r) and l (s).

Control
Circuit

Internal
Cooling Fan

1-8

Control
Circuit

Main Circuit Configuration Block Diagrams 460V
(DCL
Option)

B1

B2

+ 1
+ 2
L1 (R)

U (T1)

+

L2 (S)

CIMR-G5M40P41F to 40151F
GPD515C- B001 to - B034

V (T2)

L3 (T)

W (T3)

_

Power
Supply
(RCC)

Control
Circuit

Cooling Fan
(B008 to B034 only)

+ 3
+ 1
+ 2
L1 (R)

U (T1)

+

L2 (S)

V (T2)

L3 (T)

CIMR-G5M40181F to 40451F
GPD515C- B041 to - B096

W (T3)

When using DC input as main circuit
power, connect 460Vac to control power
transformer terminals l1 (r) and l2 (s).

_

Cooling Fan

Power
Supply

Control
Circuit

(RCC)
Internal
Cooling Fan

+ 3

L1 (R)

CIMR-G5M40551F to 41600F
GPD515C- B128 to - B302

U (T1)

+

L2 (S)

W (T3)

_

When using DC input as main circuit
power, connect 460Vac to control
power transformer terminals l1 (r) and
l2 400 (s400).

Power
Supply

Control
Circuit

(RCC)

Cooling Fan

Internal
Cooling Fan

+ 3
+ 1

L1 (R)

U (T1)

+

L2 (S)

V (T2)

L3 (T)

CIMR-G5M41850F to 43000F
GPD515C- B340 to - B605

W (T3)

_

Power
Supply

V (T2)

L3 (T)

When using DC input as main
circuit power, connect 460Vac to
control
power
transformer
terminals l1 (r) and l2 400 (s400).

Control
Circuit

(RCC)

Cooling Fan

1-9

Main Circuit Configuration Block Diagrams 600V
(DCL
Option)

B1

B2

+ 1
+ 2
L1 (R)

U (T1)

+

L2 (S)

CIMR-G5M51P51F to 50151F
GPD515C- C003 to - C022

W (T3)

_

Power
Supply
(RCC)

When using DC input as main circuit
power, connect 600Vac to control
power transformer terminals r and s.

B1

V (T2)

L3 (T)

Control
Circuit

Cooling Fan

B2

+ 1

L1 (R)

U (T1)

+

L2 (S)

V (T2)

L3 (T)

W (T3)

_

Power
Supply

CIMR-G5M50181F to 50221F
GPD515C-C027 to -C032
When using DC input as main circuit
power, connect 600Vac to control
power transformer terminals r and s.

Control
Circuit

(RCC)

Cooling Fan

+ 1

L1 (R)

U (T1)

+

L2 (S)

V (T2)

L3 (T)

CIMR-G5M50301F to 51600F
GPD515C-C041 to -C200
When using DC input as main
circuit power, connect 600Vac to
control
power
transformer
terminals r and s.

1-10

W (T3)

_

Power
Supply
(RCC)

Cooling Fan

Control
Circuit

1.4.2

Grounding

• The drive must be solidly grounded using the main circuit ground terminal.
• If Drive is installed in a cabinet with other equipment, ground leads for all equipment should be
connected to a common low-impedance ground point within the cabinet.
• The supply neutral should be connected to the ground point within the cabinet.
• Select appropriate ground wire size from Table 1-1.
• Make all ground wires as short as practical.
• NEVER ground the drive in common with welding machines or other high power electrical
equipment.
• Where several drives are used, ground each directly to the ground point (see Figure 1-1). DO
NOT FORM A LOOP WITH THE GROUND LEADS.
• When connecting a motor to the drive’s output terminals, include a separate ground wire. Attach
ground wire solidly to motor frame and to drive’s ground terminal.
• When using armored or shielded cable for connection between drive and motor, solidly connect
armor or shield to motor frame, and to the drive’s ground terminal.

PREFERRED

NOT RECOMMENDED

NOT
ACCEPTABLE

A. Grounding of Three Drives

CORRECT

NOT RECOMMENDED

B. Grounding of Drive & Vector Control Motor (VCM)

Figure 1-1. Grounding
1.4.3

Auxiliary Input and Output Power Option Devices

A disconnect device (circuit breaker, contactor, disconnect switch, etc.) should NOT be used as a
means of starting and stopping the drive or motor.
A disconnect device can be installed for emergency stop purposes, but when that disconnect
device is opened, there may be loss of electrical braking.

1-11

Figure 1-2 is a factory guideline for proper wiring practices and relative locations within the electrical
path from the line to the load. It does not imply what devices are needed for a particular
application, nor does it show what devices were shipped with a particular order. Therefore,
disregard those items in the diagram which are not being used in your installation. However, it is
recommended that an input or DC reactor be used with models GPD515C-A003 thru -A064
(CIMR-G5M20P41F thru 20151F), -B001 thru -B034 (40P41F thru 40151F) , and -C003 thru -C062
(51P51F thru 51451F) when wired to a source of 600 kVA or greater. Mount all optional power
devices close to the drive, and keep electrical connections as short as possible.
ISOLATION
TRANSFORMER
CUSTOMER'S
3Ø A.C. LINE
POWER
SUPPLY

L3

H3

X3

L2

H2

X2

L1

H1

X1

INPUT
RFI FILTER
C1(L3)

INPUT
REACTOR

(L3)C2

L
O (L2)B2
A
D (L1)A2

L
B1(L2) I
N
A1(L1) E

C1

C2

B1

B2

A1

A2

(G)

PANEL GROUND
SEE NOTE 2
RF NOISE
FILTER
SEE NOTE 5

NOTES
1.

Connect drive ground terminal or panel to
earth ground. Always use low impedance
paths and connections.

2.

Mount input and output RFI filters physically
as close to the drive as possible (on the same
panel, if possible). Filters should have a solid
connection from filter ground terminal to the
cabinet ground point. If multiple input or
output RFI filters are used, they must be
wired in parallel.

3.
4.

5.

6.

SEE NOTE 3
L1

PANEL GROUND
SEE NOTE 2

L3

DC
REACTOR

INPUT
+ 1

Drive

+ 2

SEE NOTE 6

Shield individual conductors with metallic
conduit, or use armored or shielded cable.
Connect output conduit armored cable or
shielded cable in a manner that allows it to
act as an unbroken shield from the drive
panel to the motor casing.

L2

OUTPUT
T1

T2

PANEL GROUND
SEE NOTE 1

RF noise filter (different from RFI filter) part
no. 05P00325-0023 is a delta wye capacitor
network which is wired in parallel with the
drive input terminals. On the smaller drives
with die cast chassis, it must be mounted
externally. On the larger drives with sheet
metal chassis, it may be mounted inside the
area where the input power wiring enters the
drive. On units equipped with bypass, it may
be wired to the primary side of the circuit
breaker and mounted to the bypass panel or
sidewall.

SEE NOTES 3, 4
1

OUTPUT
RFI FILTER

2

3

IN
OUT
4

5

6

PANEL
GROUND
SEE NOTE 2

SEE NOTES 3, 4
A1

B1

C1

A2

B2

C2

OUTPUT
REACTOR

Connection points:

Drive Terminals
Input Power

L1, L2, L3

Output Power

T1, T2, T3

T1

T2

T3

A.C. MOTOR

Figure 1-2. Customer Connection Diagram For Isolation Transformers, Input
Reactors, Input RFI Filters, DC Reactors, Output Reactors and Output RFI FIlters
1-12

1.4.3a

Conformance to European EMC Directive

In order to conform to EMC standards, the following methods are required for line filter
application, cable shielding and drive installation. The following explains the outline of the
methods.
The line filter and the drive must be mounted on the same metal plate. The filter should
be mounted as close to the drive as practical. The cable must be kept as short as possible
and the metal plate should be securely grounded. The ground of the line filter and the
drive must be bonded to the metal plate with as much bare-metal contact as possible.
For main circuit input cables, a screened cable is recommended within the panel, and is
also suggested for external connections. The screen of the cable should be connected to
a solid ground. For the motor cables, a screened cable (max. 20 m) must be used and the
screen of the motor cable should be connected to ground at both ends by a short
connection, again using as much bare-metal contact as possible.
For more detailed explanation, refer to document EZZ006543, “Installation Guidelines For EMC
Directive using Yaskawa AC Drive Products.”
Table 1-2.1 and Figure 1-2A show the line filter list for EMC standards and the
installation/wiring of the drive and line filter.

Table 1-2.1. Line Filters for Drive
New Drive Model
Number
CIMR-G5M

Old Drive Model
Number
GPD 515C-

40P41F,
40P71F
41P51F,
43P71F,
44P01F
45P51F,
47P51F
40111F,
40151F
40181F,
40221F
40301F
40371F
40451F
40551F
40750F,
41100F
41600F
41850F
42200F
43000F

B001,
B003
B004,
B008,
B011
B014,
B021
B027,
B034
B041,
B052
B065
B080
B096
B128
B165,
B224
B302
B340
B450
B605

(1)
(2)

Line Filter
Rated
Mass
Current (A)
(kg)

Part Number
05P00325-

Dimensions in mm(1)
L x W x D (2)

0106

8

1.8

320 x 143 x 46

0103

20

1.8

320 x 143 x 46

0104

30

3.0

350 x 213 x 51

0105

60

5.3

435 x 268 x 56

0107

80

7.5

350 x 180 x 90

0108
0109
0110
0111

100
150
160
180

13.8
13.8
25
25

420
480
480
480

0112

300

25

480 x 200 x 160

0113
0119
0120
0121

400
500
600
900

45

588 x 250 x 200

1mm = 0.0394 inches
D is the distance the filter will extend outward from the surface of the metal plate.

1-13

x
x
x
x

200
200
200
200

Consult Factory

x
x
x
x

130
160
160
160

L1 L2 L3

PE

Ground Bonds (remove any paint)

GPD
515/G5
LINE

FILTER
LOAD
PE L1 L2 L3

T1 T2 T3 PE

Cable Length
max. 40cm

Metal Plate
Motor Cable
max. 20m

Ground Bonds (remove any paint)

IM
3~
Figure 1-2A. Installation of Line Filter and GPD 515/G5
1-14

1.4.4

Control Circuit

All basic control circuit (signal) interconnections are shown in the appropriate diagram:
• Interconnections for external two-wire control in combination with the Digital Operator are
shown in Figure 1-3.
• Interconnections for external three-wire control in combination with the Digital Operator
are shown in Figure 1-4.
Make wire connections according to Figures 1-3, 1-4 and Table 1-3; observe the following:
• Signal Leads: Terminals 1-8 & 11; 12-17 & 33; and 21-27.
• Control Leads: Terminals 9 & 10 and 18-20.
• Use twisted shielded or twisted-pair shielded wire (20-16 AWG [0.5 – 1.25mm2]) for
control and signal circuit leads. The shield sheath MUST be connected at the drive end
ONLY (terminal 12). The other end should be dressed neatly and left unconnected
(floating). See Figure 1-2B.
• Signal leads and feedback leads (PG) must be separated from control leads
main circuit leads and any other power cables to prevent erroneous operation caused
by
electrical noise.
• Lead length should NOT EXCEED 164 feet (50 meters). Wire sizes should be determined
considering the voltage drop.
• All AC relays, contactors and solenoids should have RC surge supressors installed across
their coils.
• All DC relays, contactors and solenoids should have diodes installed across their coils.

SHIELD SHEATH
OUTER JACKET
TO GPD 515
SIGNAL
TERMINALS
TO SHIELD
SHEATH
TERMINAL
(TERM. 12)

TO
EXTERNAL
CIRCUIT
WRAP BOTH ENDS
OF SHEATH WITH
INSULATING TAPE
CRIMP
CONNECTION

Figure 1-2B. Shielded Sheath Termination

1-15

DO NOT
CONNECT

1-16

Table 1-3. Terminal Functions and Signals of Control Circuit
TERMINAL

FUNCTIONS

DESCRIPTION
/ SIGNAL LEVELS
LEVELS

2-WIRE CONTROL: Forward Run / Stop signal
(See NOTE 1)

Run at closed, stop at open (See NOTE 2)

3-WIRE CONTROL: Run signal

Run at closed (See NOTE 2)

2-WIRE CONTROL: Reverse Run / Stop signal
(See NOTE 1)

Run at closed, stop at open (See NOTE 2)

3-WIRE CONTROL: Stop signal

Stop at open (See NOTE 2)

3

External fault input

Fault at closed (see NOTES 2 & 3). When the
External Fault input is applied, the drive’s Fault
relay trips (shutdown) and the motor coasts to a
stop. The Digital Operator displays “ EF3 ” failure.

4

Fault Reset input (external)

Fault Reset at closed (see NOTES 2 & 3). The
Fault Reset input will reset the Fault relay, if the
drive is in “stopped” condition. Both Forward
Run/Stop signal and Reverse Run/Stop signal
must be OPEN.

5

Multi-step Speed Reference 1

Effective when closed (See NOTES 2 & 3)

6

Multi-step Speed Reference 2

Effective when closed (See NOTES 2 & 3)

7

Jog Reference

Run at preset jog frequency when closed

8

External baseblock

Drive output stops when closed

Multi-function contact output (N.O.).
One of 18 functions are available, by setting
of parameter H2-01 .

Contact capacity:
250 Vac at 1A or less
30 Vdc at 1A or less

11

Sequence control input common
for terminals 1-8.

Sequence control input 0 V

12

Connection for shield sheath of signal leads

– – – –

13

Frequency reference analog input (voltage);
auto input – can be changed to manual by
setting of parameter H3-01 .

0 to +10V (20K ohms)
–10 to +10V (20K ohms)

14

Frequency reference analog input (current);
can be changed to voltage input by setting of
parameter H3-08 and cutting jumper J1.

4-20mA (250 ohms)

15

Frequency reference power supply

+15V (Control power supply for frequency setting:
max 20 mA)

17

Frequency reference analog input common

0V

18

Multi-function contact output
(N.O./N.C.).

1

2

9, 10

Closed at fault

19

Open at fault

20

Common

1-17

Contact capacity:
250 Vac at 1A or less
30 Vdc at 1A or less

Table 1-3. Terminal Functions and Signals of Control Circuit - Continued
TERMINAL

FUNCTIONS

LEVELS
DESCRIPTION / SIGNAL LEVELS

21

Multi-function analog monitor 1 (+)

Output current
or output
frequency is
selectable

Type of analog signal (operation parameter) to be
output is selected by setting of parameters H4-01
and H4-04 .
Monitor output: 0 to +11V; 2 mA maximum

22

Multi-function analog monitor (–)

23

Multi-function analog monitor 2 (+)

25

Multi-function open collector
output 1

26

Multi-function open collector
output 2

27

Multi-function open collector output common

0V

33

Frequency reference power supply

–15V Control power supply for frequency setting:
max 20 mA

One of 18 functions
Photocoupler insulation output: +48V, 50 mA
available, by setting
maximum
of parameters H2-02
and H2-03 .

NOTES:
1.

When Forward Run and Reverse Run inputs are both closed for more than 500 ms, the Digital
Operator displays a blinking “ EF ” alarm code and the motor (if rotating) is decelerated by the
drive to a stop. This stop condition is not stored by the drive (on Digital Operator, red LED at
S T O P key does not light); IF ONE OF THE INPUTS IS OPENED, THE MOTOR WILL
IMMEDIATELY START UP AGAIN.

2.

Terminals 1-8 source +24 Vdc (8mA max.) and operate in a Low = True (ON) configuration when
connected to terminal 11.
When using relays for input to terminals 1-8, use relays with highly reliable contacts (for very
small current) with a capacity of 30 Vdc or more and rated current of 100mA or higher. When
using transistor (open collector) input, use transistors with rated voltage of 35 Vdc or more and
rated current of 100mA or more.

3.

These terminals are multi-function inputs. The indicated functions are their settings, based on a
2-Wire reset. For 3-Wire reset definitions, and other settings, see descriptions for “MultiFunction Input Terminals”, parameters H 1 - 0 1 t h r u H 1 - 0 6 , in paragraph 5.32.

1-18

1-19

1.4.5

Interconnection – 2-Wire Control Operation - Figure 1-3.

Notes referred to in figure 1-3.

✱

– Indicates components not supplied.

✱✱–

■

Branch circuit protection (circuit breaker or input fuses) must be supplied by customer.

– Indicates customer connection terminal. Wire only to terminals shown. Note that not all terminals
shown are available in all ratings – see Tables 1-1 and 1-2.

( ) – Indicates alternate terminal marking, i.e., (R) and L1.

▲
●
♦
■

– Function labels shown for these terminals are determined by factory settings of parameters
H 1 - 0 1 through H 1 - 0 6 . See paragraph 5.32.
– Function labels shown for these terminals are determined by factory settings of parameters
H 2 - 0 1 through H 2 - 0 3 . See paragraph 5.33.
– Function labels shown for these terminals are determined by factory settings of parameters
H 3 - 0 1, - 0 4, - 0 5, - 0 8, & - 0 9 . See paragraphs 5.19 & 5.30.
– Function labels and signal levels shown for these terminals are determined by factory settings
of parameters H 4 - 0 1 & H 4 - 0 4 . See paragraph 5.31.

1.

If only a remote Manual Speed pot (1RH) is used, 3SS is not needed; in that case, a jumper must be
added between terminals 5 and 11. This jumper will override both the Auto and Digital Operator
frequency references, regardless of the programming of parameter b 1 - 0 1 . If you are using a remote
speed command or the Digital Operator, DO NOT install this jumper. See paragraph 5.19.

2.

The Drive Electronic Thermal Overload function (parameters L 1 - 0 1 , L 1 - 0 2 ) meets standards set by
UL and cUL for motor thermal overload protection. If local code requires separate mechanical overload
protection, an overload relay should be installed, interlocked with the drive as shown. It should be the
manual reset type to prevent automatic restart following a motor fault and subsequent contact
reclosure after cool down.

3.

Insulated twisted shielded wire is required.
2-conductor #18 GA. (Belden #8760 or equivalent). 3-conductor #18 GA. (Belden #8770 of equivalent).
Connect shield ONLY AT DRIVE END. Stub and isolate other end.

4.

Digital Operator is standard on every drive. Remote operators, as shown, may not be required.

5.

Customer to connect terminal

6.

Wire only one of the inputs as an Auto Reference. If H 3 - 0 9 is set to “ 1F “, terminals 13 and 14 are
added for the internal frequency reference.

7.

If the Dynamic Braking (DB) option is used, wire per Appendix 6 instructions.

8.

An optional DC reactor may be added for harmonic attenuation, if needed; see separate instruction sheet
for wiring.

9.

If application does not allow reverse operation, b 1 - 0 4 , Reverse Run Prohibit, should be set to “ 1 ”
(Reverse Run Disabled), and the Reverse Run/Stop input can be eliminated.

to earth ground (100 Ω or less, 230V; 10 Ω or less, 460V and 600V).

1 0 . If supplying the drive with DC voltage instead of 3ø AC, remove jumpers from terminals l1 and l2
and connect a separate 1ø AC supply to l1 and l2 instead.
1 1 . Use l1 (R) and l2 (S) for single-phase input. Note that for drives up through GPD515C-A064, -B034, and
-C032 (CIMR-G5M20151F, 40151F, and 50221F) must be derated by 50%. Consult factory for derating
of larger drives.

1-20

1ø POWER SUPPLY (SEE NOTE 11)
3ø POWER SUPPLY (SEE NAMEPLATE DATA)
L1

L2

(GPD515C-A080 [CIMR-G5M20151F] AND ABOVE;
GPD515C-B041 [CIMR-G5M40151F] AND ABOVE;
GPD515C-C027 [CIMR-G5M50221F] AND ABOVE)
SEE NOTE 10

L3
1CB ✱✱

FWD
RUN/STOP

1R ✱

+15Vdc

15 (20mA MAX)
MAN SPEED
1RH ✱

♦

L1
(R)

L2
(S)

L3
(T)

1
(r)

FWD

COOLING
FAN
POWER

MAN REF. IN

16 (0 TO ±10Vdc)

GPD 515/G5

SEE NOTE 1

REV

EXT. FAULT

4-20mA
(250

14
4-20mA
ISOLATED
AUTO
REFERENCE ✱
SEE NOTE 6

DRIVE FWD REV REMOTE
SEQ
REF

MULTI-STEP
FREQ SELECT

♦

SEE NOTE 8

1PB ✱

TO
TERM. 12

SEE
NOTE 3

▲

3SS ✱

6

▲

AUTO
MAN

SEE
NOTE 1

▲

0 VOLTS 11

TERMINALS 1-8:
IF INPUT FROM RELAY CONTACTS:
RATED 30Vdc OR MORE,
100mA OR MORE
IF OPEN COLLECTOR INPUT:
RATED 35Vdc OR MORE,
100mA OR MORE

RUN CONTACT
●
RY1
MENU

ESC

+1

9

DATA
ENTER

JOG

FWD
REV

10
FAULT CONTACTS
RY2

RESET

RUN

B2
FOR WIRING
DYNAMIC
BRAKING
OPTION

EXT. FAULT RESET

4

COAST STOP
8
(BASE BLOCK)

0 TO ±10Vdc
(20K

+2

SEE
NOTE
2

3

JOG
7
SPEED

LOCAL
REMOTE

FOR OPTIONAL
DC REACTOR

1OL ✱

EXT. FAULT ✱

AUTO/MAN 5

DIGITAL OPERATOR
JVOP-130

13

2

▲

SEE
NOTE 4

0-10V

NOTE 9

2SS ✱

▲
FAULT RESET

♦

1

▲

17 COM

12 SHIELD

REV 1SS ✱
RUN/STOP SEE

2

18

STOP

RY2

19

B1

RY CONTACTS
CAPACITY:
1A AT 250Vac
1A AT 30Vdc

20

OR

■

+3

ANALOG
OUTPUT

SEE NOTE 7

–

■

(GPD515C-B041 thru -B096)

FACTORY SET FOR 460V

ANALOG
OUTPUT

400/
380V 415V 440V 460V

21

+

22

–

23

●
OPEN
COLLECTOR
CIRCUIT

Voltage Selector

33 –15Vdc

OPEN
COLLECTOR
CIRCUIT

(20mA MAX)

(E)

(U)

(V)

(W)

G

T1

T2

T3

25

●
26
27

MULTI-FUNCTION
MONITOR OUTPUT
0 to +10V or
–10 to +10V,
2mA MAX.

+

MULTIFUNCTION
OPEN
COLLECTOR
OUTPUTS
CAPACITY:
50mA AT 48Vdc MAX.

(U)

(V)

(W)

T1

T2

T3
1OL ✱

ALTERNATE
MOTOR CONNECTION

EARTH
GROUND
SEE NOTE 5

■

(T2)
(T1) (T3)

AC MOTOR ✱

SEE NOTE 2

(T2)
(T1) (T3)

AC MOTOR ✱

BASIC INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM FOR 2-WIRE CONTROL

Figure 1-3. 230, 460 or 600V Interconnections - 2-Wire Control
(with parameters b1-01 = 1, b1-02 = 1, H1-01 = 24, H1-02 = 14, H1-03 = 3,
H1-04 = 4, H1-05 = 6, and H1-06 = 8 )
See Figure 1-5 for Closed-loop PG connections

1-21

1.4.6

Interconnection – 3-Wire Control Operation Figure 1-4.

Notes referred to in figure 1-4.

✱ –
✱✱–

■

Indicates components not supplied.
Branch circuit protection (circuit breaker or input fuses) must be supplied by customer.

– Indicates customer connection terminal. Wire only to terminals shown. Note that not all terminals
shown are available in all ratings – see Tables 1-1 and 1-2.

( ) – Indicates alternate terminal marking, i.e., (R) and L1.

▲
●
♦
■

– Function labels shown for these terminals are determined by factory settings of parameters H 1 - 0 1
through H 1 - 0 6 : H 1 - 0 1 = 2 4 , H 1 - 0 2 = 1 4 , H 1 - 0 3 = 0 , H 1 - 0 4 = 3 , H 1 - 0 5 = 4 , H 1 - 0 6 = 6 .
See paragraph 5.32.
– Function labels shown for these terminals are determined by factory settings of parameters
H 2 - 0 1 through H 2 - 0 3 . See paragraph 5.33.
– Function labels shown for these terminals are determined by factory settings of parameters
H 3 - 0 1, - 0 4, - 0 5, - 0 8, & - 0 9 . See paragraphs 5.19 & 5.30.
– Function labels and signal levels shown for these terminals are determined by factory settings
of parameters H 4 - 0 1 & H 4 - 0 4 . See paragraph 5.31.

1.

If only a remote Manual Speed pot (1RH) is used, 2SS is not needed; in that case, a jumper must be
added between terminals 6 and 11. This jumper will override both the Auto and Digital Operator
frequency references, regardless of the programming of parameter b 1 - 0 1 . If you are using a
remote speed command or the Digital Operator, DO NOT install this jumper. See paragraph 5.19.

2.

The Drive Electronic Thermal Overload function (parameters L 1 - 0 1 , L 1 - 0 2 ) meets standards set
by UL and cUL for motor thermal overload protection. If local code requires separate mechanical
overload protection, an overload relay should be installed, interlocked with the drive as shown. It
should be the manual reset type to prevent automatic restart following a motor fault and subsequent
contact reclosure after cool down.

3.

Insulated twisted shielded wire is required.
2-conductor #18 GA. (Belden #8760 or equivalent). 3-conductor #18 GA. (Belden #8770 of equivalent).
Connect shield ONLY AT DRIVE END. Stub and isolate other end.

4.

Digital Operator is standard on every drive. Remote operators, as shown, may not be required.

5.

Customer to connect terminal

6.

Wire only one of the inputs as an Auto Reference. If H 3 - 0 9 is set to “ 1F “, terminals 13 and 14 are
added for the internal frequency reference.

7.

If the Dynamic Braking (DB) option is used, wire per Appendix 6 instructions.

8.

An optional DC reactor may be added for harmonic attenuation, if needed; see separate instruction sheet
for wiring.

9.

If application does not allow reverse operation, b 1 - 0 4 , Reverse Run Prohibit, should be set to “ 1 ”
(Reverse Run Disabled), and the Forward/Reverse input can be eliminated.

to earth ground (100 Ω or less, 230V; 10 Ω or less, 460V and 600V).

1 0 . If supplying the drive with DC voltage instead of 3ø AC, remove jumpers from terminals l1 and l2
and connect a separate 1ø AC supply to l1 and l2 instead.
1 1 . Use l1 (R) and l2 (S) for single-phase input. Note that for drives up through GPD515C-A064, -B034, and
-C032 (CIMR-G5M20151F, 40151F, and 50221F) must be derated by 50%. Consult factory for derating
of larger drives.

CAUTION
Before running, parameter A1-03 must be set to " 0 ". Resetting drive constant A1-03
to " 2220 " may cause the motor to run in the reverse direction WITHOUT A RUN
COMMAND, and possibly result in damage to the equipment or personal injury.

1-22

3ø POWER SUPPLY (SEE NAMEPLATE DATA)
L1

L2

(GPD515C-A080 [CIMR-G5M20151F] AND ABOVE;
GPD515C-B041 [CIMR-G5M40151F] AND ABOVE;
GPD515C-C027 [CIMR-G5M50221F] AND ABOVE)
SEE NOTE 10

L3
1CB ✱✱

RUN

1R ✱
2K
+15Vdc
15 (20mA MAX)
MAN SPEED
1RH ✱

♦

L1
(R)

L2
(S)

L3
(T)

1

RUN
COOLING
FAN
POWER

MAN REF. IN

16 (0 TO ±10Vdc)

2K / 2.5K

STOP

FAULT RESET

4-20mA
(250

14
4-20mA
ISOLATED
AUTO
REFERENCE ✱
SEE NOTE 6

FWD/REV
DRIVE FWD REV REMOTE
SEQ
REF

0-10V

0 TO ±10Vdc
(20K

ESC

FWD
REV

SEE
NOTE 1

AUTO
2SS ✱

8

18
RY2

19

B1

MAN

TERMINALS 1-8:
IF INPUT FROM RELAY CONTACTS:
RATED 30Vdc OR MORE,
100mA OR MORE
IF OPEN COLLECTOR INPUT:
RATED 35Vdc OR MORE,
100mA OR MORE
RY CONTACTS
CAPACITY:
1A AT 250Vac
1A AT 30Vdc

20

OR

■

+3

ANALOG
OUTPUT

SEE NOTE 7

–

FACTORY SET FOR 460V

ANALOG
OUTPUT

400/
380V 415V 440V 460V

21

+

22

–

23

●
OPEN
COLLECTOR
CIRCUIT

Voltage Selector
–15Vdc
(20mA MAX)

OPEN
COLLECTOR
CIRCUIT

(E)

(U)

(V)

(W)

G

T1

T2

T3

25

●
26
27

MULTI-FUNCTION
MONITOR OUTPUT
0 to +10V or
–10 to +10V,
2mA MAX.

+

MULTIFUNCTION
OPEN
COLLECTOR
OUTPUTS
CAPACITY:
50mA AT 48Vdc MAX.

(U)

(V)

(W)

T1

T2

T3
1OL ✱

ALTERNATE
MOTOR CONNECTION

EARTH
GROUND
SEE NOTE 5

■
■

(GPD515C-B041 thru -B096)

33

7

10

STOP

SEE NOTE 9

▲
▲

FWD

1SS ✱ REV

6

FAULT CONTACTS
RY2

RESET

RUN

SEE
NOTE 3

5

9

DATA
ENTER

JOG

B2
FOR WIRING
DYNAMIC
BRAKING
OPTION

MENU

3PB ✱

TO
TERM. 12

RUN CONTACT
●
RY1

+1
+2

EXT. FAULT RESET

4

0 VOLTS 11

LOCAL
REMOTE

SEE NOTE 8

JOG
SPEED

DIGITAL OPERATOR
JVOP-130

13

FOR OPTIONAL
DC REACTOR

AUTO/MAN

SEE
NOTE
2

3

▲

MULTI-STEP
FREQ SELECT

SEE
NOTE 4

♦

2PB ✱
EXT. FAULT ✱

2

▲

12 SHIELD

1OL ✱

STOP

▲

17 COM

♦

1

▲

EXT. FAULT

GPD 515/G5

SEE NOTE 1

1PB ✱

2

(T2)
(T1) (T3)

AC MOTOR ✱

SEE NOTE 2

(T2)
(T1) (T3)

AC MOTOR ✱

BASIC INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM FOR 3-WIRE CONTROL

Figure 1-4. 230, 460 or 600V Interconnections - 3-Wire Control
(with parameters b1-01 = 1, b1-02 = 1, H1-01 = 24, H1-02 = 14, H1-03 = 0,
H1-04 = 3, H1-05 = 4, and H1-06 = 6 )
See Figure 1-5 for Closed-loop PG connections

1-23

1.4.7

Encoder Feedback

If either the Flux Vector (A1-02 = 3) or Volts Per Hertz with Encoder (A1-02 = 1) control method is
desired, an encoder feedback board for the drive is required.
The drive can accept many types of encoder feedback. Table 1-4 shows which option board is
needed for each type of encoder.
Table 1-4. Encoder feedback option board types.
Control Electrical Input
Option
Scheme
Board M e t h o d ( s )

Required Signals From Encoder

PG-X2

ALL

Quadrature,
Line Driver

A+, A-, B+, & B- (Z+, Z- optional)

PG-W2*

ALL

Dual Input,
Quadrature, Line
Driver

A+, A-, B+, B-, (Z+, Z- optional)

PG-B2

ALL

Quadrature,
Single Ended

A, B, & Common

PG-D2

All, Except
Flux Vector

Line Driver

A+ & A-

PG-A2

All, Except
Flux Vector

Single Ended

A & Common

*Accepts inputs from two encoders. Primarily used with custom software.
The most common encoder used with the drive is the Quadrature, Line Driver style
encoder. When an encoder of this type is used, a PG-X2 option board must be
mounted onto the drive. The encoder then wires to the PG-X2 option board.
Table 1-5 and Figure 1-5 show connections for the PG-X2 and some typical encoders.

Table 1-5. Encoder (PG) Connection
FUNCTION

PG-X2
TERMINAL
TA1

EPC (1)
MODEL
755A

DYNAPAR
H-20 (2)
(Pin #)

DYNAPAR
HS-35

LAKESHORE/
NORTHSTAR
SL-56

+12V (200mA)

1

White

D

D

6

0V

2

Black

F

F

1

+5V

3

A+

4

Red

A

A

3

A–

5

Green

H

H

8

B+

6

Brown

B

B

2

B–

7

Yellow

I

I

7

SHIELD

TA3

Shield

E

No Connection

10

(1)
(2)

No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection

For PG, EPC Model 755A, Orange and Blue wires are not used.
For PG, Dynapar H-20, pins C, G, and J are not used.

The PG-X2 card also has a connector TA2 which provides processed PG signal output for
use by an external pulse monitor. This connection can be made according to Figure 1-5.

1-24

GPD 515/G5
panel or
enclosure

GPD 515/G5
PG-X2 Card

Factory wiring —
TB1 to TA1
TB1

TA1

1

P

Isolated Power Supply
+12V

1

0V
2

2

3

3

+5V
A+
4

PG input
per
Table 1-9

P

4
A5

5

B+
6

300 KHz (2)
input max.

P

6
B-

7

7
8

P

Z+ (3)

8

9

9

10

10

Z- (3)
0V

TA3

Optical
Isolation

Shield
Line Receiver (1)

TA2
Line Driver

A+
120 ‰

P

1
2

Pulse
Monitor
Ouptut

120 ‰

P

3
4

120 ‰

RS422
Compatible
300kHz (2)
ouptut max.

P

5

Pulse
A

AB+

Pulse
B

BZ+

Pulse
Z

Z-

6

E

N/C

7

NOTE:
Wiring distance from GPD 515/G5
to pulse monitor: 100m or less.

Factory Connection
(to control terminal 12)

(1)

Customer supplied.

(2)

Refer to Section 2.2b or 2.2d (PG-X2) to calculate frequency.

(3)

Z pulses not requred for most applications.

Figure 1-5. PG-X2 Card Input/Output Connections
1-25

Section 2.
2.1

INITIAL START-UP ("LOCAL" CONTROL)

PRE-POWER CHECKS

• Verify wires are properly connected and no erroneous grounds exist.
• Remove all debris from the drive enclosure. Check for loose wire clippings.
• Verify all mechanical connections inside the drive are tight.
• Verify motor is not connected to load.
• Apply input power only after the front cover is in place. DO NOT remove the front
cover or Digital Operator while input power is on.
• F o r 4 6 0 V , G P D 5 1 5 C - B 0 4 1 t h r u - B 0 9 6 ( C I M R - G 5 M 4 0 P 4 1 F t h r u 4 0 4 5 1 F ):
Verify that the drive power voltage select connector, located at lower left corner inside
drive chassis (see Figure 2-1), is positioned correctly for the input power line voltage.
Voltage is preset to 460V at the factory. Reposition, if required, to match nominal line
voltage.
23CN 24CN 25CN 26CN 22CN

FU2

20CN
r

s

+

+

21CN

TB1

380V 400/415V 440V

460V

Figure 2-1a. Power Voltage Selection in 460V drive

• •
••

For 600V, GPD515C-C027 thru -C200
( C I M R - G 5 M 5 0 1 8 1 F t h r u 5 1 6 0 0 F ).
Verify that the drive power voltage select
connector, located at lower left corner
inside drive chassis (see Figure 2-1b), is
positioned correctly for the input power line
voltage. Voltage is preset to 600V at the
factory. Reposition, if required, to match
nominal line voltage.
Figure 2-1b.
Power Voltage Selection
in 600V Drive

2-1

2.2

C O N T R O L METHOD SELECTION

• Determine the proper control method for the application using Figure 2-2.
NOTE: For a more complete determination of control method, consult factory.

START

NO
Vector Control

NO

High
Starting Torque
and/or Zero Speed
Control?

Use Open
Loop Vector
Control
Method

Is the load
Variable Torque?
(Pump or Fan)

YES

NO

YES
V/F Control

Speed
Regulation
Better than
± 3%?

YES

PG (Encoder)
Required
On Motor

PG (Encoder)
Required
On Motor

PG-X2
Option Card
Required

PG-X2
Option Card
Required

Use Flux
Vector
Control
Method

Use V/f
Control
Method

Use V/f
w/ PG Fdbk
Control
Method

Figure 2-2. Control Method Selection Flowchart

• If the selected control method requires a PG encoder on the motor, verify that a PG-X2
card is installed in the drive (see separate option installation sheet for details) and that all
encoder wiring is correct.
• Proceed to the correct Power On and Preliminary Checks procedure:

Control Method

POWER ON AND PRELIMINARY CHECKS
Section

Open Loop Vector
Flux Vector

2.2a
2.2b

V/f
V/f with PG Feedback

2.2c
2.2d

2-2

2.2a

P O W E R O N A N D PRELIMINARY CHECKS - OPEN LOOP VECTOR CONTROL

DESCRIPTION

KEY SEQUENCE

DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

, then

** Main Menu **
Initialize

Apply input power to the drive.
If the display is not in English,
go to section 2.3, “CHANGING
THE LANGUAGE ON THE
DIGITAL OPERATOR”.
Set the control method of the
drive to Open Loop Vector.
(Set A1-02 to 2.)

Press

NOTE: The drive leaves
the factory set for
Open Loop Vector
control — this step
may not be required.

Press

DATA
ENTER

, then

Press

DATA
ENTER

, then set drive to Open Loop
Vector using:

MENU

twice

Control Method
V/F Control
A1-02=
2
Open Loop Vector

Write value to memory by pressing
DATA
ENTER

Entry Accepted
briefly, then

Control Method
Open Loop Vector

Set parameter access level to
Advanced. This allows all
parameters to be viewed and
modified.

Press

MENU

, then

** Main Menu **
Initialize
Access Level
Quick Start

Press

DATA
ENTER

, then

Press

DATA
ENTER

, then set drive to Advanced
using:

Write value to memory by pressing:
DATA
ENTER

A1-01=
4
Advanced Level

Entry Accepted
briefly, then

Access Level
Advanced Level

2-3

2.2a

(continued)

DESCRIPTION
Check the motor rotation using
the JOG function.
NOTE: The frequency
reference for this
operation comes
from d1-09 and is
factory set to 6 Hz.

KEY SEQUENCE
Press

MENU

, then

DIGITAL OPERATOR

Frequency Ref
U1-01= 0.00 HZ

DATA
ENTER

If either or both of the SEQ and REF lights are
on, press LOCAL
REMOTE

WARNING
THE NEXT KEY-PRESS
WILL CAUSE THE MOTOR
TO MOVE; TAKE APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS.
Press & hold
The motor should ramp up to
JOG
speed, and rotation should be
counter-clockwise if the FWD
light is on. Rotation should be
clockwise if the REV light is on.
If rotation is incorrect, reverse
Release
any two motor leads, then
JOG
repeat the motor rotation check.

Frequency Ref
U1-01= 6.00 HZ
RUN light will illuminate

Run the Auto-Tuning routine:
WARNING
THE MOTOR WILL MOVE
WHEN AUTO-TUNING IS
EXECUTED! TAKE
PROPER PRECAUTIONS!
CAUTION
Motor should be disconnected from the load before
executing the auto-tuning
routine.
NOTE: If the motor cannot be
disconnected from the
load, or if Auto-Tuning
fails, motor parameters
should be entered
manually. See section
2.4 for the procedure.

Enter the motor nameplate
values needed to perform Autotuning

Press

, then
MENU

2-4

3 times

** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning

2.2a

(continued)

DESCRIPTION

KEY SEQUENCE

Press

DIGITAL OPERATOR

twice

Rated Voltage
400.0 VAC

Set the correct Nameplate voltage of the motor,
using:

Rated Voltage
460.0 VAC

DATA
ENTER

RESET
Write the value to memory by pressing
DATA
ENTER

Entry Accepted
briefly, then

Rated Voltage
460.0 VAC

Enter the current and the rest of the parameters
following a similar procedure to that of the motor
nameplate voltage.
When all of the parameters
are entered, execute AutoTuning.

Press

The drive will first output
current to the motor, then run
the motor at a high speed.
During tuning, the following
message will appear:

Press

Tuning Ready ?
Press RUN key

RUN

Tune Proceeding
XX HZ
X.XX A

If no problems are encountered,
the following message will
appear:

Tune Successful

• If a problem occurs during
Auto-Tuning execution,
see section 6.2, AUTO
TUNING FAULTS AND
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS.

Tune Aborted
"Reason"

Proceed to section 2.5,
“TEST RUN USING DIGITAL
OPERATOR”

2-5

2.2b

P O W E R O N A N D PRELIMINARY CHECKS - FLUX VECTOR CONTROL

• Ensure motor is disconnected from load. To assure safety, disconnect the coupling or
belt which connects the motor with the machine, so that motor operation is isolated
prior to test operation.
• Verify the encoder to be used meets the following criteria: Line driver type (8830,
88C30), output pulse levels of 5-12V, and quadrature (A+, A–, B+, B–). Power supply
for the encoder from the PG-X2 card is capable of 200mA @ 12VDC or 200mA @ 5VDC.
Do not use both of these power supplies simultaneously.
• Verify that the encoder PPR (pulses per revolution) and expected motor speed do not
exceed the bandwidth of the PG-X2 card, using the following formula:
300,000 Hz ≥ 1.2 x (Max Speed in RPM / 60) x PPR of encoder
NOTE: Speed in RPM = 120 x frequency / number of motor poles
Example:

Encoder PPR = 1024, Maximum speed = 1750 RPM
300,000 Hz ≥ 1.2 x (1750 / 60) x 1024
300,000 Hz ≥ 35,840 Hz – Acceptable

DESCRIPTION

KEY SEQUENCE

DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

, then

** Main Menu **
Initialize

Apply input power to the drive.
If the display is not in English,
go to section 2.3, “CHANGING
THE LANGUAGE ON THE
DIGITAL OPERATOR”.
Set the control method of the
drive to Flux Vector (Set
A1-02 to 3.)

Press

MENU

Press

DATA
ENTER

, then

twice

Press

DATA
ENTER

, then set drive to Flux
Vector using:

Control Method
Open Loop Vector
A1-02=
3
Flux Vector

Write value to memory by pressing
DATA
ENTER

Entry Accepted
briefly, then

Control Method
Flux Vector

2-6

2.2b

(continued)

DESCRIPTION
Set parameter access level to
Advanced. This allows all
parameters to be viewed and
modified.

KEY SEQUENCE

DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

, then

** Main Menu **
Initialize
Access Level
Quick Start

Press
MENU

Press

DATA
ENTER

, then

Press

DATA
ENTER

, then set drive to Advanced
using:

A1-01=
4
Advanced Level

Write value to memory by pressing:
DATA
ENTER

Entry Accepted
briefly, then

Access Level
Advanced Level

Set PG Pulses/Rev to the
correct value. (NOTE: For a
Yaskawa vector motor, the
correct value is 1024.)

Press

, then

twice

, then

4 times

MENU

Press

DATA
ENTER

Press

DATA
ENTER

3 times

** Main Menu **
Programming

Group F
Options

PG Pulses/Rev
00600

Set the correct PPR, using:

PG Pulses/Rev
01024
RESET

Write value to memory by pressing:
DATA
ENTER

Entry Accepted
briefly, then

PG Pulses/Rev
F1-01= 1024

2-7

2.2b

(continued)

DESCRIPTION
Display motor speed.

KEY SEQUENCE
Press

MENU

, then

DATA
ENTER

DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
,

Function U1
Monitor

then

Press

DATA
ENTER

, then

4 times

Motor Speed
U1-05= 0.00 HZ

Rotate the motor shaft counterclockwise by hand (as viewed
from the load end of the motor).
• As the shaft is turned
counter-clockwise, a low
positive speed should be
indicated.

Motor Speed
U1-05= 2.38 HZ

• As the shaft is turned
clockwise, a low negative
speed should be indicated.

Motor Speed
U1-05=- 1.47 HZ

• If the speed doesn’t change
when the motor shaft is
rotated, check encoder
wiring and connections.
The pulses from the encoder
can also be checked; see
section 6.6, “CHECKING
ENCODER PULSES.”
• If the polarity is wrong,
switch the channels on the
input to the PG-X2 card
(on terminal block TA1,
swap wires at terminals
4 & 6 and swap wires at
terminals 5 & 7).

2-8

2.2b

(continued)

DESCRIPTION
Check the motor rotation using
the JOG function.
NOTE: The frequency
reference for this
operation comes
from d1-09 and is
factory set to 6 Hz.

KEY SEQUENCE
Press

, then
MENU

DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

Frequency Ref
U1-01= 0.00 HZ

DATA
ENTER

If either or both of the SEQ and REF lights are
on, press
LOCAL
REMOTE

WARNING
THE NEXT KEY-PRESS
WILL CAUSE THE MOTOR
TO MOVE; TAKE APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS.
Press & hold
The motor should ramp up to
JOG
speed, and rotation should be
counter-clockwise if the FWD
light is on. Rotation should be
clockwise if the REV light is on.
If the motor does not accelerate
smoothly or oscillates, reverse
Release
JOG
any two motor leads, then
repeat the motor rotation check.

Frequency Ref
U1-01= 6.00 HZ
RUN light will illuminate

Run the Auto-Tuning routine:
WARNING
THE MOTOR WILL MOVE
WHEN AUTO-TUNING IS
EXECUTED! TAKE
PROPER PRECAUTIONS!
CAUTION
Motor should be disconnected from the load before
executing the auto-tuning
routine.
NOTE: If the motor cannot be
disconnected from the
load, or if Auto-Tuning
fails, motor parameters
should be entered
manually. See section
2.4 for the procedure.

Enter the motor nameplate
values needed to perform Autotuning

Press

, then
MENU

2-9

3 times

** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning

2.2b

(continued)

DESCRIPTION

KEY SEQUENCE

DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

twice

Rated Voltage
400.0 VAC

Set the correct Nameplate voltage of the motor,
using:

Rated Voltage
460.0 VAC

Press

DATA
ENTER

RESET
Write the value to memory by pressing
DATA
ENTER

Entry Accepted
briefly, then

Rated Voltage
460.0 VAC

Enter the current and the rest of the parameters
following a similar procedure to that of the motor
nameplate voltage.
When all of the parameters
are entered, execute AutoTuning.

Press

The drive will first output
current to the motor, then run
the motor at a high speed.
During tuning, the following
message will appear:

Press

Tuning Ready ?
Press RUN key

RUN

Tune Proceeding
XX HZ
X.XX A

If no problems are encountered,
the following message will
appear:

Tune Successful

• If a problem occurs during
Auto-Tuning execution, see
section 6.2, AUTO TUNING
FAULTS & CORRECTIVE
ACTIONS .

Tune Aborted
"Reason"

Proceed to section 2.5,
“TEST RUN USING DIGITAL
OPERATOR”

2-10

2.2c

P O W E R O N A N D PRELIMINARY CHECKS - V/f CONTROL

DESCRIPTION

KEY SEQUENCE

DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

, then

** Main Menu **
Initialize

Apply input power to the drive.
If the display is not in English,
go to section 2.3, “CHANGING
THE LANGUAGE ON THE
DIGITAL OPERATOR”.
Set the control method of the
drive to V/f Control.
(Set A1-02 to 0.)

Press

MENU

Press

DATA
ENTER

, then

twice

Press

DATA
ENTER

, then set drive to V/f
Control using:

Control Method
Open Loop Vector
A1-02=
0
V/F Control

Write value to memory by pressing
DATA
ENTER

Entry Accepted
briefly, then

Control Method
V/F Control

Set parameter access level to
Advanced. This allows all
parameters to be viewed and
modified.

Press

, then

** Main Menu **
Initialize
Access Level
Quick Start

MENU

Press

DATA
ENTER

, then

Press

DATA
ENTER

, then set drive to Advanced
using:

A1-01=
4
Advanced Level

Write value to memory by pressing:

Entry Accepted

DATA
ENTER

briefly, then

Access Level
Advanced Level

2-11

2.2c

(continued)

DESCRIPTION
Select the drive input voltage,
then select an appropriate V/f
pattern. Refer to section 5.38,
“V/F PATTERN – STANDARD”
or 5.39, “V/F PATTERN –
CUSTOM”.
NOTE: A standard V/f pattern
for a 60 HZ motor is
pattern 1 (60 HZ
Saturation).

KEY SEQUENCE
Press

MENU

Press

DATA
ENTER

Press

DATA
ENTER

Press

DATA
ENTER

DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

, then

twice

, then

3 times

** Main Menu **
Programming

Group E
Motor

Function E1
V/F Pattern

twice, then set the drive to the
nominal input line
voltage using:

Write to memory by pressing:
DATA
ENTER

Input Voltage
460 VAC

Entry Accepted
briefly, then

Input Voltage
E1-01= 460 VAC

Press

twice, then

DATA
ENTER

Then set the drive to desired V/F pattern
using:

E1-03=
F***
User Defined V/F

E1-03=
1
60 HZ Saturation

Write to memory by pressing:
DATA
ENTER

Entry Accepted
briefly, then

V/F Selection
60 HZ Saturation

2-12

2.2c

(continued)

DESCRIPTION
Check the motor rotation using
the JOG function.
NOTE: The frequency
reference for this
operation comes
from d1-09 and is
factory set to 6 Hz.

KEY SEQUENCE
Press

, then
MENU

DATA
ENTER

DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

Frequency Ref
U1-01= 0.00 HZ

If either or both of the SEQ and REF lights are
on, press
LOCAL
REMOTE

WARNING
THE NEXT KEY-PRESS
WILL CAUSE THE MOTOR
TO MOVE; TAKE APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS.
Press & hold
JOG
The motor should ramp up to
speed, and rotation should be
counter-clockwise if the FWD
light is on. Rotation should be
clockwise if the REV light is on.
If rotation is incorrect, reverse
Release
JOG
any two motor leads, then
repeat the motor rotation check.

Frequency Ref
U1-01= 6.00 HZ
RUN light will illuminate

Proceed to section 2.5,
“TEST RUN USING DIGITAL
OPERATOR”

2-13

2.2d

P O W E R O N A N D PRELIMINARY CHECKS - V/f WITH PG FEEDBACK

•

Ensure motor is disconnected from load. To assure safety, disconnect the coupling or
belt which connects the motor with the machine so that motor operation is isolated,
prior to test operation.

•

Verify the encoder to be used meets the following criteria: Line driver type (8830,
88C30), output pulse levels of 5-12V, and quadrature (A+, A–, B+, B–). Power supply
for the encoder from the PG-X2 card is capable of 200mA @ 12VDC or 200mA @ 5VDC.
Do not use both of these power supplies simultaneously.

•

Verify that the encoder PPR (pulses per revolution) and expected motor speed do not
exceed the bandwidth of the PG-X2 card, using the following formula:
300,000 Hz ≥ 1.2 x (Max Speed in RPM / 60) x PPR of encoder
NOTE: Speed in RPM = 120 x frequency / # of motor poles
Example:

Encoder PPR = 1024, Maximum speed = 1750 RPM
300,000 Hz ≥ 1.2 x (1750 / 60) x 1024
300,000 Hz ≥ 35,840 Hz – Acceptable

DESCRIPTION

KEY SEQUENCE

DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

Apply input power to the drive.
If the display is not in English,
go to section 2.3, “CHANGING
THE LANGUAGE ON THE
DIGITAL OPERATOR”.
Set the control method of the
drive to V/f w/PG Feedback
(Set A1-02 to 1.)

Press

, then

** Main Menu **
Initialize

MENU
Press

, then

twice

DATA
ENTER
Press

DATA
ENTER

, then set drive to V/F w/PG
Fdbk using:

Control Method
Open Loop Vector
A1-02=
1
V/F w/PG Fdbk

Write value to memory by pressing
DATA
ENTER

Entry Accepted
briefly, then

Control Method
V/F w/PG Fdbk

2-14

2.2d

(continued)

DESCRIPTION
Set parameter access level to
Advanced. This allows all
parameters to be viewed and
modified.

Press

KEY SEQUENCE

DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

, then

** Main Menu **
Initialize
Access Level
Quick Start

MENU

Press

DATA
ENTER

, then

Press

DATA
ENTER

, then set drive to Advanced
using:

Write value to memory by pressing:
DATA
ENTER

A1-01=
4
Advanced Level

Entry Accepted
briefly, then

Access Level
Advanced Level

Set PG Pulses/Rev to the
correct value. (NOTE: For a
Yaskawa vector motor, the
correct value is 1024.)

Press

MENU

Press

DATA
ENTER

Press

DATA
ENTER

, then

twice

, then

4 times

3 times

** Main Menu **
Programming

Group F
Options

PG Pulses/Rev
00600

Set the correct PPR, using:

PG Pulses/Rev
01024
RESET

Write value to memory by pressing:

Entry Accepted

DATA
ENTER

briefly, then

PG Pulses/Rev
F1-01= 1024

2-15

2.2d

(continued)

DESCRIPTION
Select the drive input voltage,
then select an appropriate V/F
pattern. Refer to section 5.38,
“V/F PATTERN – STANDARD”
or 5.39, “V/F PATTERN –
CUSTOM”.
NOTE: A standard V/F pattern
for a 60 HZ motor is
pattern 1 (60 HZ
Saturation).

KEY SEQUENCE
Press

MENU

Press

DATA
ENTER

Press

DATA
ENTER

Press

DATA
ENTER

DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

, then

twice

, then

3 times

** Main Menu **
Programming

Group E
Motor

Function E1
V/F Pattern

twice, then set the drive to the
nominal input line
voltage using:

Input Voltage
460 VAC

Write to memory by pressing:
DATA
ENTER

Entry Accepted
briefly, then

Input Voltage
E1-01= 460 VAC

Press

twice, then

DATA
ENTER

Then set the drive to desired V/F pattern
using:

E1-03=
F***
User Defined V/F

E1-03=
1
60 HZ Saturation

Write to memory by pressing:
DATA
ENTER

Entry Accepted
briefly, then

V/F Selection
60 HZ Saturation

2-16

2.2d

(continued)

DESCRIPTION
Display motor speed.

KEY SEQUENCE
Press

MENU

, then

DATA
ENTER

DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
,

Function F1
Monitor

then

Press

DATA
ENTER

, then

4 times

Motor Speed
U1-05= 0.00 HZ

Rotate the motor shaft counterclockwise by hand (as viewed
from the load end of the motor).
• As the shaft is turned
counter-clockwise, a low
positive speed should be
indicated.

Motor Speed
U1-05= 2.38 HZ

• As the shaft is turned
clockwise, a low negative
speed should be indicated.

Motor Speed
U1-05=- 1.47 HZ

• If the speed doesn’t change
when the motor shaft is
rotated, check encoder
wiring and connections.
The pulses from the encoder
can also be checked; see
section 6.6, “CHECKING
ENCODER PULSES.”
• If the polarity is wrong,
switch the channels on the
input to the PG-X2 card
(on terminal block TA1,
swap wires at terminals
4 & 6 and swap wires at
terminals 5 & 7).

2-17

2.2d

(continued)

DESCRIPTION
Check the motor rotation using
the JOG function.
NOTE: The frequency
reference for this
operation comes
from d1-09 and is
factory set to 6 Hz.

KEY SEQUENCE
Press

MENU

, then

DATA
ENTER

DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

Frequency Ref
U1-01= 0.00 HZ

If either or both of the SEQ and REF lights are
on, press
LOCAL
REMOTE

WARNING
THE NEXT KEY-PRESS
WILL CAUSE THE MOTOR
TO MOVE; TAKE APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS.
Press & hold
JOG
The motor should ramp up to
speed, and rotation should be
counter-clockwise if the FWD
light is on. Rotation should be
clockwise if the REV light is on.
If rotation is incorrect, reverse
Release
JOG
any two motor leads, then
repeat the motor rotation check.

Frequency Ref
U1-01= 6.00 HZ
RUN light will illuminate

Proceed to section 2.5,
“TEST RUN USING DIGITAL
OPERATOR”

2-18

2.3

C H A N G I N G THE LANGUAGE O N THE DIGITAL OPERATOR

DESCRIPTION

KEY SEQUENCE

DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

Power ON
Bring up the Main Menu and
go to Initialize mode.

Press

MENU

then

Change the language.

Press

DATA
ENTER

Write value to memory.

Press

DATA
ENTER

, then

,

[ Display in Wrong
Language ]

DATA
ENTER

, then select the correct
language using:

A1-00=
0
English

Entry Accepted
briefly, then

Select Language
English
Return to operating mode.

Press

MENU

, then

DATA
ENTER

2-19

Frequency Ref
U1-01= 0.00 HZ

2.4

CALCULATING MOTOR PARAMETERS

This procedure can be used as an alternative to auto-motor tuning. If the motor being used
with the drive did not pass motor auto-tuning or if the motor cannot be disconnected from
the load, the motor parameters need to be calculated and entered manually.
This procedure only applies to the Open Loop Vector Control method & the
Flux Vector Control method.
The following information used in the calculation formulas is usually listed on the motor
nameplate. If no-load current is not marked on the nameplate and the motor manufacturer
is not able to supply it, use the default value of (0.3 x IFLA) = INLA.
Motor Voltage (V)
Motor Rated Speed (RPM)
Motor Rated Frequency (Hz)
Motor Synchronous Speed (RPM)
Full Load Amps (FLA)
No-Load Amps (NLA)

DESCRIPTION
Enter the Maximum frequency
( E1-04 ). For constant torque
applications, set to motor
nameplate frequency. For
constant horsepower
applications, set to maximum
frequency desired.

Vm
NR
fR
NS ( NS = fR * 120 / number of motor poles)
IFLA
INLA

KEY SEQUENCE
Press

MENU

, then

twice

3 times

Press

DATA
ENTER

, then

Press

DATA
ENTER

twice

Press

DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

twice, then

** Main Menu **
Programming

Group E
Motor

Input Voltage
E1-01= 460 VAC

DATA
ENTER

Set the maximum frequency using:

Max. Frequency
0060.0 HZ

Max. Frequency
0060.0 HZ
RESET

Write value to memory by pressing

Entry Accepted

DATA
ENTER

briefly, then

Max. Frequency
E1-04= 60.0 HZ

2-20

2.4

(continued)

DESCRIPTION
Enter the Base frequency
( E1-06 ). This value can be
obtained from the motor
nameplate (rated
frequency).

KEY SEQUENCE
Press

twice , then

DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
DATA
ENTER

Set the base frequency using:

Base Frequency
0060.0 HZ

Base Frequency
0060.0 HZ
RESET

Write value to memory by pressing

DATA
ENTER

Entry Accepted
briefly, then

Base Frequency
E1-06= 60.0 HZ

Enter the maximum motor
voltage ( E1-05 ). This value
can be obtained from the
motor nameplate (rated
voltage).

Press

, then

DATA
ENTER

Max. Voltage
400.0 VAC

Set the maximum voltage using:

Max. Voltage
460.0 VAC
RESET

Write value to memory by pressing

DATA
ENTER

Entry Accepted
briefly, then

Max. Voltage
E1-05= 460.0 VAC

2-21

2.4

(continued)

DESCRIPTION
Enter the motor rated full load
amps ( E2-01 ). This value can
be obtained from the motor
nameplate (motor full load
amps).

Press

Press

KEY SEQUENCE

DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

, then

Function E2
Motor Setup

twice

Motor Rated FLA
001.00 A

ESC

DATA
ENTER

Set the FLA using:

Motor Rated FLA
001.20 A
RESET

Write value to memory by pressing

DATA
ENTER

Entry Accepted
briefly, then

Motor Rated FLA
E2-01= 1.20 A

Enter the motor rated slip
( E2-02 ). This value can be
calculated using the following
formula:
(Ns - Nr)
E2-02 =
x 60 x 0.7
Ns
Nr = nameplate rated speed
Ns = synchronous speed
Ns = fR x 120 / # of motor poles

Press

, then

DATA
ENTER

Motor Rated Slip
02.90 HZ

Set motor rated slip using:

Motor Rated Slip
1.08 HZ
RESET

Write value to memory by pressing

DATA
ENTER

Entry Accepted
briefly, then

Motor Rated Slip
E2-02= 1.08 Hz

2-22

2.4

(continued)

DESCRIPTION

KEY SEQUENCE

DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

Enter the motor no-load current Press
, then
DATA
( E2-03 ). This value can someENTER
times be obtained from the
motor nameplate. If it is
unavailable, use the following
formula to calculate it:
Set motor no load current using:
1-5 HP:
INLA = IFLA x 0.50
RESET
5-15 HP:
INLA = IFLA x 0.40
> 15 HP:
INLA = IFLA x 0.30
Write value to memory by pressing
DATA
ENTER

No-Load Current
000.60 A

No-Load Current
000.32 A

Entry Accepted
briefly, then

No-Load Current
E2-03= 0.32A

Enter number of motor poles
( E2-04 ).

Press

, then

DATA
ENTER

Number of Poles
04

(Assuming an fR of 50 or 60 Hz)
Rated Speed
Set number of motor poles using:
(RPM)
# of motor poles
2400-3600
2
1300-1800
4
900-1200
6
660-900
8
Write value to memory by pressing
Note:
This step is not required for
Open Loop Vector Control
method (A1-02=0).

Number of Poles
04
RESET

DATA
ENTER

Entry Accepted
briefly, then

Number of Poles
E2-04= 4

Parameters E2-05 to E2-09 :
Factory set values are
acceptable.

2-23

2.5

T E S T R U N USING DIGITAL OPERATOR ( " L O C A L " CONTROL)

The operation shown in Figure 2-3 and described in Table 2-5 is for a standard 60 Hz
motor.
FWD
ROTATION
AT 15HZ

+
OUTPUT
FREQUENCY

➀

➁

CHANGE FREQ.
REFERENCE

➃

DECEL

➂

ACCEL

0

–

STOP

ACCEL
POWER
ON

FORWARD
RUN

FREQUENCY
SETTING

REVERSE
RUN

REV
ROTATION
AT 15HZ

ACCEL

➄
DECEL
REV
ROTATION
AT 60HZ

➅

Figure 2-3. Example of Simple Operation

Table 2-5. Test Run With Digital Operator
DESCRIPTION
Power ON

KEY SEQUENCE
Press

, then
MENU

If either the SEQ or REF lights
are on, they should be turned
off by pressing the LOCAL/
REMOTE key. This will set the
drive so it can be completely
controlled by the Digital
Operator.

DATA
ENTER

Press

DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

Frequency Ref
U1-01= 0.00 HZ
SEQ and REF lights are off,
DRIVE and FWD lights are on.

LOCAL
REMOTE

Frequency Ref
U1-01= 0.00 HZ

2-24

Table 2-5. Test Run With Digital Operator - Continued
DESCRIPTION
Set a run frequency of 15 Hz.

KEY SEQUENCE
Press

DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

Frequency Ref
000.00 HZ

DATA
ENTER

Set the frequency to 15 using:

Frequency Ref
015.00 HZ
RESET

Write the value to memory by pressing
DATA
ENTER

Entry Accepted
briefly, then

Frequency Ref
015.00 HZ
Display the output frequency.

Press

, then
ESC

Run the motor in the forward
direction.

Press

Output Freq
U1-02=
0.00 HZ

RUN light comes on and motor
ramps up to speed.

RUN

Output Freq
U1-02= 15.00 HZ
NOTE: Output frequency may be
slightly higher than the
frequency reference,
depending on the control
method selected.
Run the motor in the reverse
direction.

Press

RUN light remains on. FWD light
goes out and REV light comes on.
The motor ramps down to zero
speed, then ramps up in the
opposite direction.

FWD
REV

Output Freq
U1-02= -15.00 HZ
NOTE: output frequency may be
slightly higher than the
frequency reference,
depending on the control
method selected.

2-25

Table 2-5. Test Run With Digital Operator - Continued
DESCRIPTION
Change the frequency
reference from 15 Hz to
60 Hz.

KEY SEQUENCE
Press

, then
MENU

DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
twice

DATA
ENTER

Change the frequency using:

Frequency Ref
015.00 HZ
Frequency Ref
060.00 HZ

RESET
Write the value to memory by pressing
DATA
ENTER

Entry Accepted
briefly, then

Frequency Ref
060.00 HZ
Display the output frequency.

Press

, then
ESC

Output Freq
U1-02= -60.00 HZ
NOTE: Output frequency may be
slightly higher than the
frequency reference,
depending on the control
method selected.

Stop the motor.

Press

The STOP light turns on, and the
RUN light blinks during the deceleration of the motor.

STOP

Output Freq
U1-02=
0.00 HZ

2-26

2.6

PRE-OPERATION CONSIDERATIONS
• After completing the Test Run, connect the motor to the load.

• Additional control circuit wiring can be added, and parameters in the drive can be
programmed to configure the drive system to your specific application, including “Remote”
(2-wire or 3-wire) Control. See Section 5 for description of programmable features, and
also see instruction sheets for any options included with the drive.
• Record all parameter values (see Quick Reference sheets at the front of this manual).

2.7

S T O R A G E FUNCTION

The drive uses internal NV-RAM to store information when power is removed or in the event
of a power failure. Therefore, when power is reapplied, operation will begin at the same
state as when power was removed.
The following information is stored:
•

Last Main Speed Reference setting and forward/reverse selection from Digital
Operator.

•

The sequence of failure conditions that occurred before power was removed
(including content of a " CPF " failure).

2-27

2-28

Section 3.

OPERATION A T LOAD

After completing the start-up, and programming of parameters, turn off the AC main
circuit power. Make additional wiring connections required for the external control
functions selected by the parameter programming. Connect the driven machine to the
motor. Verify that the driven machine is in running condition, and that no dangerous
conditions exist around the drive system.

CAUTION
When starting and stopping the motor, use the operation signals (RUN/STOP,
FWD/REV), NOT the magnetic contactor on the power supply side (if present).

Run the motor under load with control by the Digital Operator using the same procedure
as for the Test Run (Table 2-5). If the Digital Operator is used in combination with
external commands or external commands only are used, the procedure must be altered
accordingly.
For preset starting (one-touch operation after setting the frequency), perform the
following:
1 . Set the speed and press RUN. Motor accelerates, at the rate corresponding to the
preset accel time, to the preset speed. The accel time ( C 1 - 0 1 ) is set too short
relative to the load if the RPM of the accelerating motor does not increase
smoothly, or if a fault is displayed on the Digital Operator.
2 . Press STOP. Unless coast to stop operation has been selected (by programming
of b 1 - 0 3 ), the motor decelerates, at the rate corresponding to the preset decel
time ( C 1 - 0 2 ), to a stop.

3-1

3-2

Section 4.
4.1

DIGITAL OPERATOR

GENERAL

All functions of the GPD 515/G5 are accessed using the Digital Operator. In addition to
controlling motor operation, the operator can enter information into the drive memory to
configure the drive to the application by entering the Program mode.

4.2

D I S P L A Y A N D KEYPAD

The Digital Operator has a 2 line by 16 character LCD display. Both numeric and alphanumeric data can appear on the display.
Indicator lamps and keys on the Digital Operator are described in Figure 4-1.
REMOTE Mode indication LEDs.
The LEDs light when REMOTE
Mode has been selected,
either for Start/Stop (SEQ)
control or Frequency
Reference (REF).

DRIVE

FWD

Increase parameter number
or value of blinking digit.
Switch between LOCAL and
REMOTE operation modes.

REMOTE
SEQ

REF

2 line, 16 character
alphanumeric LCD display;
shows selected operation
status, fault code, or
parameter data.

Frequency Ref
U1-01 = 0.00 Hz

Indicates which direction
the motor is being
commanded to run.
Lights when the GPD 515/G5
is in Drive (operation) mode.

REV

Displays the main menu for
mode selection.

DIGITAL OPERATOR
JVOP-130

Returns to previous status
or menu level.

LOCAL
REMOTE

MENU

ESC

DATA
ENTER

JOG

Initiates Jog function.
Selects forward or
reverse operation.
Run the motor. LED lights
when drive is controlling
motor speed.

FWD
REV

RESET

RUN

Displays data to be
changed, and enters new
data.
Decrease parameter number
or value of blinking digit.
Resets a drive fault, or
selects digit of a set value to
be changed. The selected
digit will blink.

STOP

Stop the motor. LED lights
when drive is in stopped
condition.

Figure 4-1. Digital Operator

4-1

Table 4-1. Digital Operator Controls
A.
A. INDICATOR
INDICATOR LAMPS
LAMPS
NAME
NAME

FUNCTION

FUNCTION

DRIVE

Lights when the drive is in the Drive mode of operation.

FWD

Lights when Forward motor run has been selected.

REV

Lights when Reverse motor run has been selected.

REMOTE
SEQ

Lights when the drive is programmed to operate from external RUN and STOP
signals.

REMOTE
REF

Lights when the drive is programmed to operate by an external frequency
reference signal.

RUN

Off when drive is in stopped condition; lights steadily when Run signal is
active; blinks after Stop signal has been received and drive output is ramping
down. (See Figure 4-2.)

STOP

Lights steadily at initial power-up; blinks after Run signal becomes active but
frequency reference is zero; off when drive output is controlling motor speed.
(See Figure 4-2.)
B. KEYPAD KEYS

NAME
LABEL

FUNCTION

FUNCTION

LOCAL
REMOTE

Pressing this key toggles between the Local (Digital Operator) and Remote (Terminals) modes of operation. Active only when the drive is in stopped condition.

JOG

IN DRIVE MODE: Pressing and holding this key will initiate Jog function: drive
output goes to programmed Jog Frequency ( d1-09 ) to check motor operation, or
to position machine. When key is released, output returns to zero and motor stops.
If the motor is already running, pressing this key will have no effect.
NOTE: Disabled if the drive is programmed
to use an external JOG input.

FWD
REV

IN DRIVE MODE: Each press of this key will toggle between Forward and Reverse
motor run direction. The selected direction is indicated by the FWD or REV lamp
being lit. If the selection is made while the drive is stopped, it determines the
direction the motor will run when started. If the selection is changed during running,
the drive will ramp the motor to zero speed and then ramp it up to set speed in
the opposite (i.e. newly selected) direction.

RUN

IN DRIVE MODE: If the drive is not programmed to operate by external RUN
and STOP signals (as indicated by REMOTE SEQ lamp being lit), pressing this key
will produce a Run command to initiate drive output to the motor. However,
output frequency will be zero if the frequency reference is zero at the time this key
is pressed.

STOP

IN DRIVE MODE: Pressing this key will produce a Stop command. The drive
will decelerate the motor in the programmed stopping manner, then drive output
will be disconnected from the motor.

4-2

Table 4-1. Digital Operator Controls - Continued
B. KEYPAD
KEYPAD PADS
KEYS – Continued
B.
NAME
LABEL

FUNCTION

FUNCTION

MENU

IN DRIVE MODE: Pressing this key will display the top level of the menu tree for
selecting and reading parameters. The drive will change to Program mode.
IN PROGRAM MODE: Pressing this key will display the top level of the menu tree
for returning to the Drive mode. Pressing the MENU & DATA/ENTER keys in
succession will change to Drive mode and display the frequency reference setting.

ESC

Each time this key is pressed the display returns to the previous level in the menu
tree or to the status prior to pressing DATA/ENTER.

DATA
ENTER

IN DRIVE MODE OR PROGRAM MODE: When a parameter number is being
displayed, pressing this key will display the parameter’s set value which is
presently in memory.
IN PROGRAM MODE ONLY: After the displayed set value has been changed as
desired, pressing this key will write the new set value into the drive memory to
replace the old value.

>

IN DRIVE MODE OR PROGRAM MODE: When a changeable data value is being
displayed, pressing this key moves the blinking (i.e. "changeable") position to the
next digit to the right. If at the right-most position, this will wrap-around to the first
position on the left side of the display.

RESET

^
(up arrow)

v
(down arrow)

IN DRIVE MODE OR PROGRAM MODE: Pressing this key will increase the value
of the blinking digit in the display by 1. Pressing this key will increase a parameter
number by 1.
IN DRIVE MODE OR PROGRAM MODE: Pressing this key will decrease the value
of the blinking digit in the display by 1. Pressing this key will decrease a parameter
number by 1.

POWER
ON

PRESS
RUN KEY

PRESS
STOP KEY

RUN
COMMAND
FREQUENCY
REFERENCE

OUTPUT
FREQUENCY

RUN
LAMP
STOP
LAMP

= Off

= Blinking

= Lighted Steady

Figure 4-2. Functioning of RUN and STOP Lamps

4-3

4.3

D I G I T A L OPERATOR MENU TREES

A. Quick-start Access Level
The flowchart tree below illustrates the process of accessing drive parameters when the
Access Level is set to Quick Start ( A 1 - 0 1 = 2).
Display

Operation

MENU

DATA
ENTER

Drive operation is enabled.
Drive status is displayed.

Use the

and

keys to

scroll through the Functions and Parameters.

Initialize

A

DATA
ENTER

( Initialize )
LCD language display is selected.
Parameter access levels, control
method selection and initialize
passwords are set.

Programming

DATA
ENTER

( Programming )
Parameters are set/read. Items to be
set/read vary depending on the access
level setting.

Auto-tuning

Function (1) or
Parameter

U1-01

Frequency Reference

Parameter

U1-02

Output Frequency

Parameter

U1-03

Output Current

Parameter

U1-06

Output Voltage (2)

Parameter

U2

Fault Trace

Function

U3

Fault History

Function

U1

Monitor

Function

A1-00

Select Language

Parameter

A1-01

Access Level

Parameter

A1-02

Control Method

Parameter

A1-03

Init Parameters

Parameter

A1-04

Enter Password

Parameter

b1-01

Reference Source

Parameter

b1-02

Run Source

Parameter

b1-03

Stopping Method

Parameter

C1-01

Accel Time 1

Parameter

C1-02

Decel Time 1

Parameter

d1-01

Reference 1

Parameter

d1-02

Reference 2

Parameter

d1-03

Reference 3

Parameter

d1-04

Reference 4

Parameter

d1-09

Jog Reference

Parameter

E1-01

Input Voltage

Parameter

E1-02

Motor Selection

Parameter

E1-03

V/F Selection (3)

Parameter

E1-04

Max Frequency

Parameter

E1-05

Max Voltage

Parameter

E1-06

Base Frequency

Parameter

E1-07

Mid Frequency A (3)

Parameter

E1-08

Mid Voltage A (3)

Parameter
Parameter

( Auto-tuning )
Motor parameters are
automatically set by entering
tuning data (motor nameplate
values) when using Open
Loop or Flux Vector control
method ( A1-02 = 2 or 3).

Modified Constants
( Modified Parameters )
Only parameters that have been
changed from the factory settings are
set/read.

NOTES
(1)

(2)

(3)

E1-09

Min Frequency

A Function is a “sub-menu”
containing many parameters.
Use the DATA/ENTER key to
access these parameters.

E1-10

Min Voltage (3)

Parameter

E1-13

Base Voltage (3)

Parameter

This parameter is user
selectable according to the
setting of o1-01 .

E2-01

Motor Rated FLA

Parameter

E2-02

Motor Rated Slip (3)

Parameter

E2-03

No-Load Current (3)

Parameter

E2-04

Number of Poles (3)

Parameter

Not available for all Control
Methods.

4-4

4.3

D I G I T A L OPERATOR MENU TREES

Continued

B. Basic Access Level
The flowchart tree below illustrates the process of accessing drive parameters when the
Access Level is set to Basic ( A 1 - 0 1 = 3).
Display

Operation

MENU

DATA
ENTER

Drive operation is enabled.
Drive status is displayed.
Use the

and

keys to

scroll through the Functions and Parameters.

Initialize

A

DATA
ENTER

( Initialize )
LCD language display is selected.
Parameter access levels, control
method selection and initialize
passwords are set.

Programming

DATA
ENTER

( Programming )
Parameters are set/read. Items to be
set/read vary depending on the access
level setting.

Auto-tuning

Function (1) or
Parameter

U1-01

Frequency Reference

Parameter

U1-02

Output Frequency

Parameter

U1-03

Output Current

Parameter

U1-06

Output Voltage (2)

Parameter

U2

Fault Trace

Function

U3

Fault History

Function

U1

Monitor

Function

A1-00

Select Language

Parameter

A1-01

Access Level

Parameter

A1-02

Control Method

Parameter

A1-03

Init Parameters

Parameter

A1-04

Enter Password

Parameter

b1

Sequence

Function

b2

DC Braking

Function

C1

Accel/Decel

Function

C3

Motor-Slip Comp (3)

Function

C4

Torque Comp (3)

Function

C5

ASR Tuning (3)

Function

C6

Carrier Freq.

Function

d1

Preset Reference

Function

d2

Reference Limits

Function

d3

Jump Frequencies

Function

E1

V/F Patern

Function

E2

Motor Setup

Function

H1

Digital Inputs

Function

H2

Digital Outputs

Function

H3

Analog Inputs

Function

H4

Analog Outputs

Function

L1

Motor Overload

Function

L2

PwrLoss Ridethru

Function

L3

Stall Prevention

Function

L4

Ref Detection

Function

L5

Fault Reset

Function

L6

Torque Detection

Function

L7

Torque Limit (3)

Function

L8

Hdwe Protection

Function

o1

Monitor Select

Function

o2

Key Selection

Function

( Auto-tuning )
Motor parameters are
automatically set by entering
tuning data (motor nameplate
values) when using Open
Loop or Flux Vector control
method ( A1-02 = 2 or 3).

Modified Constants
( Modified Parameters )
Only parameters that have been
changed from the factory settings are
set/read.

NOTES
(1)

(2)

(3)

A Function is a “sub-menu”
containing many parameters.
Use the DATA/ENTER key to
access these parameters.
This parameter is user
selectable according to the
setting of o1-01 .
Not available for all Control
Methods.

4-5

4.3

Continued

D I G I T A L OPERATOR MENU TREES

C. Advanced Access Level
The flowchart tree below illustrates the process of accessing drive parameters when the
Access Level is set to Advanced ( A 1 - 0 1 = 4).
Display

Operation

MENU

DATA
ENTER

Drive operation is enabled.
Drive status is displayed.

Use the

and

keys to

scroll through the Functions and Parameters.

Initialize

A

DATA
ENTER

( Initialize )
LCD language display is
selected. Parameter access
levels, control method
selection and initialize
passwords are set.

Function (1) or
Parameter

U1-01

Frequency Reference

Parameter

U1-02

Output Frequency

Parameter

U1-03

Output Current

Parameter

U1-06

Output Voltage (2)

Parameter

U2

Fault Trace

Function

U3

Fault History

Function

U1

Monitor

Function

A1-00

Select Language

Parameter

A1-01

Access Level

Parameter

A1-02

Control Method

Parameter

A1-03

Init Parameters

Parameter

A1-04

Enter Password

Parameter

A2

User Constants

Function

b1

Sequence

Function

b2

DC Braking

Function

b3

Speed Search

Function

b4

Delay TImers

Function

b5

PID Control

Function

b6

Reference Hold

Function

b7

Droop Control (3)

Function

b8

Energy Saving (3)

Function

b9

Zero Servo (3)

Function

C1

Accel/Decel

Function

C2

S-Curve Acc/Dec

Function

( Modified Parameters )

C3

Motor-Slip Comp (3)

Function

Only parameters that have
been changed from the
factory settings are set/read.

C4

Torque Comp (3)

Function

C5

ASR Tuning (3)

Function

C6

Carrier Freq

Function

C7

Hunting Prev (3)

Function

C8

Factory Tuning (3)

Function

d1

Preset Reference

Function

d2

Reference Limits

Function

d3

Jump Frequencies

Function

d4

Sequence

Function

d5

Torque Control (3)

Function

Programming

DATA
ENTER

b

( Programming )

Application
Application

Parameters are set/read.
Items to be set/read vary
depending on the access
level setting.

DATA
ENTER

Auto-tuning
( Auto-tuning )
Motor parameters are
automatically set by entering
tuning data (motor nameplate
values) when using Open
Loop or Flux Vector control
method ( A1-02 = 2 or 3).

C

Tuning
Tuning

DATA
ENTER

Modified Constants

d

Reference
Reference

NOTES
(1)

A Function is a “sub-menu”
containing many parameters.
Use the DATA/ENTER key to
access these parameters.

(2)

This parameter is user
selectable according to the
setting of o1-01 .

(3)

Not available for all Control
Methods.

DATA
ENTER

To

A

4-6

4.3

Continued

D I G I T A L OPERATOR MENU TREES

C. Advanced Access Level (Continued)
From

A

Display

E

Motor Parameters

DATA
ENTER

Motor

F

Options

DATA
ENTER

Options

H

Control Circuit Terminals

DATA
ENTER

Terminal

L

Protection

DATA
ENTER

Protection

o

Digital Operator
Operator

4-7

DATA
ENTER

Function (1) or
Parameter

E1

V/f Pattern

Function

E2

Motor Setup

Function

E3

Control Method (Motor 2)

Function

E4

v/f Pattern (Motor 2)

Function

E5

Motor Setup (Motor 2)

Function

F1

PG Speed Setup (3)

Function

F2

AI-14 Setup

Function

F3

DI-08, 16 Setup

Function

F4

AO-08, 12 Setup

Function

F5

DO-02 Setup

Function

F6

DO-08 Setup

Function

F7

PO-36F Setup

Function

F8

SI-F/G Setup

Function

F9

CP-916 Setup

Function

H1

Digital Inputs

Function

H2

Digital Outputs

Function

H3

Analog Inputs

Function

H4

Analog Outputs

Function

H5

Serial Com Setup

Function

L1

Motor overload

Function

L2

PwrLoss Ridethru

Function

L3

Stall Prevention

Function

L4

Ref Detection

Function

L5

Fault Restart

Function

L6

Torque Detection

Function

L7

Torque Limit (3)

Function

L8

Hdwe Protection

Function

o1

Monitor Select

Function

o2

Key Functions

Function

4.4

B A S I C PROGRAMMING

All parameters are set by accessing them through a menu tree with multiple access levels.
The setting of the Access Level in the Initialization Menu determines which parameters
appear on the Digital Operator. To see Example 1 and 2 in detail, refer to Tables 4-5, 4-6
and 4-7.

Table 4-2. Parameter Menu
Menu Level
(Advanced
Access)
Level
Level
Level
Level
Level
Level

1
2
3
4
5
6

Digital Operator
Display
Example 1

Reference Name

Digital Operator Mode
Parameter Group
Parameter Function
Parameter Name
Parameter Number
Parameter Setting Value

Programming
C – Tuning
C1 Accel/Decel
Decel Time 1
C1-02
10.0 sec

Digital Operator
Display
Example 2
Initialize
—
—
Control Method
A1-02
V/F Control

The parameters are arranged by groups. The following table shows which Parameter
Group(s) appear under which Mode.

Table 4-3. Parameter Groups
Digital Operator
Modes

Operation

Initialize

Programming

Auto-Tuning

Modified
Constants

U – Monitor

A – Initialize

b – Application
C – Tuning
d – Reference
E – Motor
F – Options
H – Terminals
L – Protection
o – Operator

No Group Name

No Group Name

Parameter
Groups List *

* For a complete listing of parameters, see Appendix 1.

4-8

4.5

M O D E S OF OPERATION

The procedure for choosing a mode is shown in Table 4-4.

Table 4-4. Digital Operator Mode Selection
DESCRIPTION

KEY SEQUENCE

DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

Frequency Ref
U1-01= 0.00 HZ

Top of Main Menu
• Displays Operation Mode
(drive changes to Program
mode).

Press

• Displays Initialize Mode.

Press

• Displays Programming
Mode.

Press

• Displays Auto-Tuning Mode
(displayed only when Vector
Control Method is selected).

Press

• Displays Modified
Parameter Menu.

Press

Top of Main Menu
• Return to Operation.

• Select Operation Mode.
• Displays frequency
reference setting (changes
to Drive mode).

** Main Menu **
Operation

MENU

** Main Menu **
Initialize

** Main Menu **
Programming

** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning

** Main Menu **
Modified Constants

Press

Press

or
MENU

** Main Menu **
Operation

DATA
ENTER

Frequency Ref
U1-01= 0.00 HZ

4-9

Parameters are changed by pressing the MENU key to enter the Program mode, then
advancing through the levels of the menu to access the parameter that is desired to be
changed. Only the parameters listed in Table A1-11 (Appendix 1) may be changed while
the drive is running.

Table 4-5. Example 1A: Changing a Parameter in Quick-start Access Level
DESCRIPTION

KEY SEQUENCE

DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

Frequency Ref
U1-01= 0.00 HZ

• Select Programming Mode.

Press

, then

twice

, then

4 times

MENU

• Select the Parameter Name. Press

DATA
ENTER

• Select the Decel Time 1
parameter setting. (The first
digit of the value to be set
blinks.)

Press

• Change reference value.

Change value by pressing

DATA
ENTER

** Main Menu **
Programming

Decel Time 1
C1-02= 10.0 sec

Decel Time 1
0010.0 sec

Decel Time 1
0001.0 sec

RESET

• Write into memory.

Press

DATA
ENTER

Entry Accepted
briefly, then

Decel Time 1
C1-02= 1.0 sec
Top of Main Menu
• Return to Operation.

• Select Operation Mode
(changes to Drive mode).

Press

Press

MENU

** Main Menu **
Operation

DATA
ENTER

Frequency Ref
U1-01= 0.00 HZ

4-10

Table 4-6. Example 1B: Changing a Parameter in Advanced Access
DESCRIPTION

KEY SEQUENCE

DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

Frequency Ref
U1-01= 0.00 HZ

• Select Programming Mode.

Press

, then
MENU

• Select Tuning Parameter
Group.

Press

• Select the Accel/Decel
Function.

Press

• Select the Parameter Name. Press

DATA
ENTER

, then

DATA
ENTER

DATA
ENTER

twice

** Main Menu **
Programming

Group C
Tuning

Function C1
Accel/Decel

, then

• Select the Decel Time 1
parameter setting. (The first
digit of the value to be set
blinks.)

Press

• Change reference value.

Change value by pressing

DATA
ENTER

Decel Time 1
C1-02= 10.0 sec

Decel Time 1
0010.0 sec

Decel Time 1
0001.0 sec

RESET

• Write into memory.

Press

DATA
ENTER

Entry Accepted
briefly, then

Decel Time 1
C1-02= 1.0 sec
Top of Main Menu
• Return to Operation.

• Select Operation Mode
(changes to Drive mode).

Press

Press

MENU

** Main Menu **
Operation

DATA
ENTER

Frequency Ref
U1-01= 0.00 HZ

4-11

Table 4-7. Example 2: Changing Control Method in Quick-start Access Level
DESCRIPTION

KEY SEQUENCE

DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

Frequency Ref
U1-01= 0.00 HZ

• Select Initialize Mode.

Press

• Select the Parameter Name. Press

• Change data value.

Press

• Write into memory.

Press

MENU

DATA
ENTER

DATA
ENTER

, then

** Main Menu **
Initialize

, then

twice

, then

twice

DATA
ENTER

Control Method
Open Loop Vector

A1-02= 0
V/F Control

Entry Accepted
briefly, then

Control Method
V/F Control
Top of Main Menu
• Return to Operation.

• Select Operation Mode
(changes to Drive mode).

Press

Press

MENU

** Main Menu **
Operation

DATA
ENTER

Frequency Ref
U1-01= 0.00 HZ

4-12

Section 5.
5.1

PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES

GENERAL

This section describes features of the GPD 515/G5 which are defined by programmed
settings in the various parameters in memory. Since most features use more than one
parameter, the descriptions appear in alphabetical order by the function name. In Table
5-1, the functions are grouped into operational categories. To cross reference a
particular parameter to the features to which it applies, see the listings in Appendix 1, or
the Index.
Table 5-1. List of Features Defined By Parameters
FUNCTION

PARAGRAPH
REFERENCE

PARAMETER(S)

SET-UP
Initialization (Reset), 2-Wire or 3-Wire
Access Level
Control Method Selection
Drive Capacity, Parameters Affected By
Volts/Hertz Patterns, Standard
Volts/Hertz Pattern, Custom
Input Voltage Setting
Encoder (PG) Parameters
Thermal Motor Overload Protection
Digital Operator Display, Re-scaling
Input Phase Loss Detection
Output Phase Loss Detection
User Parameters
Miscellaneous Parameters

5.37
5.4
2.2
Table A3-1
5.47
5.48
5.37
5.15
5.41
5.11
5.34
5.35
5.46
5.26

A1-03
A1-01
A1-02
———
E1-03
E1-04 thru -10
E1-01
F1-10 thru F1-14
E1-02; E2-01; L1-01, L1-02
o1-03, o1-04
L8-05
L8-07
A2-01 thru -32; o2-03
o2-01,-02,-05,-06,-07,-08

5.2
5.3
5.14
5.10

C1-01,-03,-05,-07,-11
C2-01,-03
b6-01 thru -04
b2-01,-02,-03

5.40
5.2
5.14
5.10

b1-03
C1-02,-04,-06,-08,-09,-11
b6-01 thru -04
b2-01,-02,-04

5.19

H3-01 thru -12

5.22
5.24
5.25 A
5.25 B
5.32 F
5.32 G

d1-01 thru -08
d1-09
b1-01,-02; H1-01 thru -06
d1-01 thru -09; H1-01 thru -06
H1-01 thru -06
H1-01 thru -06

STARTING
Accel Time
S-Curve Characteristics
Dwell
DC Injection Braking at Start
STOPPING
Stopping Method
Decel Time
Dwell
DC Injection Braking at Stop
SPEED CONTROL
Frequency Ref. Input Signals (Auto/Manual)
(Term. 13, 16)
Frequency Reference, Upper & Lower Limits
Jog Reference
Speed Reference Selection (Local/Remote)
Multi-step Speed Setting
Sample/Hold
Up/Down Frequency Setting

5-1

Table 5-1. List of Features Defined By Parameters - Continued
FUNCTION

PARAGRAPH
REFERENCE

PARAMETER(S)

SPEED CONTROL - continued
Automatic Frequency Regulator (AFR) Gain
Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR)
Frequency Reference Retention
MODBUS Control
PID Control
Zero-Servo Control
Zero Speed Control

5.6
5.7
5.20
5.28
5.36
5.49
5.50

C8-08
C5-01 thru -04,-06; H1-01 thru -06
d4-01
b1-01,-02; H5-01 thru -04
b1-01; b5-01 thru -08
b2-01; b9-01; H5-01 thru -04
b1-05; E1-09

Table A1-2

b1-04

Critical Frequency Rejection
Carrier Frequency
Speed Search

5.9
5.8
5.32 D

d3-01 thru -04
C6-01,-02,-03
b2-01,-02,-03;
H1-01 thru -06; L2-03,-04

Speed Coincidence
Energy Saving
Slip Compensation

5.33 A
5.16
5.38

b8-01,-02; H1-01 thru -06
C3-01 thru -04

5.42
5.39
5.13
5.23

C4-01,-02
L3-01 thru -06
b7-01,-02
C7-01,-02

5.29
5.5
5.20
5.42
5.27

H1-01 thru -06; L2-01,-02
L5-01,-02
L4-05
L6-01 thru -06
L8-01,-02

5.29
5.17
5.31
5.31

H3-05,-09
H3-03,-07,-11; H3-02,-06,-10
H1-01 thru -06
H1-01 thru -06

5.32
5.30

H2-01,-02,-03
H4-01 thru -07

5.11
5.12

o1-03
o1-02

REVERSE
Reverse Run Disabled
RUNNING

RUNNING IMPROVEMENTS
Torque Compensation
Stall Prevention
Droop
Hunting Prevention
PROTECTIVE FEATURES
Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru
Auto Restart
Frequency Reference Loss Detection
Overtorque Detection
Miscellaneous Protective Functions
DRIVE CONTROLS, INPUT
Multi-function Analog Inputs (Term. 16, 14)
Frequency Reference Bias and Gain
Multi-function Input Terminals (Term. 3-8)
External Fault Terminals
DRIVE OUTPUT
Multi-function Output Terminals (Term. 9 & 10; 25-27)
Analog Monitor Output (Multi-function) (Term. 21-23)
MONITOR DISPLAY
Digital Operator Display Selection
Display – Monitor (at Power-up) Selection

5-2

5.2

A C C E L / D E C E L TIME

A.

C1-01
C1-02
C1-03
C1-04
C1-05

:
:
:
:
:

Accel Time 1
Decel Time 1
Accel Time 2
Decel Time 2
Accel Time 3

C1-06
C1-07
C1-08
C1-09

:
:
:
:

Decel Time 3
Accel Time 4
Decel Time 4
Fast Stop
Decel Time

Factory setting (each): 1 0 . 0
Range* (each): 0.0 to 6000.0
seconds
(* Note: see para. 5.2 E)

The drive incorporates four sets of individually programmable acceleration and deceleration
times.
B.

H 1 - 0 1 t h r u H 1 - 0 6 : Multifunction Inputs (Term. 3 thru 8)

Data 7 : Accel/Decel Time Selection 1
Data 1 A : Accel/Decel Time Selection 2

By programming data " 7 " into one of the
GPD 515/G5
TIME SELECTION 1
multi-function parameters ( H 1 - 0 1 thru
o
H 1 - 0 6 ), the corresponding multi-function input
o
o
7
terminal (3 thru 8) becomes the Time Selection 1
TIME SELECTION 2
input. When the input terminal (i.e. external
o
o
o
contact) is open, Time 1 ( C 1 - 0 1 / C 1 - 0 2 ) is
8
selected. When the input terminal is closed,
11
Time 2 ( C 1 - 0 3 / C 1 - 0 4 ) is selected. By
programming data " 1A " into another of the
0V
multi-function parameters, the corresponding
multi-function input terminal becomes the Time
Selection 2 input. When the input terminal is
open, Time 1 or 2 is selected based on the setting of the Time Selection 1 input. When
the input is closed, Time 3 ( C 1 - 0 5 / C 1 - 0 6 ) or Time 4 ( C 1 - 0 7 / C 1 - 0 8 ) is selected
based on the status of the Time Selection 1 input.

Accel/Decel
Selection 2
H1-06 = 1A

Accel/Decel
Selection 1
H1-05 = 07

Accel Time

Decel Time

Open

Open

C1-01

C1-02

Open

Closed

C1-03

C1-04

Closed

Open

C1-05

C1-06

Closed

Closed

C1-07

C1-08

5-3

5.2

A C C E L / D E C E L TIME

B.

(Continued)

Continued
Data A : Accel/Decel Hold (Speed
HOLD Command)

By programming data " A " into one of the multifunction input parameters ( H 1 - 0 1 thru
H 1 - 0 6 ), one of the multi-function input terminals (3 thru 8) becomes a HOLD command
input. As long as the HOLD command is present, accel and decel are in a prohibit state,
and the output speed is held at the level it was at the time the HOLD command was input.
When the HOLD command is removed while the system is still in Run condition, accel or
decel will again become active to allow output to reach set speed. If Stop is initiated
while the HOLD command is present, the prohibit state is cancelled and the system enters
stop operation.

FWD RUN
HOLD CMD

SPEED REF.
OUTPUT SPEED

HOLD Function Timing

C.

C 1 - 0 9 : Fast-Stop Decel Time

Factory setting: 1 0 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 6000.0 seconds

H 1 - 0 1 t h r u H 1 - 0 6 : Multi-function Inputs
(Term. 3 thru 8)

Data 1 5 : Fast-Stop

The Fast-Stop Decel Time is used instead of the selected Decel Time ( C 1 - 0 2 , - 0 4 , - 0 6
or - 0 8 ) if:
1)
2)

It has been selected as the decel time for a specific fault ( H 5 - 0 4 ,
L 8 - 0 3 , etc.), o r
One of the multi-function inputs has been programmed for Fast-Stop,
and the corresponding input is closed.

5-4

Continued

5.2

A C C E L / D E C E L TIME

D.

H 3 - 0 5 : Multi-Function Analog
Input (Term. 16)

Data 5 : Accel/Decel Time
Coefficient

The multi-function analog input at terminal 16
may be configured to allow analog control or the
Accel/Decel time. The input voltage, in the range
of 1 to 10V, determines the coefficient by which
the Accel/Decel time is reduced:
Actual Accel/Decel Time =

Accel/Decel Time
Coefficient

1R

GPD 515/G5
15 +15V
16 0-10V (20K Ω)

ACCEL/
DECEL
COEFFICIENT

17
C

EXAMPLE:
Accel/Decel Time = 10 sec *
Voltage Ref. at Term. 16 = 5V

10
5

Actual Accel/ =
10 sec
= 2 sec
Decel Time
5 (coefficient)

1
0

* C1-01 or C1-02 setting, or
selected accel/decel setting.

E.

COEFFICIENT

C1-10 : Accel/Decel Time Setting Unit

1

5
VOLTAGE

10

Factory setting: 1
Range: 0 = 0.01 seconds
1 = 0.1 seconds

In addition to determining the setting resolution, this parameter controls the range of
C 1 - 0 1 thru C 1 - 0 9 ; if the resolution is 0.01 sec., the range is 0.000 to 600.00 sec. If
the resolution is set to 0.1 sec., the range is 0.0 to 6000.0 sec.
F.

C 1 - 1 1 : Accel/Decel Switching Frequency

Factory setting: 0 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 400.0 Hz

By using C 1 - 1 1 , the Accel and Decel times can be automatically switched from Time 1
to Time 4. If the output frequency is greater than or equal to the C 1 - 1 1 frequency, the
C 1 - 0 1 and C 1 - 0 2 times are used. If the output frequency is below C 1 - 1 1 , C 1 - 0 7
and C 1 - 0 8 are used instead.
NOTE: If used in conjunction with a multi-function input ( H 1 - 0 1 thru H 1 - 0 6
set to "A" or "1A"), the multi-function input has priority over the C 1 - 1 1
switching frequency.

5-5

5.3

ACCEL/DECEL: S-CURVE CHARACTERISTICS
C 2 - 0 1 : S-Curve Characteristic Time
at Accel Start
C 2 - 0 2 : S-Curve Characteristic Time
at Accel End
C 2 - 0 3 : S-Curve Characteristic Time
at Decel Start
C 2 - 0 4 : S-Curve Characteristic Time
at Decel End

Setting of these
parameters determine the
S-curve (starting and
ending) characteristics
of the acceleration and
deceleration ramp.
Each is set in increments of
0.01 seconds.

Factory setting (each): 0 . 2 0
Range (each): 0.00 to 2.50
seconds

RUN

OUTPUT
FREQUENCY

FREQ
COMMAND

NOTE: Actual accel time =
Set accel time + C 2 - 0 1 + C 2 - 0 2
2
Actual decel time =
Set decel time + C 2 - 0 3 + C 2 - 0 4
2

Accel ramp per
selected Accel Time

0
TIME
S-Curve Characteristic
Time (TSC)

The following figure shows FWD/REV switching and acceleration & deceleration to a stop
with S-curve active.

FORWARD RUN COMMAND
REVERSE RUN COMMAND
C2-02

OUTPUT FREQUENCY

C2-03

ACCELERATION

DC INJECTION
TIME AT STOP
b2-03

DECELERATION

C2-01

MIN. OUTPUT
FREQUENCY
E1-09

C2-04
E1-09
C2-01

DECELERATION

C2-04

ACCELERATION

= S-CURVE CHARACTERISTIC

5-6

C2-02

C2-03

5.4

ACCESS LEVEL

A.

A 1 - 0 1 : Parameter Access Level

Factory setting: 2
Range: 0 to 4

This setting determines which parameters are
accessible, which are also dependent upon the
setting of the Control Method ( A 1 - 0 2 ) .

Setting

Description

0

Monitor Only

1

User Program

The default setting is for Quick-start Access Level,
2
which accesses 32 parameters. Basic Access
3
Level allows access to 90 additional parameters.
Advanced Level accesses all parameters available
4
for a given Control Method setting. The User
Program Access Level will only be available if one
or more parameters are programmed into A 2 - 0 1 through A 2 - 3 2.

Quick-start
Basic
Advanced

See paragraph 4.3 for menu trees for each of the Access Levels, and paragraph 4.5,
Examples 1A and 1B, for programming examples in different Access Levels.
B.
User Program. Parameters A 2 - 0 1 through A 2 - 3 2 can each be set by the user
to allow a customized Access Level. The drive must first be temporarily set to Advanced
Access Level ( A 1 - 0 4 = 4); then use the “up arrow”, “down arrow” and “right arrow” keys
to set A 2 - 0 1 to the first parameter to which access is desired, A 2 - 0 2 to the next, etc.
Only the parameters entered into A 2 - 0 1 through A 2 - 3 2 will be available for monitoring
and modifying if A 1 - 0 1 is then set to "1".
5.5

AUTO-RESTART

A.

L 5 - 0 1 : Number of Auto-Restart Attempts

Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 to 10

When a fault occurs during operation, the drive can be programmed for an auto-restart
operation to automatically reset the fault. Auto-restart operation will use the number of
reset attempts set in this parameter, up to the maximum of 10. When set to " 0 ", no
auto-restarts will be attempted.
• The following
OC:
OV:
OL3:

faults can be automatically reset:
Overcurrent
GF:
Ground fault
Overvoltage
UV1: Undervoltage (Power UV)
Overtorque Detect

• The
1.
2.
3.

following conditions WILL NOT initiate auto-restart:
OL, EF , PUF or CPF fault.
When OC or UV occurs during deceleration.
When L 2 - 0 1 is programmed to stop during momentary power failure (data =
" 0 "). (See paragraph 5.29, MOMENTARY POWER LOSS RIDE-THRU. )

• The
1.
2.
3.

number of restart attempts available will be reset to the L 5 - 0 1 setting when:
10 minutes has elapsed without a fault occurring.
The RESET key, or external Fault Reset push button, is pressed.
Power is removed from the Drive.

5-7

5.5

AUTO-RESTART

B.

L 5 - 0 2 : Fault Contact Status During Auto-Restart

Continued
Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1

This digit controls how the fault contact responds to a drive fault during the auto-restart
operation.
0 = Fault contact will not actuate during auto-restart attempts
1 = Fault contact actuates during auto-restart attempts

FAULT DETECTION
L5-01 = 1
L5-01 = 0
FAULT CONTACT

OUTPUT FREQUENCY
Time from fault detection
to reset attempt, or time
between reset attempts

MOTOR RPM

100 ms

AUTOMATIC FAULT RESET

A u to - R e s t a r t O p e r a t i o n T i m i n g

5.6

A U T O M A T I C FREQUENCY REGULATOR (AFR) GAIN
C8-08

: AFR Gain

Factory setting: 1 . 0 0
Range: 0.00 to 10.00

C8-09

: AFR Time

Factory setting: 5 0
Range: 0 to 1000

msec

Useable only in Open Loop Vector Control Method ( A 1 - 0 2 = 2), these parameters affect
the speed response or prevent the motor from hunting. To improve the speed response,
increase C 8 - 0 8 and/or decrease C 8 - 0 9 . To stop the motor from hunting, decrease
C 8 - 0 8 and/or increase C 8 - 0 9 .

5-8

5.7

AUTOMATIC SPEED REGULATOR (ASR)

A.

C 5 - 0 1 : ASR Proportional Gain 1
(ASRP1)

Factory setting: 2 0 . 0 0
Range: 0.00 to 300.00

C 5 - 0 2 : ASR Integral Time 1
(ASRI1)

Factory setting: 0 . 5 0 0
Range: 0.000 to 10.000 seconds

Parameters C 5 - 0 1 and C 5 - 0 2 provide adjustments to enable the optimum
performance during load disturbances. The proportional gain ( C 5 - 0 1 ) adjusts the
amount of instantaneous droop as a function of loss, and provides damping from load
disturbances such as speed reference change, or a change in load. The integral time (
C 5 - 0 2 ) adjusts the response time of the drive to the load disturbances.
NOTE: Speed control response is increased by increasing the proportional gain
setting and decreasing the integral time. However, instability or hunting may occur
between the drive and the load if C 5 - 0 1 (ASR Proportional Gain) is set too
high, or C 5 - 0 2 (ASR Integral Time) is set too low.

ASR CIRCUIT
(INPUT)
SPEED
REF.

ERROR

+

(OUTPUT)
K (1+

–

SPEED
FEEDBACK

C5-01

1
)
sT

TORQUE
REF.

C5-02

OUTPUT (TORQUE REF.)

INTERNAL
LIMITER
INPUT (ERROR)

0
TIME

5-9

5.7

AUTOMATIC SPEED REGULATOR (ASR)

Continued

EXAMPLES OF C5-01 AND C5-02 ADJUSTMENTS

ASR Gain ( C5-01 ) Adjustment Only

ASR Integral Time ( C5-02 ) Adjustment Only

Speed Ref. = 10% of max.
C5-01 = 30.00
C5-02 = 0 .000

Speed Ref. = 10% of max.
C5-01 = 30.00
C5-02 = 10.000

SPEED 10%

SPEED 10%
6.9%

0%

0%

t

100%

t

100%

LOAD

LOAD

0%

0%

t

Speed Ref. = 10% of max.
C5-01 = 60.00
C5-02 = 0 .000

SPEED 10%

0%

t

Speed Ref. = 10% of max.
C5-01 = 30.00
C5-02 = 1.000

SPEED 10%

8.4%

0%

t

100%

t

100%

LOAD

LOAD

0%

0%

t

5-10

t

5.7
B.

AUTOMATIC SPEED REGULATOR (ASR)

Continued

C 5 - 0 3 : ASR Proportional Gain 2
(ASRP2)

Factory setting: 2 0 . 0 0

C 5 - 0 4 : ASR Integral Time 2
(ASRI2)

Factory setting: 0 . 5 0 0

Range: 0.00 to 300.00

Range: 0.000 to 10.000 seconds

Parameter C 5 - 0 3 is used as an additional proportional gain adjustment, and parameter
C 5 - 0 4 determines the response time for Proportional Gain 2 ( C 5 - 0 3 ) .

GAIN
C5-03
C5-01

0

C5-07
SPEED

C.

H 1 - 0 1 thru H 1 - 0 6: Multi-function
Input Terminal Function
Selection (Term. 3 thru 8)

Data E: ASR Integral Reset (IRST)

By programming data " E " into one of the
multi-function input parameters ( H 1 - 0 1 thru
H 1 - 0 6 ), one of the multi-function input terminals
(3 thru 8) becomes an ASR integral reset. When
there is a long time lag between the applying of
control power and actual run operation, output
voltage may be produced due to the integrator
offset. In such cases, the integral reset function
should be ON until the start of run operation.

D.

C 5 - 0 6 : ASR Output Lag Time

ASR
I-RESET
o

o

GPD 515/G5
8

11
0V

Factory setting: 4
Range: 0 to 500 msec

This function is used as a filter for mechanical problems such as mechanical backlash, play,
etc., which may prevent the ASR proportional gain from being increased as adjusted.

5-11

5.8

CARRIER FREQUENCY
C 6 - 0 1 : Carrier Frequency Upper Limit
C 6 - 0 2 : Carrier Frequency Lower Limit

Factory Setting: See Table A3-1
Range (each): 0.4 to 15.0 kHz

C 6 - 0 3 : Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain

Factory Setting: See Table A1-3
Range: 0 to 99

The relationship between output frequency and carrier frequency is determined from the set
values of C 6 - 0 1 t o C 6 - 0 3 .
( a ) For constant carrier frequency (set value of C 6 - 0 1 ):
Set C 6 - 0 3 = 0 , and set the same value in both C 6 - 0 1 and C 6 - 0 2 .
( b ) For synchronous mode (only with proportional section):
Set C 6 - 0 3 = 12, 24, 36, or 48. These setting values establish carrier
frequencies of 12f, 24f, 36f, or 48f, respectively, where f = output frequency.
( c ) In Vector Control mode, ONLY C 6 - 0 1 is effective.
CARRIER FREQUENCY UPPER LIMIT

K

C6-01 ≥ 10.0 kHz

3

10.0 kHz > C6-01 ≥ 5.0 kHz

2

C6-01 < 5.0 kHz

1

C6-01
CARRIER
FREQUENCY
C6-02

Fout x C6-03 x K

0
OUTPUT FREQUENCY

NOTE: Fault code " o P E 1 1 " is displayed if either of the following conditions
is detected:
1.
2.

C 6 - 0 3 > 6, and C 6 - 0 2 > C 6 - 0 1
C 6 - 0 1 > 5.0 kHz, and C 6 - 0 2 ≤ 5.0 kHz

5-12

5.9

C R I T I C A L FREQUENCY REJECTION

A.

d 3 - 0 1 : Prohibited Frequency 1
d 3 - 0 2 : Prohibited Frequency 2
d 3 - 0 3 : Prohibited Frequency 3

Factory setting (each): 0 . 0
Range (each): 0.0 to 400.0 Hz

These parameters allow programming of up to three prohibited frequency points for
eliminating problems with resonant vibration of the motor/machine. This feature does not
actually eliminate the selected frequency values, but will accelerate and decelerate the
motor through the prohibited bandwidth.
B.

d 3 - 0 4 : Prohibited Frequency Deadband

Factory setting: 1 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 20.0 Hz

This parameter determines the width of the deadband around each selected prohibited
frequency point. The factory setting is " 1.0 ", which establishes a deadband of ± 1.0 Hz.
EXAMPLE:
Vibration encountered between 30.0 and 36.0 Hz.
SOLUTION:

Set d3-01 = 33.0. This is the center of the problem
frequency band.
Set d3-04 = 3.0. This will cause the drive to reject all
frequency command values between 30.0 and 36.0 Hz.

A frequency command in the deadband will be converted to the bottom
value of the deadband, e.g. a command of 33 Hz would result in a run
frequency of 30 Hz.

Total Deadband = 6.0 Hz
FREQ. CMD
36 Hz
d3-01 = 33 Hz
30 Hz

± d3-04 (3.0 Hz)

0
OUTPUT FREQUENCY (Hz)

5-13

5.10
A.

DC INJECTION BRAKING
b 1 - 0 3 : Motor Stopping Method Selection

Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 to 3

b 2 - 0 4 : DC Injection Time at Stop

Factory setting: 0 . 5 0
Range: 0.00 to 10.00 seconds

When full range DC injection braking stop is enabled ( b 1 - 0 3 = 2), DC injection braking is
used to stop a motor more quickly than normal coast to stop, without the need for
braking resistors. When a STOP command is issued, there is a 0.5 second time delay to
apply DC to two phases of the motor’s stator winding. Then DC injection current is
applied. The duration of DC braking is a time period proportional to b 2 - 0 4 (at 10%
output frequency) and the level of output frequency at the time the STOP command is
issued.
Braking torque is 50-70% of full load motor torque.
EXAMPLE:
b 2 - 0 4 = 0.5 sec (at 10% output)
Braking time at Fmax (100% output frequency) = 10 x 0.5 = 5 seconds

STOP
b2-04 x 10
DC
INJECTION
BRAKING
TIME
b2-04

RUN CMD

OUTPUT
FREQUENCY

0 10%
0.5 sec
COASTING

100%

OUTPUT FREQUENCY
AT TIME OF STOP COMMAND

DC BRAKING TIME

Full Range DC Injection Braking Stop Sequence

5-14

5.10
B.

DC INJECTION BRAKING

Continued

b 2 - 0 1 : DC Inj. Braking Start Frequency

Factory Setting: 0 . 5
Range: 0.1 to 10.0 Hz

b 2 - 0 2 : DC Injection Braking Current
(% of Drive Rated Current)

Factory setting: 5 0

b 2 - 0 3 : DC Injection Time at Start

Factory setting: 0 . 0 0

Range: 0 to 100 %

Range: 0.00 to 10.00 seconds
b 2 - 0 4 : DC Injection Time at Stop

Factory setting: 0 . 0 0
Range: 0.00 to 10.00 seconds

DC injection can be used to stop a motor whose rotational direction is uncertain at start-up.
For this operation, application of DC injection braking current is controlled by a multifunction input (see paragraph 5.8.D).
With ramp to stop enabled ( b 1 - 0 3 = 0 ), after a STOP command is received the drive
controls motor deceleration according to the Decel Time setting, until output frequency
reaches the DC Injection Braking Start Frequency ( b 2 - 0 1 setting). Then the drive output
is turned off and DC injection current is applied to the motor. The effective DC injection
time and current should be set to provide adequate stopping without excessive motor
heating. The DC injection voltage is determined by the DC injection braking current and
motor impedance.

STOP

RUN COMMAND
RAMP TO STOP
DC

DC INJ. BRK. START
FREQUENCY ( b2-01 )

OUTPUT FREQUENCY
DC INJECTION TIME AT
START ( b2-03 )

DC

DC INJECTION TIME AT
STOP ( b2-04 )

DC Braking Sequence

b 2 - 0 8 : Field Compensation
At Start

Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 to 500%

This parameter adjusts the amount of motor current during DC Injection at start. A setting
of 0% disables this feature. A setting of 100% equals motor no-load current (E 2 - 0 3). This
current level will be applied until the DC Injection Time at Start (b 2 - 0 3) expires. This
parameter is useful when starting motors that are relatively higher in horsepower than the
drive, due to the requirement for increased magnetizing current. This parameter may also
compensate for reduced starting torque due to motor circuit inefficiencies.

5-15

5.10
C.

DC INJECTION BRAKING

Continued

H 3 - 0 5 : Multi-function Analog Input
(Term. 16)

Data 6 : DC Injection Braking Current
Adjust

The multi-function analog input at terminal 16 may be configured to allow analog control of
the amount of DC injection braking current (from 0% to 100% of the current level set in
b 2 - 0 2 ), which directly controls the amount of DC injection voltage applied to the motor.

1R

GPD 515/G5
100
15 +15V

BRAKING
CURRENT
ADJUST

D.

BRAKING
CURRENT
(%)
( b2-02 )

16 0-10V (20K
Ω)
17

0

C

10
ANALOG VOLTAGE

H 1 - 0 1 thru H 1 - 0 6 : Multi-function Inputs
(Term. 3 thru 8)

Data 6 0 : DC Injection Braking
Command

Any multi-function input terminal can be utilized
to control DC injection braking. When used, DC
injection current will be applied until the input is
removed, provided that the drive output
frequency is below the DC Braking Start
Frequency ( b 2 - 0 1 ) .

GPD 515/G5
o
o

8 DC INJ. BRK.
COMMAND

o

11

EXAMPLE:

0V

H 1 - 0 6 = 60
Contact input at Terminal 8 is
the DC Injection Braking Command
STOP

RUN COMMAND
DC INJECTION
BRAKING COMMAND
RAMP TO STOP
DC
OUTPUT FREQUENCY

DC INJ. BRK. START
FREQUENCY ( b2-01 )

DC Braking Sequence

5-16

DC

5.11

D I G I T A L OPERATOR DISPLAY SELECTION
o 1 - 0 3 : Display Scaling

Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 to 39999

This parameter determines the scaling of the Digital Operator display, for both Output
Frequency and all Frequency References.

DATA
DATA

DISPLAY
DISPLAY

0
(factory
setting)

Output frequency, in increments of 0.01 Hz.

1

Output frequency, in increments of 0.01 %.

2 to 3 9
(no. of motor
poles)

Motor synchronous speed (P = 120 x F
Ns
in increments of 1 RPM *
(39999 max).

)

P = no. of motor poles
F = Frequency
Ns = motor synchronous speed

NOTE: If motor synchronous speed exceeds
39999 RPM, display holds at " 3 9 9 9 9 " .
0 00 4 0
to
3 99 9 9

Line speed or other parameter. Setting must be
5 digits.
X X X X X
Display value at maximum
frequency ( E 1 - 0 4 )(include
leading zeroes if necessary)
Location of decimal point:
0 = XXXX
1 = XXX. X
2 = X X . XX
3 = X. XXX
(See CAUTION on next page)
EXAMPLE:
To display Line Speed, based on
54.32 FPM at 60 Hz:
o1-03 setting = 2 5 4 3 2

* Ineffective when in Flux Vector Control mode.

5-17

5.11

D I G I T A L OPERATOR DISPLAY SELECTION

Exceptions to the general format are as follows:

Continued
o1-03
" 10000 "
" 20000 "
" 30000 "

DISPLAY
=
=
=

1000.0
100.00
10.000

CAUTION
When setting a value in o1-03, the decimal point position
selected will automatically affect all of the Frequency Reference
Memory Settings ( d1-01 thru d1-09; see Table A1-4).
EXAMPLE:
o 1 - 0 3 factory setting: 0 0 0 0 0
d 1 - 0 9 (Jog) factory setting: 0 0 6 . 00

(6 Hz)

o 1 - 0 3 changed to 1 0 6 0 0
Decimal point at X X X.X
d 1 - 0 9 setting becomes 0 0 6 0 . 0
Therefore, for 10.00 Hz Jog frequency, d 1 - 0 9 must
be reprogrammed to " 0 0 1 . 0 0 " .

o 1 - 0 4 : Digital Operator Display Units

Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1

This parameter sets the frequency units for Flux
Vector mode.
The setting of o 1 - 0 4 affects the following
parameters:
E 1 - 0 4 : Maximum Frequency
E 1 - 0 6 : Base Frequency
E 1 - 0 7 : Mid Frequency A
E 1 - 0 9 : Minimum Frequency
E 1 - 1 1 : Mid Frequency B

o 1 - 0 5 : Parameter/Address Display Selection

Setting

Description

0

Hertz

1

RPM

Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1

This parameter selects whether the parameter
addresses are displayed on the Digital Operator
by parameter number, or by its corresponding
MODBUS address number.

5-18

Setting

Description

0

Parameter Number

1

MODBUS Address

5.12

D I S P L A Y – MONITOR ( A T POWER-UP) SELECTION
o 1 - 0 2 : Monitor Selection After Power-up

Factory setting: 1
Range: 1 to 4

This parameter determines which monitor display will appear on the Digital Operator when
the drive is powered up. The number programmed into o 1 - 0 2 corresponds to the
appropriate U 1 - X X parameter, which determines monitor status.
o1-02
SETTING

MONITOR SELECTION

1

U 1 - 0 1 — Frequency Reference

2

U 1 - 0 2 — Output Frequency

3

U 1 - 0 3 — Output Current

4

U 1 - X X — Monitor parameter selected by o 1 - 0 1

o 1 - 0 1 : Monitor Selection

Factory setting: 6
Range: 4 to 38

This setting allows the user to select an item to be displayed in the monitored parameters
list. The o 1 - 0 1 parameter corresponds to the o 1 - 0 2 setting "4 - Selected Monitor".
For example, to display DC bus voltage in the monitored parameters list, set parameter
o 1 - 0 1 to "7" for monitor selection U 1 - 0 7 .

5.13

DROOP
b 7 - 0 1 : Droop Control Gain

Factory setting: 0 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 100.0%

When active, the speed decreases or increases in proportion to load torque. As the load
increases, the speed droops according to the percentage set in b 7 - 0 1 . As the load
decreases, the speed increases.
Maximum droop is reached at full load. Maximum speed is based on the maximum output
frequency setting ( E 1 - 0 4 ). Excessive droop, which results in a significant difference
between the speed reference and the speed feedback, may activate a Speed Deviation
( D E V ) fault. The deviation detection level is an adjustable value, which can be set in
parameter F 1 - 1 0 .
b 7 - 0 2 : Droop Control Delay Time

Factory setting: 0 . 0 5
Range: 0.03 to 2.00 seconds

The setting of this parameter determines the drive’s droop response time to a load
change.
NOTE
Only available in the Flux Vector Control Method ( A 1 - 0 2 = 3).

5-19

5.14

DWELL
b 6 - 0 1 : Dwell Frequency at Start

Factory setting: 0 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 400.0 Hz

b 6 - 0 2 : Dwell Time at Start

Factory setting: 0 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 10.0 seconds

b 6 - 0 3 : Dwell Frequency at Stop

Factory setting: 0 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 400.0 Hz

b 6 - 0 4 : Dwell Time at Stop

Factory setting: 0 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 10.0 seconds

This function allows the drive to temporarily suspend acceleration or deceleration and
remain at a desired output frequency for a specified length of time.
After receiving a run command, the drive accelerates to the designated dwell start
frequency ( b 6 - 0 1 ). The output is then held at that frequency for the duration of the
dwell time at start ( b 6 - 0 2 ). After that length of time the drive continues to accelerate
to the set frequency.
When the run command is removed the drive decelerates to the designated dwell stop
frequency ( b 6 - 0 3 ). The output is then held at that frequency for the duration of the
dwell time at stop ( b 6 - 0 4 ). After that length of time the drive continues to decelerate
until the output frequency is zero.

RUN

SET FREQUENCY
OUTPUT
FREQ.

b6-01

b6-03
t

b6-02

b6-04

5-20

5.15
A.

ENCODER (PG) PARAMETERS
F 1 - 0 1 : Encoder (PG) Constant

Factory setting: 1 0 2 4
Range: 0 to 60000 ppr

This parameter is set to the Pulses Per Revolution (ppr) to the encoder used with the motor.

B.

F 1 - 0 2 : Operation Selection at PG
Open Circuit

Factory setting: 1

F 1 - 1 4 : PG Open Circuit Detection
Delay Time

Factory setting: 2 . 0

Range: 0 : Ramp to Stop
1 : Coast to Stop
2 : Fast-stop
3 : Alarm Only

Range: 0.0 to 10.0 seconds

The setting of F 1 - 0 2 determines the stopping method when a PG Open Circuit ( PGo ) is
detected. A PG open circuit is detected when no pulses are received from the pulse
generator within the time specified by F 1 - 1 4 . (Note: The PG Open fault is disabled when
zero speed is commanded.)
NOTE
Only available in the V/f w/PG and the Flux Vector Control Methods
( A 1 - 0 2 = 1 or 3).

5-21

5.15
C.

ENCODER (PG) PARAMETERS

Continued

F 1 - 0 8 : Overspeed Detection Level

Factory setting: 1 1 5
Range: 0 to 120 %

F 1 - 0 9 : Overspeed Detection Delay Time

Factory setting: See Table A3-2
Range: 0.0 to 2.0 seconds

F 1 - 0 3 : Operation Selection at
Overspeed

Factory setting: 1
Range: 0 : Ramp to Stop
1 : Coast to Stop
2 : Fast-stop
3 : Alarm Only

Parameters F 1 - 0 8 and F 1 - 0 9 work together to determine when an overspeed ( o S )
fault will occur. Parameter F 1 - 0 8 sets the desired overspeed level as a percentage of
the maximum output frequency ( E 1 - 0 4 ), and F 1 - 0 9 determines how long the
overspeed condition will be allowed to exist before a fault will occur. Parameter F 1 - 0 3
determines the stopping method when an overspeed fault ( o S ) occurs.
EXAMPLE:
A given application requires that if motor speed were to ever reach 1980 RPM,
an overspeed fault would occur and the motor should coast to stop. The motor
has 4 poles, and maximum frequency ( E 1 - 0 4 ) = 60Hz.
( E2-04 )
Desired
Overspeed
Level
x
Number
of Motor Poles x 100%
F1-08 =
120 x Maximum Frequency
( E1-04 )
F 1 - 0 8 = 1980 x 4 x 100% = 1 1 0 %
120 x 60
F1-03 = 1

Coast to Stop

NOTE
Only available in the V/f w/PG and Flux Vector Control Methods
( A 1 - 0 2 = 1 or 3).

5-22

5.15
D.

ENCODER (PG) PARAMETERS

Continued

F 1 - 1 0 : Excessive Speed Deviation
Detection Level

Factory setting: 1 0

F 1 - 1 1 : Excessive Speed Deviation
Detection Delay Time

Factory setting: 0 . 5

F 1 - 0 4 : Operation Selection at
Speed Deviation

Factory setting: 3

Range: 0 to 50 %

Range: 0.0 to 10.0 seconds

Range: 0 : Ramp to Stop
1 : Coast to Stop
2 : Fast-stop
3 : Alarm Only

Parameters F 1 - 1 0 and F 1 - 1 1 work together to determine when a Speed Deviation
( D E V ) fault will occur. Parameter F 1 - 1 0 determines how far the motor speed has to
differ from the speed reference (set as a percentage of E 1 - 0 4 ), and F 1 - 1 1 determines
how long the speed has to deviate before a fault will occur. Use F 1 - 0 4 to determine
stopping method if a speed deviation fault occurs.
EXAMPLE:
F 1 - 1 0 = 1 0 %, F 1 - 1 1 = 0 . 5 sec, F 1 - 0 4 = 1 , and E 1 - 0 4 (Max
Frequency) = 6 0 Hz. As can be seen below, the motor speed must drop
over 10% below the speed reference for 0.5 seconds before a fault occurs.
10% speed = E 1 - 0 4 x 0.1 = 60 x 0.1 = 6Hz

NOTE
Only available in the V/f w/PG and Flux Vector Control Methods
( A 1 - 0 2 = 1 or 3).

5-23

5.15
E.

ENCODER (PG) PARAMETERS

Continued

F 1 - 0 5 : PG Rotation

Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 : Counter-clockwise
1 : Clockwise

The setting of F 1 - 0 5 determines how the drive interprets the incoming pulses from the
pulse generator. It can be used to change direction of the motor without having to change
encoder wiring.
EXAMPLE:
To run a particular machine “forward” requires the motor shaft to turn in
a clockwise direction when viewed from the output shaft end of the motor.
The motor/encoder that is installed is running counter-clockwise as forward.
in order to change the direction of the motor, two of the motor leads need
to be swapped, and F 1 - 0 5 needs to be changed to a 1 .
NOTE
Only available in the V/f w/PG and Flux Vector control modes
( A 1 - 0 2 = 1 or 3).

F.

F 1 - 0 7 : Integral Value During Accel/Decel
Selection

Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

The setting of F 1 - 0 7 determines whether the automatic speed regulator (ASR) integral
operation is performed during accel/decel.
NOTE
Only available in the V/f w/PG Control Method ( A 1 - 0 2 = 1).

5-24

5.15
G.

Continued

ENCODER (PG) PARAMETERS
F 1 - 1 2 : Number of PG Gear Teeth 1

Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 to 1000

F 1 - 1 3 : Number of PG Gear Teeth 2

Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 to 1000

Parameters F 1 - 1 2 and F 1 - 1 3 are used to set the gear ration when there is a gear
ratio between the motor and the pulse generator. This function is disabled when F 1 - 1 2
and F 1 - 1 3 are set to 0 .
( F1-13 )
PG
Gear Teeth 2
Motor Speed (RPM) = Load Speed (RPM) x
PG Gear Teeth 1
( F1-12 )
EXAMPLE:
A motor is connected to a load through a toothed timing belt. The sheave
on the motor has 23 teeth, and the sheave on the load had 75 teeth. The
only mechanically practical place to mount a pulse generator for speed feedback is on the same shaft as the load sheave. In order to correctly scale the
encoder feedback, F 1 - 1 2 needs to be set to 2 3 , and F 1 - 1 3 needs to
be set to 7 5 .

NOTE
Only available in the V/f w/PG Control Method ( A 1 - 0 2 = 1).

5-25

5.16
A.

E N E R G Y SAVING OPERATION
Energy Saving V/f Control Methods

Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 to 100 %

b 8 - 0 1 : Energy Saving Gain

This parameter is only available in the V/f or V/f w/PG Control Methods (A 1 - 0 2 = 0 or 1).
This parameter sets, in increments of 1%, the level to which the output voltage is reduced
during the energy-saving operation.

V/f
CONVERSION

TORQUE
COMPENSATION

O

O

VOLTAGE COMMAND

O

ENERGYSAVING GAIN

CLOSE AT
SET FREQUENCY
AND ENERGY-SAVING
ENABLED

Output Voltage During Energy-Saving Operation
b 8 - 0 2 : Energy Saving Frequency

Factory setting: 0 . 0
Range: 0 to 400 Hz

This parameter is only available in the V/f or V/f w/PG control methods (A 1 - 0 2 = 0 or 1).
The energy saving function will only activate if all of the following conditions are met: a
multi-function input is activated which is set to energy savings (data 6 3), output frequency
is above the Energy Saving Frequency b 8 - 0 2, and the drive is up to its set speed (output
frequency = frequency reference).

B.

Energy Saving – Open Loop Vector &
Flux Vector Control Methods

Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1

b 8 - 0 3 : Automatic Energy Saving Selection
Setting
0
1

Description
Disabled – Energy saving mode will not be activated under light loads.
Enabled – The energy saving mode will automatically be activated
under light loads.

This parameter is only available when in the open loop vector or flux vector control methods
( A 1 - 0 2 = 2 or 3). When b 8 - 0 3 is set to a 1, a multi-function contact input is n o t required
to activate energy saving mode. This function is separate and should not be confused with
parameters b 8 - 0 1 and b 8 - 0 2. When the drive detects a lightly loaded motor, the output
voltage will automatically be reduced.

5-26

5.16

Continued

E N E R G Y SAVING OPERATION

Factory setting: 0 . 7 *

b 8 - 0 4 : Automatic Energy Saving
Control Gain

Range: 0.0 to 10.0
*Factory setting becomes 1 . 0 when A 1 - 0 2 = 3

Factory setting: 0 . 5 0 * *

b 8 - 0 5 : Automatic Energy Saving
Control Time Constant

Range: 0.00 to 10.0 sec.

**Factory setting becomes 0 . 0 1 when A 1 - 0 2 = 3
These parameters are only available when in the open loop vector or flux vector control
methods (A 1 - 0 2 = 2 or 3). Parameters b 8 - 0 4 and b 8 - 0 5 adjust the energy savings
voltage regulator. Increasing the gain (b 8 - 0 4) and/or decreasing the time constant (b 8 0 5) will increase the responsiveness of the energy savings function. If the response is set
too fast, the drive may become unstable. If the response is set too slow, the drive may
respond incorrectly when the motor load is re-applied.

H 1 - 0 1 thru H 1 - 0 6 : Multi-function
Inputs (Term. 3 thru 8)

Data 6 3 : Energy Saving
Operation

A multi-function input must be used to
command energy saving operation.

EXTERNAL
CONTACTS

GPD 515/G5
3 H1-01

When the external Energy-Saving Operation
command is closed at set frequency, the energysaving operation shown below is enabled. In the
energy saving operation, the output voltage is the
value of the energy saving gain ( b 8 - 0 1; factory
set to 80%) multiplied by the V constants defined
by E 1 - 0 5, - 0 8 and - 1 0 .

4 H1-02

MULTI> FUNCTION
5 H1-03
INPUT
6 H1-04
7 H1-05

NOTE

8 H1-06

If energy saving operation is enabled before accel
time is complete, output V/Hz is not affected until
set frequency is reached; then output voltage is
reduced by energy-saving gain ( b 8 - 0 1 ) setting.

11
0V

RUN COMMAND
ENERGY-SAVING COMMAND
L2-04

V (of E1-05, -08 & -10 ) x
Energy-Saving Gain ( b8-01 )

OUTPUT VOLTAGE

Energy-Saving Run Timing

5-27

5.17

EXTERNAL FAULT INPUTS
H 1 - 0 1 thru H 1 - 0 6 : Multi-function
Inputs (Term. 3 thru 8)

Data 2 0 - 2 F : External Fault

The multi-function input terminals can be used to define various modes of external faults.
When the External Faults 1-4 are inputted, " E F 3 " t o " E F 8 " are displayed on the Digital
Operator (steady for a major fault situation, blinking for a minor fault situation). The second
digit of the H 1 - 0 1 thru H 1 - 0 6 setting is entered in hexadecimal values which defines what
type of external fault contact is used and how the drive will react to the fault input.
H1-0X
Data:
2 __

0

0
1
2
3

X
X
X
X

Mode (Note 2)
1

2

3

Always
During
Detected Operation
X
X

X

X

5
6
7

X
X
X

X

X
X
X
X

C
D
E
F

X
X
X
X

X
X

X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X

N.C.
X

X
X

8
9
A
B

N.O.
X

X
X

4

(Factory Set)

Terminal
Input (Note 1)

X
X

X
X
X
X

X
X

X
X

NOTES
1.

N.O. = normally open contact; N.C. = normally closed contact.

2.

Mode
Mode
Mode
Mode

0
1
2
3

=
=
=
=

Ramp to Stop (decel time per C 1 - 0 2 ) ;
Coast Stop;
Emergency Stop (decel time per C 1 - 0 9 ) ;
Continuous operation (minor fault).

EXAMPLE:
To program External Fault 3 (Terminal 3)
for a N.C. contact, always detected, and
drive to continue operation:

EXTERNAL
FAULT
CONTACT

GPD 515
3

H 1 - 0 1 = 2D

11
0V

5-28

5.18

FREQUENCY REFERENCE BIAS/GAIN
H 3 - 0 2 : Frequency Reference Gain (Term. 13)
H 3 - 0 6 : Frequency Reference Gain (Term. 16)
H 3 - 1 0 : Frequency Reference Gain (Term. 14)

Factory setting (each): 1 0 0 . 0
Range (each): 0.0 to 1000.0 %

These parameters can be used to set the frequency command gain, in increments of 0.1%,
for its respective terminal.
H 3 - 0 3 : Frequency Reference Bias (Term. 13)
H 3 - 0 7 : Frequency Reference Bias (Term. 16)
H 3 - 1 1 : Frequency Reference Bias (Term. 14)

Factory setting (each): 0 . 0
Range (each): –100.0 to 100.0 %

These parameters can be used to set the frequency command bias, in increments of 0.1%,
for its respective terminal.
NOTE: If H 3 - 0 9 = 1F, H 3 - 1 0 and H 3 - 1 1 have no effect. Gain and bias for
terminal 14 are set by H 3 - 0 2 and H 3 - 0 3 , respectively.

110
100

100%

100%

90

FREQ.
REF.
(%)

–10V

GAIN

(–)

FREQ.
REF.
(%)

BIAS

(+)
–10V

0%
0V

(+)

FREQ. REF.
INPUT (V)

10V

0%
0V

FREQ. REF.
INPUT (V)

10V

(–)
90
–100%

100

–100%

110

BIAS

GAIN

ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE:
A.

For 0-10 Vdc input (term. 13 or 16)
1.
2.

B.

With no input, adjust Bias ( H 3 - 0 3 or H 3 - 0 7 setting) until an output
of 0.0 Hz is obtained.
With full scale input, adjust Gain ( H 3 - 0 2 or H 3 - 0 6 setting) until an
output of 60.0 Hz (or other desired max. output frequency) is obtained.

For 4-20mA input (term. 14)
1.
2.

With 4mA input, adjust Bias ( H 3 - 1 1 setting) until an output of 0.0 Hz
is obtained.
With 20mA input, adjust Gain ( H 3 - 1 0 setting) until an output of
60.0 Hz (or other desired max. output frequency) is obtained.
NOTE

Follow the same adjustment procedure for other desired frequency setpoints.

5-29

5.18

Continued

FREQUENCY REFERENCE BIAS/GAIN
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE (continued) :
C.

For inverse-acting frequency reference
1.

Begin with H 3 - 0 2 & H 3 - 0 3 settings as shown below.

2.

Fine tune as indicated in A or B above.

GPD 515/G5

Frequency reference inputs:
terminals 13 & 17 — 0-10 VDC
terminals 14 & 17 — 4-20 mA

13 0-10V (20K Ω)

FREQUENCY
REFERENCE

14 4-20 mA (250 Ω)
17
C

H3-02 H3-03
= 100.0
=
0.0

H3-02 H3-03

0.0
100.0

= 100.0
=
0.0

100%

0.0
100.0

100%

FREQ
REF.

FREQ
REF.
0%

0V

0%

10V

INPUT VOLTAGE (TERM. 13)

4mA

20mA

INPUT CURRENT (TERM. 14)

5-30

5.19

FREQUENCY REFERENCE INPUT SIGNALS (AUTO/MANUAL)
H 3 - 0 1 : Auto Speed Reference Signal
Level Selection (Term. 13)

Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1

To change the control circuit terminal 13 input level, program H 3 - 0 1 .
Setting

Terminal 13 Input Level

0
1

0 to 10 V
–10 to 10 V

H 3 - 0 4 : Multi-function Analog Input 1 Signal
Level Selection (Term. 16)

Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1

To change the control circuit terminal 16 input level, program H 3 - 0 4 .
Setting

Terminal 16 Input Level

0
1

0 to 10 V
–10 to 10 V

H 3 - 0 8 : Multi-function Analog Input 2 Signal
Level Selection (Term. 14)

Factory setting: 2
Range: 0 to 2

To change the control circuit terminal 14 input level, program H 3 - 0 8 .
Setting

Terminal 14 Input Level

0
1
2

0 to 10 V
–10 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA

IMPORTANT
In addition to setting parameter H 3 - 0 8 = 0 or 1 for a voltage input,
jumper J1 on the drive’s Control PCB must be cut.

Examples of wiring the drive for frequency references from various sources are shown on
the next page.
NOTE
If parameter H 3 - 0 9 = 1F terminals 13 and 14 are added and used as the internal
frequency reference.

5-31

5.19

Continued

FREQUENCY REFERENCE INPUT SIGNALS (AUTO/MANUAL)

A. Speed pot or 0-10VDC signal only:
b1-01 = 1
H3-01 = 0
H3-04 = 0
H3-08 = 2

B. 4-20mA signal only:
b1-01 = 1
H3-01 = 0
H3-04 = 0
H3-08 = 2

GPD515/G5

—

15

+15V

13

AUTO REF.
0-10VDC

17

GPD515/G5

+

15

+15V

14

AUTO REF.
4-20mA

17

0V

4-20mA DC
—

0V

0-10VDC

+

C. 0-10VDC signal (auto) and speed pot (manual):
GPD515/G5

+

15

5V

16

MANUAL REF.
0-10VDC

AUTO/
MAN

13

AUTO REF.
0-10VDC

17

0V

AUTO
MANUAL

5

b1-01 = 1
H3-01 = 0
H3-04 = 0
H3-08 = 2
H1-03 = 3

COM 11

0-10VDC
—

For a bidirectional speed pot, set H 3 - 0 4 = 1 and connect the low side to
terminal 33 instead of terminal 17.

D. 4-20mA DC signal (auto) and 0-10VDC signal or speed pot (manual):
GPD515/G5
15

+15V

16

MANUAL REF.
0-10VDC

AUTO/
MAN

AUTO
5

MANUAL

COM 11

+
0-10VDC
—

17

0V

14

AUTO REF.

4-20mA DC

+

For a –10 to +10V input instead of 0-10V at terminal 13, set H 3 - 0 1 = 1 .

5-32

b1-01 = 1
H3-01 = 0
H3-04 = 0
H3-08 = 2
H1-03 = 3

5.20

FREQUENCY REFERENCE LOSS DETECTION
L 4 - 0 5 : Frequency Reference Loss Detection

Factory setting: 0 (disabled)
Range: 0 or 1

The reference loss detection function is either enabled or disabled, based on the setting
o f L 4 - 0 5 . When enabled (data " 1 "), the reference loss detection compares the change
in reference with respect to time. If the reference decreases by 90% in more than 0.4
seconds, the drive will decelerate to the set reference; if the reference decreases by 90%
in less than 0.4 seconds, the drive will continue to operate at 80% of the output
frequency. To regain control of output frequency, either exceed the set reference (80%
of reference) or initiate a STOP command. If Auto Reference is less than Fmax ( E 1 - 0 4 )
x .05, this function is not performed.

FWD RUN
COMMAND

80%
REF
AUTO
REFERENCE
10%
0.4 SEC

0.4 SEC
80%
FREQ.

drive
OUTPUT
FREQUENCY

Timing Chart
Note: This function applies only to frequency references at terminal 13 or 14. Frequency reference
loss detection does not function at terminal 16.

5.21

FREQUENCY REFERENCE RETENTION
d 4 - 0 1 : Frequency Reference Retention

Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1

This parameter can be used to retain the held frequency reference in U 1 - 0 1 when
power is removed. Set d 4 - 0 1 = 1 if this is desired when using Up/Down or Sample/Hold
commands as a multi-function contact input.
Setting

Description

0

Not retained

1

Held reference retained in Frequency
Reference 1 ( U1-01 )

5-33

5.22

FREQUENCY REFERENCE UPPER & LOWER LIMITS
d 2 - 0 1 : Frequency Reference Upper Limit

Factory setting: 1 0 0 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 110.0 %

d 2 - 0 2 : Frequency Reference Lower Limit

Factory setting: 0 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 109.0 %

These two parameters set the range for the frequency command signal. Each is set, in
increments of 0.1%, as a percentage of maximum frequency (Fmax; E 1 - 0 4 ) as
established by either the selected standard V/f pattern or custom V/f pattern.
NOTE: All references are affected by the upper and lower limit points.

EXAMPLE:
E1-04 = " 60 " Hz (100%)
d2-01 = " 80.0 " % = 48Hz – Max. speed
d2-02 = " 10.0 " % = 6Hz – Min. speed

100%
d 2 - 0 1 80.0%
OUTPUT
FREQ.
( % )
d 2 - 0 2 10.0%
2.5%
t

5-34

5.23

H U N T I N G PREVENTION
C 7 - 0 1 : Hunt Prevent Selection

Factory setting: 1
Range: 0 or 1

Hunting often occurs following a load change, but may also occur when the motor is in the
process of settling to a steady operating frequency. Setting C 7 - 0 1 = 1 enables the
anti-hunt feature, which will reduce or suppress oscillation.
Setting
0
1

Description
Disabled
Enabled

C 7 - 0 2 : Hunt Prevent Gain

Factory setting: 1 . 0 0
Range: 0.00 to 2.50

This parameter adjusts the hunt prevent gain. It should be decreased for a vibrating
condition under heavy loads, and increased for hunting under light loads.
NOTE
This function is only available in the Volts/Hertz Control Method, both
with and without PG feedback ( A 1 - 0 2 = 0 or 1).

5-35

5.24

J O G REFERENCE
d 1 - 0 9 : Jog Reference

Factory setting: 6 . 0 0
Range: 0.00 to 400.00 Hz

When jog operation is selected (either by the Digital Operator JOG key, or by external Jog
and Run signals), the drive output will ramp to the output level set by this parameter.
When the Digital Operator is used, Jog can only be initiated from the stopped condition.
When the drive is running, the JOG key will have no effect on drive output.
When an external Jog signal is present, it will override the existing operation mode and the
drive will ramp to the level set by this parameter.

EXAMPLES:
OPERATION FROM DIGITAL OPERATOR

Press and
Hold JOG

Release
JOG

FREQ. CMD

d1-09 JOG
REF.
0

Press
RUN

Press and
Hold JOG

FREQ. CMD

d1-09 JOG
REF.
0

5-36

Release
JOG

Press
STOP

5.24

J O G REFERENCE

Continued

EXAMPLES:
OPERATION BY REMOTE SIGNAL INPUT (RUN & JOG1)

*

RUN

JOG1
FREQ. CMD
d1-09 JOG
REF.
0
RUN

*

JOG1
FREQ. CMD
d1-09 JOG
REF.
0

* Or FWD
JOG2 — 2-WIRE CONFIGURATION
b 1 - 0 2 =1 (Remote Control)
FWD
COMMAND
(EXTERNAL)

JOG2
(FWD OR REV)
FREQ. CMD

d1-09 JOG
REF.
0

5-37

5.24

J O G REFERENCE

Continued

EXAMPLES:
JOG2 — 3-WIRE CONFIGURATION
b 1 - 0 2 = 1 (Remote Control)
RUN *
COMMAND
(EXTERNAL)

**

JOG2
(FWD OR REV)
FREQ. CMD

d1-09 JOG
REF.
0

* Momentary contact.
** When JOG2 command is released, a STOP command
is issued.

NOTES:
1 . Use of external Jog input is selected by setting data " 6 ", " 12 ", or " 13 "
in one of the parameters H 1 - 0 1 thru H 1 - 0 6 .
• The factory configuration for 2-wire control is H 1 - 0 5 = 6,
for JOG1 input at terminal 7.
• The factory configuration for 3-wire control is H 1 - 0 6 = 6,
for JOG1 input at terminal 8.
• To select JOG2 - FWD, set data " 12 " into one of these parameters.
To select JOG2 - REV, set data " 13 " into one of these parameters.
JOG2 does not require an active RUN command to allow Jog operation.
2 . JOG2 (FWD or REV) has priority over FWD and REV Run in the 2-wire control
configuration, and priority over RUN, STOP, and FWD/REV commands in
3-wire control configuration.
3 . JOG2 - FWD and JOG2 - REV can be selected independently.
4 . b 1 - 0 4 = 1 (Reverse Run disabled) will override JOG2- REV.

Also see descriptions of MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT TERMINALS and RESET CODES.

5-38

5.25

LOCAL/REMOTE AND REFERENCE SELECTION
d1-01
d1-02
d1-03
d1-04
d1-05

:
:
:
:
:

Memory
Memory
Memory
Memory
Memory

1
2
3
4
5

d1-06
d1-07
d1-08
d1-09
(See

: Memory 6
: Memory 7
: Memory 8
: Jog Reference
paragraph 5.24)

Factory setting:
d 1 - 0 1 thru d 1 - 0 8 : 0 . 0 0
d1-09 : 6.00
Range (all): 0.00 to 400.00 Hz

H 3 - 0 5 : Multi-function Analog Input (Term. 16) (See paragraph 5.30)
b 1 - 0 2 : Operation Method Selection
H 1 - 0 3 thru H 1 - 0 6 : Multi-function Input Terminals; data " 3 ", " 4 ", " 5 ", and
" 6 " [ or " C " ], respectively, for Reference Select 1, 2, 3 and Jog [ or
Multi-function Analog Input at Term. 16 ] (See paragraph 5.31).
For Local/Remote select, see paragraph 5.31, data " 1 " description.
b 1 - 0 1 : Reference Selection (See below, or separate Option Instruction Sheet).
The drive allows selection of one of twelve references. Two are analog inputs, nine are
stored in memory, and one can be from an option card, either analog or digital. In most
configurations either the local reference ( d 1 - 0 1 ) or the remote AUTO reference will be
utilized.
NOTE
The range and resolution of the d 1 - X X parameters is dependent on
the setting of o 1 - 0 3 (see paragraph 5.11).

5.25 A

Local/Remote Reference Selection

b 1 - 0 1 : Reference Selection

Data: 0 = Local (Digital Operator) frequency
reference
1 = Remote (terminals) frequency
reference

By programming b 1 - 0 1 = 1, the external Auto reference input will be used. If b 1 - 0 1 is
programmed to " 0 ", the value in d 1 - 0 1 will be used as a frequency command.
IMPORTANT
d 1 - 0 1 will change each time the operator enters a new frequency command
from the Digital Operator’s " U 1 - 0 1 = X X . X X " prompt. Another way to
think of this is that when the drive is first powered up, the Digital
Operator displays " F r e q u e n c y R e f e r e n c e U 1 - 0 1 = X X . X X H Z ". The
value displayed is the current setting of d 1 - 0 1 . If the operator changes
the display, then d 1 - 0 1 will also be changed.

5-39

5.25

LOCAL/REMOTE AND REFERENCE SELECTION

5.25 B

Continued

Multiple Speed Reference Configuration [Multi-step Speed Operation]

In a multiple reference configuration, four modes may be selected.
NOTE
In the descriptions of Mode 1 thru Mode 4, the external terminal listings differ
depending on whether the drive is set for 2-wire or 3-wire control. For 3-wire
control, one of these terminals is dedicated to the FWD/REV selection; therefore,
multiple reference operation will use fewer of the memory settings and is a more
limited function.
Depending on the control wiring configuration and the multi-step mode chosen, the motor
can be operated at up to nine different speeds.

OUTPUT
SPEED

Auto
Speed
Ref. (ext.)
OR
Speed
Ref. 1
( d1-01 )

Manual
Speed
Ref. (ext.)
OR
Speed
Ref. 2
( d1-02 )

d1-08
d1-07
d1-06
d1-05
Jog
Speed
( d1-09 )

d1-04
d1-03

t
CLOSED

RUN

Multi-step
Select 1
(Term. 5)
Multi-step
Select 2
(Term. 6)
Multi-step
Select 3
(Term. 7)

CLOSED

CLOSED

CLOSED

CLOSED

Multi-step
Select 4
(JOG1)
(Term. 8)

Typical Multi-step Speed Operation

5-40

5.25

LOCAL/REMOTE AND REFERENCE SELECTION

Continued

M o d e 1 ( M e m o r y D a t a O n l y ) uses only memory locations d 1 - 0 1 thru d 1 - 0 9 .
The input commands at terminals 3 thru 8 are a
combination of 1's and 0's, which are received as
an on or off condition at each terminal. Every
combination selects a specific speed reference.

GPD 515
5 ( H1-03 )

b 1 - 0 1 = local/remote operation
(frequency reference);
H 1 - 0 3 = frequency reference select 1 at
terminal 5;
H 1 - 0 4 = frequency reference select 2 at
terminal 6;
H 1 - 0 5 = frequency reference select 3 at
terminal 7;
H 1 - 0 6 = JOG reference select at terminal 8;
H 3 - 0 5 = manual reference at terminal 16.

6 ( H1-04 )
7 ( H1-05 )
8 ( H1-06 )

2-WIRE CONTROL
b1-01 =
H1-03 =
H1-04 =
H1-05 =
H1-06 =
H3-05 =

3-WIRE CONTROL

0
3
4
5
6
*

b1-01 =
H1-03 =
H1-04 =
H1-05 =
H1-06 =
H3-05 =

External Terminal

Freq.
Ref.

8

7

6

5

d1-01
d1-02 *
d1-03

0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
1

0
1
0

d1-04
d1-05
d1-06

0
0
0

0
1
1

1
0
0

1
0
1

d1-07
d1-08
d1-09

0
0
1

1
1
X

1
1
X

0
1
X

0
0
3
4
6
*

External Terminal

Freq.
Ref.

8

7

6

5

d1-01
d1-02 *
d1-03
d1-04

0
0
0
0

0
0
1
1

0
1
0
1

■
■
■
■

d1-09

1

X

X

■

1 = Closed; 0 = Open;
X = No effect; ■ = FWD/REV

* H 3 - 0 5 selects the function of the multi-function analog input. If data value " 0 " is
entered, the analog input represents manual reference. If d 1 - 0 2 is to be utilized,
then H 3 - 0 5 MUST N O T b e s e t t o " 0 ". Set H 3 - 0 5 to " 1F " when Multi-function
Analog Input (terminal 16) is not being used.

5-41

5.25

LOCAL/REMOTE AND REFERENCE SELECTION

Continued

M o d e 2 ( M e m o r y , A u t o , M a n u a l ) uses Auto, Manual and d 1 - 0 3 thru d 1 - 0 9 .
The input commands at terminals 3 thru 8 are a
combination of 1's and 0's, which are received as
an on or off condition at each terminal. Every
combination selects a specific speed reference.

GPD 515/G5
5 ( H1-03 )

b 1 - 0 1 = remote operation;
H 1 - 0 3 = frequency reference select 1 at
terminal 5 (Auto/Manual);
H 1 - 0 4 = frequency reference select 2 at
terminal 6;
H 1 - 0 5 = frequency reference select 3 at
terminal 7;
H 1 - 0 6 = JOG reference select at terminal 8;
H 3 - 0 5 = manual reference at terminal 16.

6 ( H1-04 )
7 ( H1-05 )
8 ( H1-06 )

2-WIRE CONTROL
b1-01 =
H1-03 =
H1-04 =
H1-05 =
H1-06 =
H3-05 =

Freq.
Ref.

3-WIRE CONTROL

1
3
4
5
6
0

b1-01 =
H1-03 =
H1-04 =
H1-05 =
H1-06 =
H3-05 =

External Terminal
8

7

6

5

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
1

0

0

1

0

d1-04
d1-05
d1-06

0
0
0

0
1
1

1
0
0

1
0
1

d1-07
d1-08
d1-09

0
0
1

1
1
X

1
1
X

0
1
X

Auto
Manual
(Multi-func.)
d1-03

External Terminal

Freq.
Ref.
Auto
Manual
(Multi-func.)
d1-03
d1-04
d1-09

1
0
3
4
6
0

8

7

6

5

0
0

0
0

0
1

■
■

0
0

1
1

0
1

■
■

1

X

X

■

1 = Closed; 0 = Open;
X = No effect; ■ = FWD/REV

5-42

5.25

LOCAL/REMOTE AND REFERENCE SELECTION

Continued

M o d e 3 ( d 1 - 0 1 , M a n u a l , d 1 - 0 3 t h r u d 1 - 0 9 ) uses d1-01, Manual and d 1 - 0 3
thru d 1 - 0 9 .
The input commands at terminals 3 thru 8 are a
combination of 1's and 0's, which are received as
an on or off condition at each terminal. Every
combination selects a specific speed reference.

GPD 515/G5
5 ( H1-03 )

b 1 - 0 1 = local operation;
H 1 - 0 3 = frequency reference select 1 at
terminal 5 (Auto/Manual);
H 1 - 0 4 = frequency reference select 2 at
terminal 6;
H 1 - 0 5 = frequency reference select 3 at
terminal 7;
H 1 - 0 6 = JOG reference select at terminal 8;
H 3 - 0 5 = manual reference at terminal 16.

6 ( H1-04 )
7 ( H1-05 )
8 ( H1-06 )

2-WIRE CONTROL
b1-01 =
H1-03 =
H1-04 =
H1-05 =
H1-06 =
H3-05 =

Freq.
Ref.

3-WIRE CONTROL

0
3
4
5
6
0

b1-01 =
H1-03 =
H1-04 =
H1-05 =
H1-06 =
H3-05 =

External Terminal
8

7

6

5

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
1

0

0

1

0

d1-04
d1-05
d1-06

0
0
0

0
1
1

1
0
0

1
0
1

d1-07
d1-08
d1-09

0
0
1

1
1
X

1
1
X

0
1
X

d1-01
Manual
(Multi-func.)
d1-03

External Terminal

Freq.
Ref.
d1-01
Manual
(Multi-func.)
d1-03
d1-04
d1-09

0
0
3
4
6
0

8

7

6

5

0
0

0
0

0
1

■
■

0
0

1
1

0
1

■
■

1

X

X

■

1 = Closed; 0 = Open;
X = No effect; ■ = FWD/REV

5-43

5.25

LOCAL/REMOTE AND REFERENCE SELECTION

Continued

Mode 4
The final consideration for multiple frequency
command configuration modes is that any
combination of reference values may be configured
for operation. As an example, if only three speed
references are required, then the following example
will work.
b1-01 =
H1-03 =
H1-04 =
H3-05 =

GPD 515/G5
5 ( H1-03 )
6 ( H1-04 )

local operation;
frequency select 1 at terminal 5;
frequency select 2 at terminal 6;
manual reference at terminal 16.

2-WIRE CONTROL
b1-01 =
H1-03 =
H1-04 =
H3-05 =
Freq.
Ref.
d1-01
Manual
(Multi-func.)
d1-03

5.26

0
3
5
0

External Terminal
8

7

6

5

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
1

0

0

1

0

MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS
o 2 - 0 1 : LOCAL/REMOTE Key Selection

Factory setting: 1
Range: 0 or 1

This parameter determines if the LOCAL/REMOTE key is operative.
Setting

Description

0

Disabled

1

Enabled

5-44

5.26

Continued

MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS
o 2 - 0 2 : STOP Key Function

Factory setting: 1
Range: 0 or 1

This parameter determines if the STOP key is operative during remote run.
Setting

Description

0

Disabled

1

Enabled

o 2 - 0 5 : Digital "Motor Operated Pot"

Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1

Setting this parameter to " 1 " allows the setting of the frequency reference to imitate a
motor operated pot reference.
Setting

Description

0

Drive accepts frequency command after ENTER
is pressed

1

Drive accepts frequency reference immediately

o 2 - 0 6 : Operator Detection Selection

Factory setting: 1
Range: 0 or 1

Setting this parameter to " 0 " allows the drive to continue to run when the Digital
Operator is disconnected from the drive.
Setting

Description

0

Disabled (operation continues)

1

Enabled (motor coasts to stop and fault is displayed)

o 2 - 0 7 : Elapsed Timer Setting

Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 65535

This parameter allows the user to preset a starting value for the elapsed timer. Elapsed
time is accumulated according to the setting of o 2 - 0 8 .

5-45

5.26

MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS

Continued

o 2 - 0 8 : Elapsed Timer Selection

Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1

This parameter determines whether the timer is active whenever power is applied to the
drive or whenever the drive is in run mode.
Setting

Description

0

Timer active whenever power is applied to the drive

1

Timer active whenever drive is in “run” mode

b 1 - 0 8 : Run Command Selection
During Program

Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1

This parameter determines if the drive will accept a run command while in the “program”
mode. The drive is in the “program” mode whenever the drive light is off.
Setting

Description

0

Disabled – If a run is commanded while the drive
is in the “program” mode (drive light is off), it will not run.
Enabled – If a run is commanded while the drive is in the
“program” mode (drive light off), it will operate normally.

1

5.27

MISCELLANEOUS PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
L 8 - 0 1 : Internal Dynamic Braking (Heatsink)
Resistor Protection

Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1

Set this parameter to " 1 " only if a heatsink-mount resistor will be used with the drive.
Set L 8 - 0 1 to " 0 " if not using Dynamic Braking, or if using a remote DB resistor.
Setting
0
1

Description
Not provided
Provided

L 8 - 0 2 : OH (Overheat) Protection
Alarm Level

Factory setting: See Table A3-1
Range: 50 to 130 °C

This parameter sets the temperature at which the heatsink thermostat will indicate an
overtemperature condition. The corresponding action the drive will take is dependent upon
the setting of L 8 - 0 3 (see below).
L 8 - 0 3 : Operation Selection After OH
(Overheat) Pre-alarm
Setting
0
1
2
3

Factory setting: 3
Range: 0 to 3

Description
Ramp to Stop (using C1-02 )
Coast to Stop (base block)
Fast-stop (using C1-09 )
Alarm Only (operation continues)

5-46

5.27

MISCELLANEOUS PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
L 8 - 1 0 : Output Ground Fault
Detection Selection

Continued
Factory setting: 1
Range: 0 or 1

Setting

Description

0

Disabled – The drive will not detect a ground fault condition

1

Enabled – The drive will detect a ground fault condition

L 8 - 1 7 : IGBT Protection Selection
at Low Frequency

Factory setting: 1
Range: 0 or 3

Setting
0
1

2
3

Description
Drive relies on L8-19 protection.
Lower fc – When output current is greater than 100%, and output
frequency is less than or equal to 10 Hz, the carrier frequency is
automatically decreased to between 8 kHz and 2 kHz depending on
the drive size. The carrier will automatically return to the normal
value after the load is reduced.
Short term OL2 – OL2 occurs in 2 seconds when output frequency is
6 Hz or less and in current limit (approx. 175% of drive rated current).
I-Limit=150% – Current is limited to 150% of drive rated current.

Parameter L 8 - 1 7 assists in protecting the output transistors (IGBTs) from overheating
when the output current is high and the output frequency is low.

L 8 - 1 9 : OL2 Selection At Low Speed

Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1

Setting

Description

0

Disabled – Drive Overload (OL2) protection is the same at low
speed as it is at high speed.

1

Enabled – Drive Overload (OL2) protection responds more quickly
when output frequency is 6 Hz or less.

This parameter allows the selection of normal or quick Drive Overload (OL2) protection
below 6 Hz. It is recommended that this parameter be enabled at all times. In some
instances quick drive overload protection (L 8 - 1 9=1) may not be desired, such as when
operating in flux vector at zero speed. If L 8 - 1 9 is set to 0 (disabled) L 8 - 1 7 must be set
to 1, 2, or 3.
Caution: When disabling OL2 protection at low speeds (L 8 - 1 9=0), set the carrier
frequency (C 6 - 0 1 & C 6 - 0 2) equal to or less than 2 kHz.

5-47

5.28

MODBUS CONTROL

The drive can perform serial communication by using a programmable controller (PLC) and
MODBUS protocol. MODBUS is composed of one master PLC and 1 to 31 (maximum)
slave units (GPD 515/G5). In serial communication between the master and slaves, the
master always starts transmission and the slaves respond to it.
The master communicates with one slave at a time. Address numbers are assigned to each
slave in advance, and the master specifies an address to communicate with. The slave
which receives the command from the master executes the function, and then responds to
the master.
A.

B.

Communication Specifications
• Interface

:

RS-232C (standard); RS-485, RS-422 (option requires communication interface card CM085)

• Synchronization

:

Asynchronous

• Transmission parameters

:

Baud rate

• Protocol

:

MODBUS

• Maximum number to units
to be connected

:

31 units (when RS-485 is used)

— Selectable from 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600 BPS ( H 5 - 0 2 )
Data length — Fixed to 8 bits
Parity
— Parity / no parity, even / odd
selectable ( H 5 - 0 3 )
Stop bit
— Fixed to 1 bit

Sending/Receiving Data

Data that can be sent and received are run/stop commands, frequency reference, fault
reset, drive status, and setting and reading of parameters.
b 1 - 0 1 : Reference Selection
b 1 - 0 2 : Operation Method Selection

Factory setting (each): 1
Range (each): 0 to 4

Select the run command and frequency reference input method in b 1 - 0 1 and
b 1 - 0 2 . To provide a run command and frequency reference by communication,
set this data to " 2 ". Monitoring of run status, parameter setting/reading, fault
reset and multi-function input command from the PLC are enabled. The multi-function
input command is OR’ed with the command input from control circuit terminals 3-8.
EXAMPLE:
Open
Closed

b 1 - 0 1 and b 1 - 0 2 settings are " 3 ".
: Run by frequency reference from control circuit terminal 13 or 14
and run command from control circuit terminal 1 or 2.
: Run by frequency reference and run command from serial
communication.

5-48

5.28

MODBUS CONTROL

Continued

H 5 - 0 1 : Serial Communication Station Address

Factory setting: 1 F
Range: 1 to 1F (Hex)
(= 1 to 31 decimal)

Each slave on the same transmission line must be given a unique address.

H 5 - 0 2 : Serial Communication Baud Rate

Factory setting: 3
Range: 0 to 4

Selects the baud rate, as indicated by the following table:
Setting

Baud Rate (BPS)

0
1
2
3
4

1200
2400
4800
9600
19.2 K

H 5 - 0 3 : Serial Communication Parity Selection

Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 to 2

Selects the parity, as indicated by the following table:
Setting

Parity

0
1
2

None
Even
Odd

NOTE: To change the values set in H 5 - 0 1 thru H 5 - 0 3 and enable
the new settings, it is necessary to turn OFF power to the Drive, then
turn it ON again.

H 5 - 0 5 : Serial Communication Error ( CE )
Detection

Factory setting: 1
Range: 0 or 1

This parameter determines whether or not the drive will detect a CE condition. The
corresponding action the drive will take is dependent upon the setting of H 5 - 0 4 .
Setting
0
1

Description
Disabled
Enabled

5-49

5.28

MODBUS CONTROL

Continued

H 5 - 0 4 : Stopping Method After Serial
Communication Error ( CE )

Setting
0
1
2
3

5.29

Factory setting: 3
Range: 0 to 3
Description

Ramp to Stop (using C1-02 )
Coast to Stop (base block)
Fast-stop (using C1-09 )
Alarm Only (operation continues)

M O M E N T A R Y POWER LOSS RIDE-THRU
L 2 - 0 1 : Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru
Protection

0 = Disabled (Factory setting)
1 = Enabled – 2 sec. power loss
ride-thru
2 = Enabled – indefinite power loss
ride-thru, provided control
power is maintained

The setting of this parameter either enables or disables the ride-thru feature of the
drive. If disabled, the unit will stop immediately whenever a power loss occurs. If enabled,
the drive will continue to operate during a momentary power loss of up to 80%, but if the
loss exceeds the identified time period, the drive will stop.
L 2 - 0 2 : Power Loss Ride-Thru
Deactivation Time

Factory setting: See Table A3-1
Range: 0.0 to 2.0 seconds

If the loss exceeds the length of time identified by L 2 - 0 2 , the drive will stop. The
factory setting of this parameter, in 0.1 second increments, is related to the drive’s
capacity rating (see Appendix 3).
Note that the RUN command must be maintained throughout the ride-thru period. If
L 2 - 0 1 is set to " 2 ", a " U V " alarm is displayed during power loss, and no fault signal is
output at any multi-function output that is programmed for a fault.

5-50

5.29

M O M E N T A R Y POWER LOSS RIDE-THRU
L 2 - 0 3 : Momentary Power Loss Minimum
Base Block Time

Continued
Factory setting: See Table A3-1
Range: 0.0 to 5.0 seconds

When a power loss is detected, the output is baseblocked for the amount of time set in
L 2 - 0 3 . During this time, residual voltage in the motor is allowed to diminish. This guards
against faults resulting from the drive output turning on while the motor still has residual
voltage.
If the minimum baseblock time ( L 2 - 0 3 ) is greater than the power loss ride-thru time
( L 2 - 0 2 ), drive operation resumes after the minimum baseblock time. If the minimum
baseblock time is less than the power loss ride-thru time, drive operation resumes after
recovery of input power.
L 2 - 0 4 : Momentary Power Loss Recovery
Ramp Time

Factory setting: 0 . 3
Range: 0.0 to 2.0 seconds

After recovery from a momentary power loss, the drive performs a speed search. The ramp
recovery time ( L 2 - 0 4 ) is the time is takes the output voltage to return to the preset V/f
pattern.
L 2 - 0 5 : Undervoltage Detection Level

Factory setting: 1 9 0 (230V ratings)
3 8 0 (460V ratings)
Range: 150 to 210 VDC (230V ratings)
300 to 420 VDC (460V ratings)

The setting of this parameter determines the DC bus undervoltage trip point. When the
voltage level on the DC bus drops below this value, a UV (undervoltage) fault will occur.

5-51

5.29

M O M E N T A R Y POWER LOSS RIDE-THRU

Continued

UNDERVOLTAGE
DETECTION
t

MOTOR
RPM
t

SET FREQUENCY
OUTPUT
FREQUENCY

t

b3-03

L2-03
L2-02
b3-04

OUTPUT
VOLTAGE

t

L2-04
b3-02
(150%)

OUTPUT
CURRENT

t

L2-03
L2-02
L2-04
b3-02
b3-03
b3-04

:
:
:
:
:
:

Minimum Baseblock Time
Power Loss Ride-thru Time
Voltage Recovery Time
Speed Search Current
Speed Search Decel Time
V/f Reduction During Speed Search

Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru, With Speed Search

5-52

5.30

M U L T I - F U N C T I O N ANALOG INPUTS ( T e r m . 1 4 & 1 6 )
H 3 - 0 5 : Multi-function Analog Input 1
Selection (Term. 16)
H 3 - 0 9 : Multi-function Analog Input 2
Selection (Term. 14)

1R
GPD 515/G5
15 +15V

Programming H 3 - 0 5 or H 3 - 0 9 per the chart
below configures terminal 16 or 14 for analog
control. The figures following the chart show how
each setting configures the analog input.

16

•

0-10V
(20KΩ)

17
See Note 1
2R

33

C
–15V

TABLE 5-1; H3-05 and H3-09 Data Settings
DATA
DATA

FUNCTION
FUNCTION

DESCRIPTION
REMARKS

AVAILABILITY
AVAILABILITY

(See Note
2) NO
(SEE

0,1
0, 1

22

3

0

Manual reference

External reference input

X

X

X

1

Frequency reference gain
(FGAIN)

Total gain = Internal gain ( H3-02 ) x FGAIN

X

X

X

2

Frequency reference bias
(FBIAS)

Total bias = Internal bias ( H3-03 ) + FBIAS;
FBIAS is based on Fmax ( E1-04 )

4

VBIAS

Voltage boost after V/f conversion

X

—

—

5

Accel/decel time
coefficient

Accel/decel time varied by analog input

X

X

X

6

DC injection braking
current adjust

DC injection braking current varied by analog input
(10V/drive rated current); internal setting ( b2-02 )
ineffective

X

X

—

7

Overtorque detection level

Internal overtorque detection level ( C6-02 ) disabled

X

X

X

8

Stall prevention level
during running

Stall prevention level ( L3-06 = 100% level) varied by
analog input

X

—

—

9

Frequency reference
lower limit

Frequency reference lower limit is set by analog input.
Either d2-02 setting value or analog input, whichever
is greater, becomes effective.

X

X

X

A

Setting prohibited
frequency 4

Analog input sets a fourth prohibited frequency, in
addition to those set by d3-01 thru d3-03

X

X

X

X

X

B

PID feedback

Provides feedback signal for use with PID control ( b5-01 )

X

X

X

C

PID Set Point

Provides a setpoint signal for use with PID control.
(Frequency reference no longer acts as PID setpoint.)

X

X

X

D

Frequency Reference
Bias 2 (FBIAS2)

Additional frequency reference bias input. Total bias =
Internal bias (H3-03) + FBIAS + FBIAS2. FBIAS2 is based
on Fmax (E1-04).

E-F

Not Used

X

X

—

—

—

10

FWD torque limit

10V = 100% of motor rated torque (forward direction)
Quadrant 1 (See Note 3)

—

X

X

11

REV torque limit

10V = 100% of motor rated torque (reverse direction)
Quadrant 3 (See Note 3)

—

X

X

12

Regenerative torque limit
(TLG)

10V = 100% of motor rated torque (forward & reverse
regeneration) Quadrants 2 & 4 (See Note 3)

—

X

X

5-53

5.30

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUTS ( T e r m . 1 4 & 1 6 )

DATA
DATA

FUNCTION
FUNCTION

Continued
AVAILABILITY
AVAILABILITY

(See Note
2) NO
(SEE

DESCRIPTION
REMARKS

0,1
0, 1

22

3
3

13

Torque reference (in
Torque Control);
Torque limit (in Speed
Control)

10V = 100% of motor rated torque (forward & reverse)
Quadrants 1, 2, 3, & 4 (See Note 3)

—

—

X

14

Torque compensation

See paragraph 5.43.

—

—

X

15

Torque limit

—

X

X

1F

“Not Used”

X

X

X

When programmed in H3-05, terminal 16 input has no effect.
When programmed in H3-09, terminal 14 input is added to
the terminal 13 frequency reference.

NOTES:
1.

For a bidirectional pot input instead of 0-10V, set H 3 - 0 4 = 1 (for terminal 16) or
H 3 - 0 8 = 1 (for terminal 14), and connect the low (negative) side of the pot to
terminal 33. If using a –10 to +10V input, connect the positive side to terminal 16
or 14, and the negative side to terminal 17.

2.

Column headings refer to set value of A 1 - 0 2 , Control Method; 0 = V/f,
1 = V/f w/PG, 2 = Open Loop Vector, 3 = Flux Vector. "X" in column indicates
Available, "—" indicates Not Available.

3.

Quadrant
Quadrant
Quadrant
Quadrant

1
2
3
4

is
is
is
is

forward
forward
reverse
reverse

motor
motor
motor
motor

rotation, torque in forward direction;
rotation, torque in reverse direction (regeneration);
rotation, torque in reverse direction;
rotation, torque in forward direction (regeneration).

H3-05 = 0
H3-09 = 0

H3-05 = 1
H3-09 = 1
100%

100%

FREQUENCY
REF.

FGAIN
–10V

–10V

0%
0V

10V

0%
0V

–100%

10V

–100%

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT

5-54

5.30

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUTS ( T e r m . 1 4 & 1 6 )
H3-05 = 2 or C
H3-09 = 2 or C

Continued

H3-05 = 4
H3-09 = 4
100%

100V

FBIAS &
FBIAS2

VBIAS
–10V

0%
0V

10V

–10V

0V

10V

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT
–100%
MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT
H3-05 = 6
H3-09 = 6

H3-05 = 5
H3-09 = 5

100%

10
REDUCTION
COEFFICIENT

DC INJECTION
BRAKING
CURRENT

1

–10V
–10V

0V 1V

0V

Accel or decel time
Coefficient

H3-05 = 7
H3-09 = 7

H3-05 = 8
H3-09 = 8
STALL
PREVENTION
LEVEL DURING
RUNNING

200%
OVERTORQUE
DETECTION
LEVEL

10V

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT
Actual accel or decel time =

0%

10V

0%
–10V

0V

10V

(PERCENT
OF L3-06

100%
50%
30%

–10V

0V

3V

5V

10V
MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT

SETTING)

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT

H3-05 = 9
H3-09 = 9

H3-05 = A
H3-09 = A

Max. Output Freq.

Max. Output Freq.

( E1-04 )
FREQUENCY
REFERENCE
LOWER LIMIT

( E1-04 )
SETTING
PROHIBITED
FREQUENCY 4

0 Hz
–10V

0V

10V

0 Hz
–10V

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT

0V

10V

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT

5-55

5.30

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUTS ( T e r m . 1 4 & 1 6 )

H3-05 = 10
H3-09 = 10

Continued

H3-05 = 11
H3-09 = 11

FWD
TORQUE
LIMIT

100%

REV
TORQUE
LIMIT

100%

0%

0%

–10V

0V

10V

–10V

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT

H3-05 = 12
H3-09 = 12

0V

10V

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT

H3-05 = 13
H3-09 = 13
100%

REGEN
TORQUE
LIMIT

100%

TORQUE
REFERENCE
–10V

0%
–10V

0V

0%

10V

0V

10V

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT
–100%
MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT
H3-05 = 15
H3-09 = 15

H3-05 = 14
H3-09 = 14

100%

100%
TORQUE
COMPENSATION

TORQUE
LIMIT
–10V

0%
0V

0%
0V

10V

10V

–100%

–100%

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT

H 3 - 1 2 : Analog Input Filter Time
Constant

Factory setting: 0 . 0 0
Range: 0.00 to 2.00 seconds

This parameter adjusts the time it takes to process the analog input signal. The signal
that comes into the drive on terminals 13, 14 and 16 goes through an analog to digital
converter, and then to the control circuit. This filter time constant determines the time
between converting and processing.
For cases when there is noise on the analog signal, this time constant may be increased.
Extending the processing time can help prevent erratic performance of the drive.

5-56

5.31

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG MONITOR OUTPUT ( T e r m . 2 1 - 2 3 )
H 4 - 0 1 : Multi-function Analog Monitor
Output 1 Selection

Factory setting: 2
Range: 1 to 38

H 4 - 0 4 : Multi-function Analog Monitor
Output 2 Selection

Factory setting: 3
Range: 1 to 38

The analog monitor outputs provides a 0 to ±1 0
Vdc signal between terminals 21 & 22 (or 23 &
22), proportional to the value of the U 1 - X X
parameter identified by the setting of H 4 - 0 1 ( o r
H 4 - 0 4 ). (See Appendix 1 for listing of U 1 - X X
parameters.)
Factory setting, monitor output 1 =
H 4 - 0 1 = 2 ( U 1 - 0 2 ) : Output Frequency
(10V = Fmax)

FREQUENCY / CURRENT
METER
(1MA FULL SCALE)

GPD 515/G5
Analog
Monitor 1
(±10 VDC
output)

21

●

Analog
Monitor 2
(±10 VDC
output)

+

●

22

23

–

+

Factory setting, monitor output 2 =
H 4 - 0 4 = 3 ( U 1 - 0 3 ) : Drive output
current
(5V = continuous rated current)

MULTIFUNCTION
MONITOR
OUTPUT 1

MULTIFUNCTION
–
MONITOR
OUTPUT 2

NOTE
This output is suitable for metering, but SHOULD NOT be used for external
control circuits. To produce an output signal for use by external control
circuits, an Analog Monitor option card (AO-08 or AO-12) must be installed
in the drive.
H 4 - 0 2 : Multi-function Analog Monitor 1 Gain
H 4 - 0 5 : Multi-function Analog Monitor 2 Gain

Factory Setting : 1 . 0 0
Factory Setting : 0 . 5 0
Range (each): 0.00 to 2.50

The settings of these parameters, in increments of 0.01, are used to calibrate the output at
terminals 21 & 22 or 23 & 22.
H 4 - 0 3 : Multi-function Analog Monitor 1 Bias
H 4 - 0 6 : Multi-function Analog Monitor 2 Bias

Factory Setting (each): 0 . 0 %
Range (each): –10.0 to +10.0 %

The settings of these parameters, in increments of 0.1 %, are used to calibrate the output
at terminals 21 & 22 or 23 & 22.
H 4 - 0 7 : Multi-function Analog Monitor Signal
Level Selection

Factory Setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1

This function allows the analog monitor output(s) to have a unipolar output signal (0-10V),
or a bipolar output signal (0 to ±1 0 V ) .
0 : Analog output is + voltage only (absolute value).
1 : Analog output is ± voltage according to sign (direction).

5-57

5.32

M U L T I - F U N C T I O N INPUT TERMINALS ( T e r m . 3 - 8 )
H1-01
H1-02
H1-03
H1-04
H1-05
H1-06

:
:
:
:
:
:

Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal

3
4
5
6
7
8

Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function

Factory settings:
H1-01
H1-02
H1-03
H1-04
H1-05
H1-06

These six parameters select the input signal
functions for terminals 3 thru 8, and can be
independently set.

Parameter settings are checked whenever
power is applied to the drive, or upon
exiting Program mode. A parameter set
value failure ( oPE3 ) will occur if any of
the following conditions are detected among
these six parameters:

2-Wire control 3-Wire control
24
24
14
14
3
0
4
3
6
4
8
6

GPD 515/G5

EXTERNAL
CONTACTS

3 H1-01

•

4 H1-02

•
•

6 H1-04

MULTI> FUNCTION
5 H1-03
INPUT

•

7 H1-05

•

8 H1-06
11
0V

(1)

Two or more of the parameters contain the same value (except for External
Fault, data " 2X ").

(2)

Two or three Speed Search functions (data " 61 ", " 62 ", or " 64 ") have
been selected.

(3)

Any Speed Search function (data " 61 ", " 62 ", or " 64 ") has been entered
into any parameter other than H 1 - 0 6 .

(4)

Both the Sample/Hold (data " A ") and Up/Down (data " 10 " & " 11 ")
functions have been selected.

(5)

The Up function (data " 10 ") and the Down function (data " 11 ") have
not both been selected.

(6)

The Trim Control Increase (Data "1C") AND Trim Control Decrease (Data "1D")
Functions have not both been selected.

Table 5-2 lists the possible data setting values for these parameters, with the function and
a brief description for each one.
For a few of the data settings, a more detailed description is given on the following pages;
for others, the description is given in other PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES paragraphs.

5-58

5.32

M U L T I - F U N C T I O N INPUT TERMINALS ( T e r m . 3 - 8 )
Table 5-2.

DATA
DATA

H1-01 thru H1-06

FUNCTION
FUNCTION

Continued

Data Settings

DESCRIPTION
Signal
Levels: 0 = state; 1 = pulse
DESCRIPTION

AVAILABILITY
(See Note 1)

0

1

2

3

0

Forward/Reverse selection
for 3-wire control

Redefines terminals to:
1 = Run; 2 = Stop; corresponding
terminal (3-8) = FWD/REV select

X

X

X

X

1

Local/Remote selection

Open = Operates according to setting of
b 1 - 0 1 and b 1 - 0 2
Closed = Operates from keys of the Digital
Operator
See Data description following this table

X

X

X

X

2

Option / drive reference
selection

Open = Operates from Digital Operator and or
external terminals
Closed = Operates from installed option

X

X

X

X

3

Multi-step reference
select 1

X

X

X

X

4

Multi-step reference
select 2

X

X

X

X

5

Multi-step reference
select 3

X

X

X

X

6

Jog frequency reference

Closed = Jog selected
See paragraph 5.24 & 5.25 B

X

X

X

X

7

Accel/decel time
selection 1

Open = Accel/decel by C 1 - 0 1 / C 1 - 0 2
Closed = Accel/decel by C 1 - 0 3 / C 1 - 0 4
See paragraph 5.2 B

X

X

X

X

8

External base block
(N.O. contact input)

Closed = Shuts off drive output
(speed reference is held)
See Data description following this table

X

X

X

X

9

External base block
(N.C. contact input)

Open = Shuts off drive output
(speed reference is held)
See Data description following this table

X

X

X

X

A

Accel/decel ramp hold
(speed hold command)

Closed = Hold
See paragraph 5.2 B

X

X

X

X

B

External overheat alarm
signal

Closed = " oH2 " blinks on the Digital Operator,
and operation continues (minor fault)

X

X

X

X

C

Multi-function analog input
selection

Open = Analog inputs (terms. 14 & 16) are
disabled
Closed = Analog inputs (terms. 14 & 16) are
enabled

X

X

X

X

D

Speed control disable

Open = Speed control enabled
Closed = Speed control disabled

—

X

—

X

E

ASR integral reset (IRST)

Closed = Integral reset
See paragraph 5.7 C

—

X

—

X

F

Terminal Not Used

Drive does not react to input

X

X

X

X

See paragraph 5.25 B

5-59

5.32

M U L T I - F U N C T I O N INPUT TERMINALS ( T e r m . 3 - 8 )
Table 5-2.

DATA
DATA

H1-01 thru H1-06

FUNCTION
FUNCTION

Continued

Data Settings - Continued

DESCRIPTION
Signal
Levels: 0 = state; 1 = pulse
DESCRIPTION

AVAILABILITY
(See Note 1)

0
See Data description following this table

1

2

3

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

10

Up function

11

Down function

12

Forward jog (Jog2)

13

Reverse jog (Jog2)

14

Fault Reset

Resets a fault, only if RUN command is
not present

X

X

X

X

15

Fast-Stop (N.O.)

Open = No Effect
Closed = Ramp to stop by Fast-Stop Decel
Time ( C 1 - 0 9 )

X

X

X

X

16

Motor 2 Select

Switches between two different sets of motor
parameters
Open = Use parameter A 1 - 0 2,
E 1 Parameter & E 2 Parameters.
Closed = Use parameter E 3 - 0 1, E 4
Parameters & E 5 Parameters.

X

X

X

X

17

Fast Stop (N.C.)

Closed = No Effect
Open = Ramp to stop by Fast-Stop Decel Time
( C 1 - 0 9)

X

X

X

X

18

Timer function
(ON or OFF delay)

See Data description following this table

X

X

X

X

19

PID control disable

Closed = PID control is disabled – setpoint
becomes frequency reference

X

X

X

X

1A

Accel/decel time
selection 2

Open = Accel/decel by C 1 - 0 1 t h r u C 1 - 0 4
Closed = Accel/decel by C 1 - 0 5 t h r u C 1 - 0 8
See paragraph 5.2 B

X

X

X

X

1B

Program lockout

Open = Programming from Digital Operator
is disabled
Closed = Programming from Digital Operator
is enabled

X

X

X

X

1C

Trim control increase

Closed = Increase analog frequency reference
by d 4 - 0 2 value
See Data description following this table

X

X

X

X

1D

Trim control decrease

Closed = Decrease analog frequency reference
by d 4 - 0 2 value
See Data description following this table

X

X

X

X

1E

Analog reference sample/
hold

Open = Hold frequency reference
Closed = Sample frequency reference
See Data description following this
table

X

X

X

X

1F

Frequency reference
selection

Open = Freq. ref. from term. 13
Closed = Freq. ref. from term. 14

X

X

X

X

See paragraph 5.24

5-60

5.32

M U L T I - F U N C T I O N INPUT TERMINALS ( T e r m . 3 - 8 )
Table 5-2.

DATA
DATA

H1-01 thru H1-06

FUNCTION
FUNCTION

20
thru
2F

Continued

Data Settings - Continued

DESCRIPTION
Signal
Levels:
DESCRIPTION 0 = state; 1 = pulse

AVAILABILITY
(See Note 1)

0

1

2

3

External fault

Second digit of setting is a hexadecimal value
which defines what type of external contact is
used and how the drive will react when the
signal input is active. S e e p a r a g r a p h 5 . 1 7

X

X

X

X

30

PID integral reset

Closed = Set calculated integral time
X
value to 0. S e e p a r a g r a p h 5 . 3 6 F

X

X

X

31

PID Integral Hold

Closed = Hold integrator at its present level
X
(PID Control). S e e p a r a g r a p h 5 . 3 6 F

X

X

X

60

DC injection braking
command

Closed = DC injection braking active
See paragraph 5.10 D

X

X

X

X

61

Speed Search 1

Closed * = Speed Search operation from
maximum frequency
See Data description following this table

X

—

X

—

62

Speed Search 2

Closed * = Speed Search operation from set
frequency
See Data description following this table

X

—

X

—

63

Energy saving operation

Closed = Energy saving
See paragraph 5.16

X

X

—

—

64

Speed Search 3

Closed * = Speed Search operation from
output frequency
See Data description following this table

X

—

X

—

65

Kinetic energy braking
ride-thru NC

Closed = KEB ride-thru is disabled

X

X

X

X

66

Kinetic energy braking
ride-thru NO

Closed = KEB ride-thru is enabled

X

X

X

X

71

Speed / torque control
selection

Open = Speed control operation
Closed = Torque control operation
See paragraph 5.43

—

—

—

X

72

Zero-Servo command

Open = Zero-Servo OFF
Closed = Zero-Servo ON
See paragraph 5.49 A

—

—

—

X

77

ASR gain selection

Closed = ASR proportional gain is set
according to C 5 - 0 3

—

—

—

X

NOTES:
*

All contact closures must be maintained, except for speed search (Data " 61 ",
" 62", & ' 64 "), which may be momentary (see paragraph 5.32 D).

1.

Column headings refer to set value of A 1 - 0 2 , Control Method;
1 = V/f w/PG, 2 = Open loop vector, 3 = Flux vector.

5-61

0 = V/f,

5.32
A.

M U L T I - F U N C T I O N INPUT TERMINALS ( T e r m . 3 - 8 )

Continued

Data 1 : Local/Remote

Set b 1 - 0 1 and b 1 - 0 2 to data " 1 " to select external inputs as the source for
frequency reference and operation commands. The use of a Local/Remote command input
allows switching between Digital Operator control and the external terminal input signals,
without the need to re-program b 1 - 0 1 and b 1 - 0 2 . If the status of the Local/Remote
command input is changed while the drive is running, the Local/Remote operation selection
is not completed until the next time the drive is stopped.
Closed = Controlled locally (Digital Operator)
Open = Controlled according to the setting of b 1 - 0 1 and b 1 - 0 2
NOTE
If manual speed is selected
– by the external Auto/Manual switch (3SS [2-wire] or 2SS [3-wire]),
– by jumper from terminal 5 to 11 (2-wire control),
o r – by jumper from terminal 6 to 11 (3-wire control),
the drive speed reference will be controlled by manual speed reference
regardless of the state of the Local/Remote input.

b 1 - 0 7 : Local / Remote Run Selection

Setting

Factory Setting: 0
Range: 0 to 1
Description

0

Cycle External Run

1

Accept External Run

When switching from local (digital operator) back into remote (terminals) and a remote
run command is present, parameter b 1 - 0 7 determines how the drive will react. With a
setting of "1", the drive will start running as soon as remote mode is selected. A setting
of " 0 " will require the run command to be removed and re-applied after the remote
mode is selected.

5-62

5.32
B.
•

MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT TERMINALS ( T e r m . 3 - 8 )

Continued

Data 8 : External Base Block by N.O. Contact
When either the Forward Run command or
Reverse Run command is present, and the
external Base Block command is applied
(i.e. contact closed), coast stop is accomplished (after a 20 msec delay), while the
frequency command is maintained.
When the Base Block command is removed,
the drive will recover in a manner similar
to that of Speed Search operation, except that
it searches up from 0 Hz, and supersedes a
Speed Search command.

EXTERNAL
BASE BLOCK

o o

GPD 515/G5
8

11
0V

•

When both the Forward Run command and
Reverse Run command are open, and the
external Base Block command is applied (i.e. contact closed), coast stop is accomplished and after a 20 msec delay the frequency command is changed to 0Hz.
When the Base Block command is removed, the drive will remain in stopped
condition until Forward Run command or Reverse Run command is again applied.

•

When external Base Block command is active, a blinking " BB " will be displayed
on the Digital Operator.

RUN

RUN

Freq. Cmd

Freq. Cmd
0

0

Base Block

Base Block

V out

V out

0
20msec

0
20msec
t = L2-04 setting

(A) Base Block With Run Active

C.

(B) Base Block After Stop Com

Data 9 : External Base Block by N.C. Contact

Base block operation is the same as described above, except that the Base Block contact
must be open to be recognized.

5-63

5.32
D.

M U L T I - F U N C T I O N INPUT TERMINALS ( T e r m . 3 - 8 )

Continued

Data 6 1 : Speed Search From Max Frequency
Data 6 2 : Speed Search From Set Frequency
Data 6 4 : Speed Search From Output Frequency

A multi-function input terminal is utilized to activate speed search. When the external
speed search command is closed, the base is blocked for the min. base block time,
L 2 - 0 3 , then the speed search is made. The operation depends on the set value.
IMPORTANT
Set values 6 1, 6 2 & 6 4 CANNOT be selected in combination.
• When 6 1 is set, the speed search begins with the maximum frequency.
• When 6 2 is set, the speed search begins with the frequency command
that has been set after the search command was received.
• When 6 4 is set, the speed search begins with the last output frequency
before the speed search command was received.

RUN
SIGNAL

WITHIN 0.5 SEC

SPEED SEARCH

SPEED COINCIDENCE
POINT

MAX FREQ., FREQ.
REF., OR OUTPUT
FREQ. WHEN SPEED
SEARCH IS INPUTTED
OUTPUT FREQUENCY

VOLTAGE AT
SPEED SEARCH

MIN.
BASE
BLOCK
TIME
( L2-03 )

SPEED SEARCH
OPERATION

NORMAL V/f
OUTPUT
( E1=03 )

OUTPUT VOLTAGE

NOTE: When momentary power loss ride-thru function is selected ( L2-01 = 1 or 2),
the Speed Search command must be enabled.

Speed Search Operation Timing

5-64

5.32

MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT TERMINALS ( T e r m . 3 - 8 )
b 3 - 0 1 : Speed
Search
Selection

Continued

Factory setting: 0 = Disabled (when V/f control or Open
Loop Vector control has been selected)
1 = Enabled (when V/f w/PG control or
Flux Vector control has been selected)
Range: 0 or 1

b 3 - 0 2 : Speed Search Deactivation Current
Level

Factory setting: 1 5 0

b 3 - 0 3 : Speed Search Deceleration Time

Factory setting: 2 . 0

Range: 0 to 200 %

Range: 0.0 to 10.0 sec.
After power recovery, if the drive output current is larger than the set value of
b 3 - 0 2 , speed search is started, using a decel rate per the setting of b 3 - 0 3 . When
drive output current is lower than the set value of b 3 - 0 2 , speed search is complete and
acceleration or deceleration is continued at the normal rate ( C 1 - X X ) to set frequency.
L 2 - 0 3 : Minimum Baseblock Time

Factory setting: See Table A3-1
Range: 0.1 to 5.0 sec.

When a momentary power loss is detected, the drive output transistors are disabled for a
period of time determined by the setting of L 2 - 0 3 . The L 2 - 0 3 setting should represent
the time required for the motor residual voltage to go to zero.
When the momentary power loss time exceeds the minimum base block time, the speed
search operation is started immediately after power recovery.

WHEN MIN. BASEBLOCK TIME IS LONGER THAN MOMENTARY POWER LOSS TIME
MOMENTARY POWER
LOSS TIME

MIN.
BASEBLOCK TIME

DRIVE
BASEBLOCK TIME
WHEN MIN. BASEBLOCK TIME IS SHORTER THAN MOMENTARY POWER LOSS TIME
MOMENTARY POWER
LOSS TIME

MIN.
BASEBLOCK TIME

DRIVE
BASEBLOCK TIME

5-65

5.32
E.

M U L T I - F U N C T I O N INPUT TERMINALS ( T e r m . 3 - 8 )

Continued

Data 18 : Timer Input Function
H 2 - 0 1 : Multi-function Output Terminals (9 & 10)
H 2 - 0 2 : Multi-function Output Terminals (25 & 27)
H 2 - 0 3 : Multi-function Output Terminals (26 & 27)

Data 1 2 : Timer Function

b4-01

: On-delay Timer

Factory setting: 0 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 300.0 sec.

b4-02

: Off-delay Timer

Factory setting: 0 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 300.0 sec.

When the timer function input is “closed” for longer than On-delay Timer ( b 4 - 0 1 ), the
timer function output closes.
When the timer input is “open” for longer than Off-delay Timer ( b 4 - 0 2 ), the timer function
output opens.
Multi-function Contact
Input: Timer Function

ON

Multi-function Contact
Output: Timer Function

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON
b4-01

ON ON

ON

ON
b4-02

b4-01

b4-02

As can be seen, the timer function must be programmed as both a multi-function input a n d
an output to be effective.
F.

Data 1E : Sample/Hold Command

This function applies only to an analog voltage or current input used as a frequency
reference at terminals 13 or 14.
If the Sample/Hold command is present (contact is closed) for more than 0.1 sec., the
frequency reference will follow (sample) the analog signal, e.g. if 5V corresponds to 50%
frequency, a 5V analog signal will produce 50% frequency reference if the Sample/Hold
command is present.
If the Sample/Hold command is removed (contact is opened) while the Drive is still in Run
condition, the frequency reference is held at the level it was at the time the Sample/Hold
command was removed, e.g. the frequency reference would remain at 50%, even though
the analog signal increased to 8V.

5-66

5.32

M U L T I - F U N C T I O N INPUT TERMINALS ( T e r m . 3 - 8 )

Continued

100%

10V
8V

80%
ANALOG INPUT

FREQ. REF.
50%

5V
0.1
sec.

SAMPLE/
HOLD CMD Open

0.1
sec.
Closed

t1
0.11
sec.

t2
0.05
sec.

t3
0.15
sec.

Sample/Hold Function Timing

G.

Data 1 0 : Up Function
Data 1 1 : Down Function
d 4 - 0 1 : Frequency Reference Hold
Function Selection

Factory setting: 0
Data: 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled

Programming data " 10 " and " 11 " for two of the six multi-function input terminals allows
those inputs to be used for Up/Down frequency setting by simulating the action of a MOP
(motor operated potentiometer).
NOTES:
1. Set parameter b 1 - 0 2 = 1.
2. OPE3 fault will occur if " 10 " and " 11 " data settings are not used together.
3. OPE3 fault will occur if " 10 " and " 11 " data settings are programmed at the
same time as setting " A " (Accel/decel ramp hold).
4. Jog has priority over Up/Down function.
5. Up/Down has priority over Multi-step Speed inputs.
6. Up/Down is ineffective when operation is from the Digital Operator.
(NOTES continued on next page)

5-67

5.32
G.

MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT TERMINALS ( T e r m . 3 - 8 )

Continued

(Continued)

NOTES (Continued):
7. Upper limit speed is set by the formula:
E 1 - 0 4 (Fmax) x d 2 - 0 1 (Freq. Ref. Upper Limit)
8. Lower limit speed is either the reference from external terminals 13 or 14,
or from d 2 - 0 1 , Frequency Reference Lower Limit.
9. If d 4 - 0 1 = " 0 ", Frequency Reference will be reset to 0 Hz if the stop
command is given, or if input power is removed and reapplied.
10. If d 4 - 0 1 = " 1 ", the drive will retain the last valid Frequency Reference
if a stop command is given or if input power is removed, and will accelerate
to that reference upon reapplication of a run command.

GPD 515/G5
UP

EXAMPLE:

o

H 1 - 0 5 Data 1 0 : Up function
H 1 - 0 6 Data 1 1 : Down function

o

7

DOWN
o
o

8

UP

DOWN

11
0V

INPUT SIGNAL
UP
DOWN
Open
Open
Closed
Open
Open

Closed

Closed

Closed

FUNCTION
HOLD
UP (Frequency command approaches frequency
command upper limit)
DOWN (Frequency command approaches minimum
output frequency or frequency command lower limit,
whichever is larger)
HOLD

5-68

5.32

M U L T I - F U N C T I O N INPUT TERMINALS ( T e r m . 3 - 8 )

Continued

FWD RUN
UP
COMMAND
DOWN
COMMAND

UPPER
LIMIT SPEED

LOWER
LIMIT SPEED
OUTPUT
FREQUENCY*
D1 H U
"SPEED AT SET
FREQUENCY"
MULTI-FUNCTION
OUTPUT SIGNAL

H

D

H

U

H

D

D1 H

U1 H

U

D

D1

H

* U = UP (Accel) status; D = DOWN (Decel) status; H = HOLD (constant speed) status;
U1 = At Upper Limit Speed; D1 = At Lower Limit Speed

Up/Down Frequency Setting Timing

H.

Data 1 C : Trim Control Increase
Data 1 D : Trim Control Decrease
d 4 - 0 2 : Trim Control Level

Factory setting: 1 0
Range: 0 to 100 %

The value of d 4 - 0 2 is a percentage of the maximum output frequency ( E 1 - 0 4 ) .
When the trim control increase input is closed, the value of d 4 - 0 2 gets added to the
analog frequency reference.
When the trim control decrease input is closed, the value of d 4 - 0 2 gets subtracted
from the analog frequency reference.

5-69

5.33

MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT T E R M I N A L S ( T e r m . 9 & 1 0 ; 2 5 - 2 7 )

H 2 - 0 1 : Contact Output (external
terminals 9 & 10)
H 2 - 0 2 : Open Collector Output
(external terminals 25 & 27)
H 2 - 0 3 : Open Collector Output
(external terminals 26 & 27)

GPD 515/G5
o o

9
10

MULTI-FUNCTION
CONTACT OUTPUT
250Vac 1A OR LESS
30Vdc 1A OR LESS
(FACTORY SETTING
IS FOR SIGNAL
DURING OPERATION)

25

A contact, or two different open collector
outputs, can be programmed to change states
during any of the conditions indicated in Table
5-3.

26
27

MULTIFUNCTION
OPEN
COLLECTOR
OUTPUTS
48Vdc AT
50mA MAX.

IMPORTANT
If an open collector output is applied to a DC relay, the relay MUST be diode
protected, as shown in the recommended configuration below.

Recommended
Configuration for
DC Relays

48Vdc MAX. *

25

•

DIODE
26

27
C

5-70

▲*

* DC
RELAY

* Customer
supplied

5.33

Continued

MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT T E R M I N A L S ( T e r m . 9 & 1 0 ; 2 5 - 2 7 )
Table 5-3.

DATA
DATA

H2-01 thru H2-03

FUNCTION
CONDITION

Data Settings

DESCRIPTION
Signal
Levels:
SIGNAL
LEVEL0 = state; 1 = pulse

AVAILABILITY
(See Note 1)

0, 1

2

3

0

During Operation

Closed = Drive is operating

X

X

X

1

Zero speed

Closed = Drive is at 0Hz

X

X

X

2

Speed at set frequency 1

Closed = Freq. Ref. – L 4 - 0 2 ≤ output
freq ≤ Freq. Ref. + L 4 - 0 2
See Data description following this table

X

X

X

3

Speed coincidence 1

Closed = Speed at set frequency and
L 4 - 0 1 – L 4 - 0 2 ≤ output
freq. ≤ L 4 - 0 1 + L 4 - 0 2
See Data description following this table

X

X

X

4

Frequency detection 1 – low

Closed = Output frequency ≤ L 4 - 0 1
See Data description following this table

X

X

X

5

Frequency detection 1 – high

Closed = Output frequency ≥ L 4 - 0 1
See Data description following this table

X

X

X

6

Operation ready

Closed = Drive is ready for operation

X

X

X

7

During undervoltage detection

Closed = Undervoltage detected

X

X

X

8

During base block

Closed = Drive output base block is
active; motor is coasting

X

X

X

9

Frequency reference mode

Open = Command by external input
Closed = Command by Digital Operator

X

X

X

A

Run reference mode

Open = Run by external input
Closed = Run by Digital Operator

X

X

X

B

Overtorque detection 1

Closed = Overtorque detected

X

X

X

C

Frequency reference missing

Closed = Frequency reference is missing

X

X

X

D

Braking resistor fault

Closed = Braking resistor is overheating or
has faulted

X

X

X

E

Fault

Closed = Drive fault has occurred
(except C P F 0 0 , C P F 0 1 )

X

X

X

F

Not Used

10

Alarm (minor fault)

Closed = Alarm condition is present

X

X

X

11

During fault reset

Closed = Drive is performing fault reset

X

X

X

12

Timer output function

See paragraph 5.32 E

X

X

X

5-71

5.33

Table 5-3.
DATA
DATA

Continued

MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT T E R M I N A L S ( T e r m . 9 & 1 0 ; 2 5 - 2 7 )
H2-01 thru H2-03

FUNCTION
CONDITION

Data Settings - Continued

DESCRIPTION
Signal
Levels:
SIGNAL
LEVEL0 = state; 1 = pulse

AVAILABILITY
(See Note 1)

0, 1

2

3

13

Speed at set frequency 2

Closed = Freq. Ref. – L 4 - 0 4 ≤ output
freq ≤ Freq. Ref. + L 4 - 0 4
See Data description following this table

X

X

X

14

Speed coincidence 2

Closed = Speed at set frequency and
L 4 - 0 3 – L 4 - 0 4 ≤ output
freq. ≤ L 4 - 0 3 + L 4 - 0 4
See Data description following this table

X

X

X

15

Frequency detection 2 – low

Open = Output freq. ≥ L 4 - 0 3 + L 4 - 0 4
Closed = Output frequency ≤ L 4 - 0 3
See Data description following this table

X

X

X

16

Frequency detection 2 – high

Open = Output freq. ≤ L 4 - 0 3 + L 4 - 0 4
Closed = Output frequency > L 4 - 0 3
See Data description following this table

X

X

X

17

Overtorque detection 1
(N.C.)

Open = Overtorque 1 detected according to
settings of L 6 - 0 1 t h r u L 6 - 0 3

X

X

X

18

Overtorque detection 2
(N.O.)

Closed = Overtorque 2 detected according to
settings of L 6 - 0 4 t h r u L 6 - 0 6

X

X

X

19

Overtorque detection 2
(N.C.)

Open = Overtorque 2 detected according to
settings of L 6 - 0 4 t h r u L 6 - 0 6

X

X

X

1A

During reverse run

Closed = Drive operation in reverse

X

X

X

1B

During base block 2

Open = Drive output base block is active;
motor is coasting

X

X

X

1C

Motor 2 Selected

Closed = Motor 2 is selected

X

X

X

1D

Regenerating

Closed = Regenerating mode [ only when A 1 0 2 is set for Flux Vector Control ]

—

—

X

1E

During restart

Closed = Retry operation after a fault

X

X

X

1F

OL1 pre-alarm

Closed = Thermal overload level exceeds
90% of fault detection level

X

X

X

20

OH pre-alarm

Closed = Cooling fin temperature exceeds
L 8 - 0 2 level

X

X

X

21 – 2F

Not Used

30

During torque limit

Closed = Torque limit

—

X

X

31

During speed limit

Closed = Speed limit reached [ only when A 1 0 2 is set for Flux Vector Control ]

—

—

X

5-72

5.33

Continued

MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT T E R M I N A L S ( T e r m . 9 & 1 0 ; 2 5 - 2 7 )
Table 5-3.

DATA
DATA

H2-01 thru H2-03

Data Settings - Continued

DESCRIPTION
Signal
Levels:
SIGNAL
LEVEL0 = state; 1 = pulse

FUNCTION
CONDITION

AVAILABILITY
(See Note 1)

0, 1
32

Not Used

33

Zero-Servo complete

34 – 36
37

3

Closed = Zero-Servo is complete
See paragraph 5.49 C

—

—

X

Closed = Drive is operating (except during
base block or injection braking)

X

X

X

Not Used
During operation

38 – 3F

2

Not Used

NOTES:
1.

A.

Column headings refer to set value of A 1 - 0 2 , Control Method;
1 = V/f w/PG, 2 = Open loop vector, 3 = Flux vector.

0 = V/f,

Data 2 – 5 , 1 3 – 1 6 : Frequency or Speed Detection Output Signals
L 4 - 0 1 : Speed Coincidence Detection Level

Factory setting: 0 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 400.0 Hz

L 4 - 0 2 : Speed Coincidence Detection Width

Factory setting: 2 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 20.0 Hz

L 4 - 0 3 : Speed Coincidence Detection
Level (+/–)

Factory setting: 0 . 0
Range: –400.0 to +400.0 Hz

L 4 - 0 4 : Speed Coincidence Detection
Width (+/–)

Factory setting: 2 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 20.0 Hz

These speed coincidence parameters are used to control contact output at terminals 9 &
10, or one of the open collector outputs at terminals 25 & 26 (with respect to terminal
27), when selected by H 1 - 0 1 thru H 1 - 0 3 . Both L 4 - 0 1 and L 4 - 0 2 are insensitive to
motor direction.
The output contact will close, or the open collector output will go low, when the
acceleration or deceleration is completed, or output frequency or speed is within the
detection width for the selected output function. See the timing diagrams on the following
pages.

5-73

5.33

MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT T E R M I N A L S ( T e r m . 9 & 1 0 ; 2 5 - 2 7 )
Frequency detection 1 – low
H2-01 = 4

L4-01 = 30 Hz

L4-02 = 5 Hz
: Output Freq. or
Motor Speed

35 Hz
L4-01 = 30 Hz

L4-02

L4-01 = 30 Hz
35 Hz

L4-02

Contact
Closure

Frequency detection 1 – high
H2-01 = 5

L4-01 = 30 Hz

L4-02 = 5 Hz
: Output Freq. or
Motor Speed

L4-01 = 30 Hz
25 Hz

L4-02

25 Hz
L4-01 = 30 Hz

L4-02

Contact
Closure

Frequency detection 2 – low
H2-01 = 15

L4-03 = 30 Hz

L4-04 = 5 Hz
: Output Freq. or
Motor Speed

35 Hz
L4-03 = 30 Hz

L4-04

Contact
Closure

5-74

Continued

5.33

MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT T E R M I N A L S ( T e r m . 9 & 1 0 ; 2 5 - 2 7 )
Frequency detection 2 – high
H2-01 = 16

L4-03 = 30 Hz

L4-04 = 5 Hz
: Output Freq. or
Motor Speed

L4-03 = 30 Hz
25 Hz

L4-04

Contact
Closure

Speed at set frequency 1
H2-01 = 2

L4-02 = 10 Hz

60 Hz
50 Hz

: Speed Reference
: Output Freq. or
Motor Speed

50 Hz
60 Hz
Contact
Closure

Speed at set frequency 2
H2-01 = 13

L4-04 = 10 Hz

60 Hz
50 Hz

: Speed Reference
: Output Freq. or
Motor Speed

50 Hz
60 Hz
Contact
Closure

5-75

Continued

5.33

MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT T E R M I N A L S ( T e r m . 9 & 1 0 ; 2 5 - 2 7 )
Speed coincidence 1
H2-01 = 3

L4-01 = 30 Hz

L4-02 = 5 Hz
: Output Freq. or
Motor Speed

35 Hz
L4-01 = 30 Hz
25 Hz

L4-02

25 Hz
L4-01 = 30 Hz
35 Hz

L4-02

Contact
Closure

Speed coincidence 2
H2-01 = 14

L4-03 = 30 Hz

L4-04 = 5 Hz
: Output Freq. or
Motor Speed

35 Hz
L4-03 = 30 Hz
25 Hz

L4-04

Contact
Closure

5-76

Continued

5.34

P H A S E LOSS DETECTION, INPUT
L 8 - 0 5 : Input Phase Loss Detection Selection

Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1

The input phase loss detection circuit monitors the DC bus current ripple and activates
when one of the input phases is lost. This causes a " PF " fault to occur and the motor to
coast to a stop.

5.35

Setting

Description

0

Input phase loss detection disabled

1

Input phase loss detection enabled

P H A S E LOSS DETECTION, OUTPUT

L 8 - 0 7 : Output Phase Loss Detection Selection

Factory setting: 1
Range: 0 or 1

The output phase loss detection circuit monitors the DCCT's and activates when one of the
output phases is lost. This causes a " LF " fault to occur and the motor to coast to a stop.

Setting

Description

0

Output phase loss detection disabled

1

Output phase loss detection enabled

5-77

5.36

PID CONTROL

The Proportional, Integral and Derivative control function provides closed-loop control, or
regulation, of a system process variable (pressure, temperature, etc.). This regulation is
accomplished by comparing a feedback signal to a setpoint reference, which results in an
error signal. The PID control algorithm then performs calculations, based upon the PID
parameter settings ( b 5 - 0 1 thru b 5 - 1 4 ), on this error signal. The result of the PID
algorithm is then used as the new frequency reference, or is added to the existing speed
reference.

A.

b 5 - 0 1 : PID Selection

Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 to 4

Using this parameter, PID control can be enabled, and the type of PID control can be
selected.
Setting
0
1
2
3
4

Description
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID

Disabled
Enabled (D = Feedback)
Enabled (D = Feed forward)
Enabled, Reference + PID (D = Feedback)
Enabled, Reference + PID (D = Feedback forward)

5-78

5.36
B.

PID CONTROL

Continued

Setpoint Reference Selection
b 1 - 0 1 : Reference Selection

Factory setting: 1
Range: 0 to 4

d 1 - 0 1 thru d 1 - 0 9 : Multi-step Frequency
Presets

Factory settings: d 1 - 0 9 = 6 . 0
all others = 0 . 0
Range (each): 0.0 to 400.0 Hz

H 3 - 0 1 : Auto Speed Reference Signal
Level Selection (Term. 13)

Factory setting: 0

H 3 - 0 4 : Multi-Function Analog Input 1
Level Selection (Term. 16)

Factory setting: 0

H 3 - 0 5 : Multi-Function Analog Input 1
Selection (Term. 16)

Factory setting: 0

H 3 - 0 8 : Multi-Function Analog Input 2
Level Selection (Term. 14)

Factory setting: 2

H 3 - 0 9 : Multi-Function Analog Input 2
Selection (Term. 14)

Factory setting: 1 F

Range: 0 or 1

Range: 0 or 1

Range: 0 to 1F

Range: 0 to 2

Range: 0 to 1F

The PID setpoint can come from the frequency reference (terminal 13 for 0 – 10 VDC or the
multi-step speed parameters d 1 - 0 1 thru d 1 - 0 9) or a Multi-Function Analog Input.
PID Setpoint examples:
• External Terminal 13: Set b 1 - 0 1 to data " 1 " or
• Multi-step speed parameters: Set b 1 - 0 1 to data " 0 " (See Multi-step
Speed Setting, paragraph 5.25B) or
• External Terminal 16: Set H 3 - 0 5 to data " C " or
• External Terminal 14: Set H 3 - 0 9 to data " C "
C.

Feedback Signal Selection
H 3 - 0 5 : Multi-function Analog Input 1
Selection (Term. 16)
H 3 - 0 9 : Multi-function Analog Input 2
Selection (Term. 14)

Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 to 1F
Factory setting: 1 F
Range: 0 to 1F

Select the PID control Feedback Signal from external terminal 14 for a current signal
(4-20mA DC) or from terminal 16 for a voltage (0-10 VDC or –10 to +10 VDC).
PID Feedback examples:
• Current signal (4-20mA): Set H 3 - 0 9 to data " B " and H 3 - 0 8 to data " 2 ".
• Voltage signal (0-10 VDC): Set H 3 - 0 5 to data " B " and H 3 - 0 4 to data " 0 ".
• Voltage signal (–10 to 10 VDC): Set H 3 - 0 5 to data " B " and H 3 - 0 4 t o
data " 1 ".

5-79

5.36
D.

PID CONTROL

Continued

PID S e t t i n g s
b 5 - 0 2 : Proportional Gain

Factory setting: 1 . 0 0
Range: 0.00 to 10.00

Proportional gain is the value by which the error signal is multiplied to generate a new
PID controller output. A higher setting will result in a more responsive system. A lower
setting will result in a more stable system.
b 5 - 0 3 : Integral Time

Factory setting: 1 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 360.0 seconds

This parameter determines how fast the PID controller will seek to eliminate any
steady-state error. The smaller the setting, the faster the error will be eliminated. To
eliminate the integral function entirely, set this parameter to 0.0 seconds. A lower
setting will result in a more responsive system. A higher setting will result in a more
stable system.
b 5 - 0 4 : Integral Value Limit( 1 )

Factory setting: 1 0 0 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 100.0 %

This parameter will limit the effect that the integrator can have. It works whether the
PID controller output is positive or negative. It can also be used to prevent integrator
“wind-up.”
b 5 - 0 5 : Derivative Time

Factory setting: 0 . 0 0
Range: 0.0 to 10.00 seconds

This parameter can be adjusted to increase system response to fast load or reference
changes, and to reduce overshoot upon startup. To eliminate the differential function
entirely, set this parameter to 0.00 seconds.
b 5 - 0 6 : PID Output Limit( 1 )

Factory setting: 1 0 0 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 100.0 %

Parameter b 5 - 0 6 can be used to set the maximum effect the PID controller will have
on the system. It also will limit the PID output when it is either positive or negative.
NOTE: When the PID output limit is reached, the integrator will hold and not change in
value until the PID output is less than the PID output limit.
b 5 - 0 7 : PID Offset Adjustment( 1 )

Factory setting: 0 . 0
Range: -100.0 to 100.0 %

This parameter will add a fixed percentage to the PID output. It can be used to tune
out small system offsets. NOTE: This parameter is set as a percentage of maximum
output frequency (E 1 - 0 4) .
(1)

These parameters are factory set for optimum results for most applications,
and generally do not need to be changed.

5-80

5.36

PID CONTROL

Continued

b 5 - 0 8 : Output Lag Filter Time( 1 )

Factory setting: 0 . 0 0
Range: 0.00 to 10.00 seconds

This parameter adds a filter to the PID output to keep it from changing too quickly.
The higher the setting, the slower the PID output will change.
b 5 - 0 9 : PID Output Selection

Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1

Setting
0
(Not Inverted)
1
(Inverted)

Description
The output of the PID controller will decrease when there is an
increase in feedback level.
The output of the PID controller will increase when there is an
increase in the feedback level.

b 5 - 1 0 : PID Output Selection( 1 )

Factory setting: 1 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 25.0

This parameter is a multiplier in the output of the PID controller. Increasing this parameter
will make the PID controller more responsive. Be careful not to increase this parameter too
much or the drive/system will become unstable.
b 5 - 1 1 : PID Output Reverse Selection

Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1

Setting
0
1

Description
If the PID controller calls for a “negative” speed (reverse), the
drive/motor will stop.
If the PID controller calls for a “negative” speed (reverse), the
drive/motor will run in reverse.

All of these parameters are interactive, and will need to be adjusted until the control loop is
properly tuned, i.e. stable with minimal steady-state error. A general procedure for tuning
these parameters is as follows:
1.

Adjust Proportional Gain until continuous oscillations in the Controlled
Variable are at a minimum.

2.

The addition of Integral Time will cause the steady-state error to approach
zero. The time should be adjusted so that this minimal error is attained as
fast as possible, without making the system oscillate.

3.

If necessary, adjust derivative time to reduce overshoot during startup.
The drive’s accel and decel rate times can also be used for this purpose.
(1)

These parameters are factory set for optimum results for most applications,
and generally don’t need to be changed.

5-81

5.36

PID CONTROL
Continued

E.

Feedback Loss Detection

Factory setting: 0

b 5 - 1 2 : Feedback Loss Detection Selection

Range: 0 to 2

Setting
0
1
2

Description
Feedback loss detection is disabled
Feedback loss detection is enabled - alarm only
(drive continues running).
Feedback loss detection is enabled - fault (drive coasts to stop)

b 5 - 1 3 : Feedback Loss Detection Level (PID)

Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 to 100 %

b 5 - 1 4 : Feedback Loss Detection
Delay Time (PID)

Factory setting: 1 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 25.5

When feedback loss detection is enabled (b 5 - 1 2 = data “1” or “2”), the drive will detect if
the feedback signal falls below the b 5 - 1 3 level for more than the b 5 - 1 4 delay time and
respond according to the setting of b 5 - 1 2.

F.

Multi-Function Input Terminals
H 1 - 0 1 t h r u H 1 - 0 6 : Multi-function Inputs
(Term. 3 thru 8)

Data 3 0 : PID Integral Reset

By programming data “30” into one of the multi-function parameters (H 1 - 0 1 thru H 1 0 6), the corresponding multi-function input terminal (3 thru 8) will reset the integrator’s
value to zero.
H 1 - 0 1 t h r u H 1 - 0 6 : Multi-function Inputs
(Term. 3 thru 8)

Data 3 1 : PID Integral Hold

By programming data “31” into one of the multi-function parameters (H 1 - 0 1 thru H 1 0 6), the corresponding multi-function input terminal (3 thru 8) will hold the integrator’s
output value. When the contact is closed (on the Multi-Function Input Terminal), whatever
value the integrator is outputting will remain the same until the contact is opened.

5-82

5.37

R E S E T CODES: 2-WIRE, 3-WIRE INITIALIZATION
A 1 - 0 3 : Parameter Selection /
Initialization

Factory setting: 0
Data:

0 = No Initialization
1 1 1 0 = User Default Parameter
Initialization
2 2 2 0 = 2-Wire Control Initialization
3 3 3 0 = 3-Wire Control Initialization

By entering either " 2220 " or " 3330 " into this parameter, a reset to factory
configuration (parameter initialization) is accomplished. The parameters which are NOT
affected are:
A 1 - 0 0 : Language Selection
A 1 - 0 2 : Control Method
Selection

Factory Configuration for
2-Wire Control
3-Wire Control

Parameter Terminal
H1-01
H1-02
H1-03
H1-04
H1-05
H1-06

3
4
5
6
7
8

E 1 - 0 3 : V/f Pattern Selection
o 2 - 0 4 : GPD 515 Capacity

" 24 "
" 14 "
" 3 "
" 4 "
" 6 "
"8 "

=
=
=
=
=
=

External Fault
" 24 " = External Fault
Fault Reset
" 14 " = Fault Reset
Multi-step Ref. Select 1
" 0 " = FWD/REV Command
Multi-step Ref. Select 2
" 3 " = Multi-step Ref. Select 1
Jog Freq. Ref.
" 4 " = Multi-step Ref. Select 2
External Base Block
" 6 " = Jog Freq. Ref.
(N.O. contact)

CAUTION
Know your application before using either Initialization function of A1-03 . This
parameter must be set to " 0 " for Drive mode operation.
" 1110 " = User Default Parameter Initialization
" 2220 " = Factory 2-Wire Control Initialization (Maintained RUN Contact)
" 3330 " = Factory 3-Wire Control Initialization (Momentary START/STOP
Contact)
Entering either Initialization code resets all parameters to factory settings (except
for A1-00, A1-02, o2-04, & E1-03), and automatically returns A1-03 setting to " 0 "
(No Initialization). If the GPD 515 is connected for 3-Wire control and this parameter
is set to " 2220 " (2-Wire Control Initialization), the motor may run in reverse
direction WITHOUT A RUN COMMAND APPLIED. Equipment damage or personal
injury may result.

When o 2 - 0 3 = 1, the existing parameter settings become default user settings and the
" 1110 " initialization option appears in A 1 - 0 3 . When o 2 - 0 3 is not set to " 1 ", this
option is not available. Anytime the A 1 - 0 3 parameter is set to " 1110 ", all parameter
settings that have been changed return to the default user settings (only 50 parameters
may be stored as default settings). This is NOT a Factory Initialization.

5-83

5.38

S L I P COMPENSATION
C 3 - 0 1 : Slip Compensation Gain

Factory setting: 0 . 0 *
Range: 0.0 to 2.5
* Note: Factory setting changes to
" 1 . 0 " for Flux Vector and Open
Loop Vector control methods.

C 3 - 0 2 : Slip Compensation Primary Delay
Time

Factory setting: 2 0 0 0 *
Range: 0 to 10000 ms
* Note: Factory setting changes to
" 2 0 0 " for Flux Vector and Open
Loop Vector control methods.

C 3 - 0 3 : Slip Compensation Limit

Factory setting: 2 0 0
Range: 0 to 250 %

C 3 - 0 4 : Slip Compensation Selection
During Regeneration

Factory setting: 0
Data: 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled

C 3 - 0 5 : Flux Select

Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1

Setting

Description

0

Slip Included - Flux is calculated after slip compensation is applied.

1

Slip Excluded - Flux is calculated after slip compensation is applied.

This parameter is only available in the open loop vector control method (A 1 - 0 2 = 2).
When C 3 - 0 5 is set to 0, the motor will enter the constant horsepower range when motor
speed exceeds motor rated synchronous speed. When C 3 - 0 5 = 1, the motor will enter the
constant horsepower range when output frequency is equal to the motor rated frequency.
C 3 - 0 6 : Output Voltage Limit

Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1

Setting

Description

0

Disabled - Output voltage limit and slip compensation are disabled
above base speed.

1

Enabled - Output voltage limit and slip compensation are enabled
above base speed.

When the control method is set to open loop vector (A 1 - 0 2 = 2), this parameter enables
and disables slip compensation when operating in the constant horsepower region (output
frequency is equal to or greater than motor rated frequency). In order to achieve proper
slip compensation, output voltage is reduced slightly starting at 90% of motor rated
frequency.
When the control method is set to flux vector (A 1 - 0 2 = 3), a C 3 - 0 6 setting of “1” will
improve torque linearity at and above base speed.

5-84

5.38

S L I P COMPENSATION

Continued

C 3 - 0 1 Slip Compensation is used to increase motor speed to account for slip; this is
accomplished by boosting output frequency, with a corresponding boost in output voltage.
Sets the slip compensation gain, in increments of 0.1%. When the gain is " 1.0 ", the
output frequency is increased by 1% of the E 1 - 0 6 setting at rated current. A setting of
" 0.0 " results in no slip compensation. C 3 - 0 2 & C 3 - 0 3 affect this gain as shown in the
block diagram. C 3 - 0 4 determines whether the slip compensation gain will be enabled or
disabled during regeneration.
SOFT STARTER

d2-01
+

Fref

+

d2-02

400 Hz

CURRENT
DETECTOR

INTERNAL
FREQUENCY
REFERENCE

SFS

Limit
E1-04 x C3-03
E1-06

C3-01

+

Delay
C3-02

K

C3-03

–

E1-06

20%

E1-04

Output Frequency
NOTE: When Fref is less than E1-09 setting, this function is disabled.

Slip Compensation Block Diagram

EXAMPLE
Desired frequency is 45 Hz
Motor slip = 2% at full load
C3-01 = 2 . 0
Actual output frequency at
full load = 45x1.02 = 45.90 Hz

45.90 Hz actual output
2% frequency
boost

45 Hz command

corresponding
voltage boost

V

f

5-85

5.39

A.

S T A L L PREVENTION

L 3 - 0 4 : Stall Prevention Selection During Decel
L3-04
Setting

Function

0

Stall prevention during deceleration disabled. An excessively short deceleration time will
generate an overvoltage fault (OV) and the drive will stop.

1

Stall prevention during deceleration enabled (General Purpose). The DC bus voltage level
is monitored, and the deceleration rate is automatically extended to prevent an
overvoltage condition. This deceleration rate may be longer than the set value (C1-02).

2

Stall prevention during deceleration enabled, auto adjust (Intelligent). By monitoring DC
bus voltage, the deceleration rate is automatically adjusted so that deceleration can be
completed in the shortest amount of time, regardless of the set deceleration time.

3

Stall prevention during deceleration enabled, with DB resistor. This setting lengthens
decel ramp time whenever the drive goes into current limit during a deceleration.
Intended to be used when dynamic braking is installed.
Note: Not available in the flux vector control method (A1-02 = 3).

Stall prevention during deceleration
automatically adjusts the deceleration rate
while monitoring the DC bus voltage to
prevent overvoltage during deceleration.

Controls the
deceleration
time needed to
prevent overvoltage fault.

FREQUENCY

SET
DECEL
TIME

When the motor load is large or decel time
is short, actual decel time may be longer
than the set value because of
stall prevention.
B.

Factory setting: 1

TIME

L 3 - 0 1 : Stall Prevention Selection During Accel

Factory setting: 1

Setting

Function

0
1
2

Stall prevention during acceleration disabled
Stall prevention during acceleration enabled
Stall prevention during acceleration enabled, auto adjust

5-86

5.39

S T A L L PREVENTION

Continued

Factory setting: 1 5 0
Range: 0 to 200 %

L 3 - 0 2 : Stall Prevention Level During Accel

This parameter determines the actual drive output current level during an acceleration
condition. Set in percent of drive rated output current (see Appendix 2). A setting of
" 200 " will disable stall prevention during acceleration.
During acceleration, if the output
current exceeds the value in L 3 - 0 2 ,
acceleration stops and frequency is
maintained. When the output current
goes below the value set in L 3 - 0 2 ,
acceleration resumes.

MOTOR
CURRENT
L3-02
setting

t
OUTPUT
FREQ.

In the constant horsepower region
[actual output frequency ≥ max.
voltage frequency ( E 1 - 0 6 )], the stall
prevention level during acceleration is
changed by the following formula:

t

Stall prevention level during = Stall prevention level during accel (CHP) x
accel (constant horsepower)
(L3-03)

C.

Max. voltage frequency
Actual output frequency

L 3 - 0 3 : Stall Prevention Limit During Accel (CHP)

Factory setting: 5 0
Range: 0 to 100 %

L 3 - 0 5 : Stall Prevention Selection During Running

Factory setting: 1

Setting
0
1
2

Function
Stall prevention during running disabled
Stall prevention during running enabled;
uses Decel time 1 ( C1-02 )
Stall prevention during running enabled;
uses Decel time 2 ( C1-04 )

L 3 - 0 6 : Stall Prevention Level During Running
This parameter determines the actual
drive output current level while operating
at set speed (frequency). Set in percent
of drive rated output current (see
Appendix 2). A setting of " 200 " will
disable stall prevention during running.

Factory setting: 1 6 0
Range: 30 to 200 %

MOTOR
CURRENT
L3-06
setting

t

During running at set speed, if the
output current exceeds the value set in
L 3 - 0 6 , the drive will begin to
decelerate. When the output current
goes below the value set in L 3 - 0 6 ,
acceleration begins, up to the set
frequency.

OUTPUT
FREQ.

t

5-87

5.40

S T O P P I N G METHOD
b 1 - 0 3 : Stopping Method Selection

Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 to 3

Selects the stopping method suitable for the application.
Setting
0
1
2
3

A.

Description
Deceleration (ramp) to stop
Coast to stop
Full range DC injection to stop
Coast to stop with timer

Data 0 : Deceleration to Stop

Upon removal of the FWD (REV) Run
command, the motor decelerates at
the deceleration rate determined by
the time set in Decel Time 1
( C 1 - 0 2 ), and DC injection braking
is applied immediately before stop.
If the decel time is too short or the
load inertia is too large, an
overvoltage ( O V ) fault may occur
on a stop command — the decel
time must be increased.

Output Frequency

Min. Output Frequency
(Frequency at DC Injection
Braking Start) ( b2-01 )
(Factory setting: 0.5 Hz)

Run Command

B.

Decel Time 1
( C1-02 )

ON

DC Injection Braking
Time at Stop ( b2-04 )
(Factory setting: 0.5 s)
OFF

Data 1 : Coast to Stop

Upon removal of the FWD (REV) Run command, the motor coasts to rest.

Output Frequency
Drive output is shut OFF
when stop command is input

Run Command

OFF

ON

5-88

5.40
C.

Continued

S T O P P I N G METHOD

Data 2 : Full-range DC Injection Stop

When a STOP command is issued, there is a 0.5 second time delay, before a DC injection
current is applied to two phases of the motor’s stator winding. The duration of DC braking
is a time period proportional to b 2 - 0 4 (at 10% output frequency) and the level of output
frequency at the time the STOP command is issued.
Braking torque is 50-70% of full load motor torque.
EXAMPLE
b 2 - 0 4 = 0.5 sec (at 10% output)
Braking time at Fmax (100% output frequency) =

100%
x 0.5 = 5 sec.
10%

STOP
b2-04 x 10
DC INJECTION
BRAKING
TIME
b2-04

RUN CMD

OUTPUT
FREQUENCY

0 10%
0.5 sec
COASTING

100%

OUTPUT FREQUENCY
AT TIME OF STOP COMMAND

DC BRAKING TIME

Full Range DC Injection Braking Stop Sequence
D.

Data 3 : Coast to Stop With Timer

When programmed for coast to stop with timer, a Run command is ignored if issued during
the time the motor would normally be decelerating ( C 1 - 0 2 ), or for the minimum base
block time ( L 2 - 0 3 ), whichever is longer.

Output Frequency
Decel Time 1
( C1-02 )

Accel Time 1
( C1-01 )

Coasting

Run Command

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Run Command ignored

5-89

5.41

T H E R M A L OVERLOAD PROTECTION
E 2 - 0 1 : Motor Rated Current

Factory setting: See Table A3-1
Range: 0.01 to 1500.0 A

This parameter should be set according to the rated current value shown on the motor
nameplate; this value must be within 10-120% percent of the drive rated current (refer to
Specifications in Appendices 2 & 3 of this manual).
L 1 - 0 1 : Motor Overload Protection Selection
Setting

Factory setting: 1

Electronic Thermal Characteristics

0

Electronic thermal overload protection disabled

1

Electronic thermal overload protection enabled

L 1 - 0 2 : Motor Overload Protection Time
Constant

Factory setting: 8 . 0
Range: 0.1 to 20.0 min.

This parameter sets the electronic thermal overload relay protection time. Actual overload
time can be calculated using the time from the overload characteristics curves then
multiplying that time by L 1 - 0 2 / 8 .
The drive protects against motor overload with a UL-recognized, built-in electronic thermal
overload relay.
The electronic thermal overload function monitors motor temperature, based on drive
output current and time, to protect the motor from overheating. When the electronic
thermal overload relay is enabled, an " O L 1 M o t o r O v e r l o a d e d " fault occurs, shutting
OFF the drive output and preventing excessive overheating of the motor.
When operating with one drive connected to only one motor, an external thermal relay is
not needed. When operating several motors with one drive, install a thermal overload relay
on each motor.

5-90

5.41

T H E R M A L OVERLOAD PROTECTION

Continued

E 1 - 0 2 : Motor Selection

Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 to 2

Setting

Electronic Thermal Characteristics

0

General-purpose motor (TEFC)

1

Blower cooled or totally enclosed non-ventilated (TEBC or TENV)

2

Vector Motor

This parameter sets whether a general-purpose or a blower-cooled motor is used. The
motor overload detection function operates differently, as shown, for each of these two
motor types.
Standard Fan Cooled Motor Overload Curve
L1-01 = 0 & L2-01 = 8.0 Minutes

40 Hz
0 Hz
60 Hz
10 Hz
20 Hz

5-91

5.41

T H E R M A L OVERLOAD PROTECTION

Continued

Standard Blower Cooled Motor Overload Curve
L1-01 = 1 & L1-02 = 8.0 Minutes

≥ 5.6 Hz
0 Hz

Vector Motor Overload Curve
L1-01 = 2 & L1-02 = 8.0 Minutes

All
Frequencies

NOTE: If a TEFC motor is going to be run at or near 100% of rated current at
frequencies below 30 Hz for an extended period of time, select the blower cooled
curve ( E 1 - 0 2 = 1).

5-92

5.42

T O R Q U E COMPENSATION
C 4 - 0 2 : Torque Compensation Time
Constant

Factory setting: See Table A3-2
Range: 0 to 10000 ms

This parameter adjusts a time delay for the torque compensation gain. Increase to add
torque stability, decrease to improve torque response.
C 4 - 0 1 : Torque Compensation Gain [ KT ]

Factory setting: 1 . 0 0
Range: 0.00 to 2.50

Sets the torque compensation, in increments
of 0.1. When the motor has the same
capacity as that of the drive, the gain is 1.0.
When a smaller motor is used, the gain should
be set to 1.5 (typical).

AUTO TORQUE BOOST
V/F PATTERN

345

230

PROGRAMMED V/F PATTERN
(NO LOAD)

115

14 V
0
0
1.5 HZ

30

60

OUTPUT FREQUENCY
( HZ )

Example of Torque Compensation
Operation

The calculation of compensated torque
uses the following formula:
Compensated Value ≈

OUTPUT VOLTAGE
( VAC )

This parameter, in conjunction with E 2 - 0 5
(Motor Line-to-Line Resistance) and E 2 - 0 7
& E 2 - 0 8 (Motor Iron Core Saturation
Coefficient 1 & 2), is used by the drive’s
automatic torque boost function to match the
drive’s output voltage boost to the motor
load. Except for the most demanding of high
starting torque applications, the factory
settings of these parameters will be
adequate. The factory settings are
programmed to match the performance
characteristics of typical AC motors.

460

( √ 3 • Vac • Iac • Cos Φ ) – WI – Rcable
x KT
Frequency

Where
* WI = E 2 - 0 7, E 2 - 0 8
Rcable = E 2 - 0 5
KT = C 4 - 0 1
Φ = Power Factor (calculated by the drive)
* Adjusted by Auto-tune feature.

5-93

5.42

T O R Q U E COMPENSATION

Continued

C 4 - 0 3 : Forward Torque Compensation At Start
(Open Loop Vector Only)

C 4 - 0 4 : Reverse Torque Compensation At Start
(Open Loop Vector Only)

C 4 - 0 5 : Torque Compensation At Start Time
Constant (Open Loop Vector Only)

Factory setting: 0 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 200.0 %
Factory setting: 0 . 0
Range: -200.0 to 0.0 %
Factory setting: 1 0
Range: 0 to 200 ms

Parameters C 4 - 0 3 thru C 4 - 0 5 help to improve the starting / breakaway torque response
when using the open loop vector control method (A 1 - 0 2 = 2). The amount of torque
applied at start when a forward run is commanded is set by parameter C 4 - 0 3. The amount
of torque applied at start when a reverse run is commanded is set by parameter C 4 - 0 4.
The amount of time that the torque is applied is controlled by parameter C 4 - 0 5.

5-94

5.43

T O R Q U E CONTROL (COMMAND)
NOTE: This function can only be used in Flux Vector control method ( A 1 - 0 2 = 3 ).

One of two methods may be used to run the drive in torque control.
A 1 . Torque control can be set by programming parameter d 5 - 0 1 .
d 5 - 0 1 : Torque Control Selection

Factory setting: 0

Setting

Control Method

0

Speed Control

1

Torque Control

OR
A 2 . Torque control can be set by programming a multi-function input terminal for Speed /
Torque Control Selection (Data 7 1 ). The drive will be in torque control when the
corresponding input terminal is closed. This selection can be delayed by programming
d 5 - 0 6 for a delay time.
H 1 - 0 1 thru H 1 - 0 6 : Multi-function Input
(Term. 3 thru 8)
d 5 - 0 6 : Speed/Torque Control Selection Timer

Data 7 1 : Speed / Torque
Control Selection
Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 to 100 ms

B.
Regardless of which way torque control is selected, the torque reference will be input
to the drive at terminals 16 & 17 (Multi-function analog input).
H 3 - 0 5 : Multi-function Analog Input
(Term. 16)

Data 1 3 : Torque
Reference

The scaling (with factory defaults for gain & bias) is 10V on terminal 16 = 100% of the
motor rated torque.

5-95

5.43
C.

T O R Q U E CONTROL (COMMAND)

Continued

d 5 - 0 3 : Speed Limit Selection

Factory setting: 1
Range: 1 or 2

d 5 - 0 4 : Speed Limit

Factory setting: 0
Range: –120 to +120 %

When setting the drive for torque control, a speed limit is required. This speed limit can
come from either a programmed value ( d 5 - 0 4 ), or an analog input (Term. 13 or 14).
d5-03
Setting
1

2

Speed Limit Source
Analog Input
(Term. 13 or 14)

Programmed
Value
( d5-04 )

Programming Required
Reference source needs to be set for terminals ( b1-01 = 1 )
AND the drive needs to be set for “Remote” reference
(REF light on the Digital Operator needs to be on).
and
d5-03 (Speed Limit Selection) must be set to “Analog Input”.
d5-04 is set as a percentage of the maximum frequency.
(NOTE: this value can be set to a negative value by pressing
the “up arrow” or “down arrow” keys while the left-most zero is
flashing on the Digital Operator display.
and
d5-03 (Speed Limit Selection) must be set to “Program Setting”.

D . Torque compensation can be utilized by programming terminal 14 for Torque
Compensation ( H 3 - 0 9 = 14). The analog voltage present on terminal 14 will determine
torque compensation value.
E.

d 5 - 0 2 : Torque Reference Delay Time

Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 to 1000 ms

This function is used to avoid excessive changes in torque, which may be caused by
abnormal resonance when the torque reference changes rapidly.

TORQUE REF.
(from Term. 16)

1
1 + sT

TORQUE
REF.

d5-02

F.

d 5 - 0 5 : Speed Limit Bias

Factory setting: 1 0
Range: 0 to 120 %

Sets bias value for speed limit (torque control mode only) as a percentage of maximum
frequency.

5-96

5.43
G.

Continued

T O R Q U E CONTROL (COMMAND)
Simplified block diagram:

TORQUE
H3-01 or H3-09 = 14
COMPENSATION
(TCMP)
Term. 14

Φ
TORQUE LIMIT
TORQUE
REFERENCE
(TREF)

H3-05 or H3-09 = 14

+

1
1 + ST

Term. 16

+
Iq

+

T = d5-02
SPEED
LIMIT
(SLIM)

SFS
Programmed
Value ( d5-04 )
or
Term. 13

MOTOR SPEED
d5-05

SPEED
LIMITING
CIRCUIT

The figure below shows the relationship between speed, speed limit, torque, and
torque limit.
(+) Torque
L7-04

Speed
Limit

Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit

Torque Reference
d5-05
Speed Limit
Bias

d5-05
Speed Limit
Bias
(+) Speed

(-) Speed
Slope is proportional
to C5-01

(-) Torque

5-97

L7-03
Forward Regenerative Torque Limit

5.44

T O R Q U E DETECTION

Torque detection is used to compare drive rated output current with the overtorque
detection level. When the output current is equal to or greater than the defined level, an
overtorque condition exists. This will be indicated as an " OL3 " fault on the Digital
Operator. This feature can be selected to operate over a wide range of conditions.
A.

L 6 - 0 1 : Torque Detection Selection 1
L 6 - 0 4 : Torque Detection Selection 2

Factory setting (each): 0

These parameters determine whether the torque detection function of the drive is
enabled, under what conditions it will detect for overtorque, and what operation it will
perform after detecting an overtorque.
Setting

Torque
Detection

0

Disabled

——

1

Enabled

Continues

Only at set frequency

2

Enabled

Continues

At all times except during stopping
or DC injection braking

3

Enabled

Coast to stop

Only at set frequency

4

Enabled

Coast to stop

At all times except during stopping
or DC injection braking

—
—

—

B.

Operation After
Overtorque Detection

Detection
Condition
——

For overtorque detection during accel or decel, set to " 2 " or " 4 ".
For continuous operation after overtorque detection, set to " 1 " or
" 2 ". During detection, the Digital Operator displays and “ O L 3 ”
alarm (blinking).
To stop the drive at an overtorque detection fault, set to " 3 " or
" 4 ". At detection, the Digital Operator displays an " O L 3 " fault.

L 6 - 0 2 : Overtorque Detection Level 1
L 6 - 0 5 : Overtorque Detection Level 2

Factory setting (each): 1 5 0
Range (each): 0 to 300 %

These are the reference points for determining that an overtorque condition exists. Set as
a percent of drive rated current (see Appendix 2).
C.

L 6 - 0 3 : Overtorque Detection Time 1
L 6 - 0 6 : Overtorque Detection Time 2

Factory setting (each): 0 . 1
Range (each): 0.0 to 10.0 seconds

Determines how long an overtorque condition must exist before another event will occur,
e.g. coast to stop, multi-function output change of state, or " O L 3 " warning or fault
display.

5-98

5.44
D.

T O R Q U E DETECTION

Continued

H 3 - 0 5 : Multi-function Analog Input
(Term. 16)

Data 7 : External Overtorque
Detection Level Adjustment

The multi-function analog input at terminal 16 may be configured to allow analog control
of the overtorque detection level. When this function is programmed into H 3 - 0 5 , the
internal overtorque detection level ( L 6 - 0 2 ) is disabled.

1R

drive/G5
15 +15V
16 0-10V (20 KΩ)

OVERTORQUE
DETECTION
LEVEL

17
C

200%
OVERTORQUE
DETECTION
LEVEL
0%
0V

E.

10V
VOLTAGE REFERENCE

H 2 - 0 1 : Multi-function Output (Term. 9 & 10)
H 2 - 0 2 : Multi-function Output (Term. 25-27)
H 2 - 0 3 : Multi-function Output (Term. 26-27)

Data B : Overtorque
Detection

A contact, or two open collector outputs, can be programmed to change states during an
overtorque detection condition.

5-99

5.44

T O R Q U E DETECTION

Continued

EXAMPLE OF OVERTORQUE DETECTION
L6-01
L6-02
L6-03
H2-01

setting:
2
—
setting: 110 % —
setting: 1.0 s —
setting:
B
—

TORQUE
REFERENCE

Detect during run, energize multi-function output, display alarm
Level at which torque detection is sensed
Time delay before overtorque event occurs
"Torque Detection 1" multi-function output (normally open)

110%
100%

0

0.5 sec

60 Hz
MOTOR
SPEED

0

RUN
SIGNAL
CONTACT
OUTPUT
(TORQUE
DETECTION 1)
TERM. 9 & 10
Torque Detection Timing Diagram

5-100

1 sec

5.45
A.

T O R Q U E LIMIT
L7-01
L7-02
L7-03
L7-04

:
:
:
:

Forward
Reverse
Forward
Reverse

Torque Limit
Torque Limit
Regenerative Torque Limit
Regenerative Torque Limit

Factory setting (each): 2 0 0
Range (each): 0 to 300 %

These parameters provide the ability to limit the amount of torque produced by the motor
in all four quadrants of operation: FWD motoring, REV motoring, FWD regen, and REV regen.
The torque limit functions as a torque current reference limit. Torque limit is active in both
speed mode and torque mode.
EXAMPLE:
L7-01
L7-02
L7-03
L7-04

Forward
Reverse
Forward
Reverse

Torque Limit
Torque Limit
Regenerative
Regenerative

= 150 %
= 150 %
Torque Limit = 2 0 %
Torque Limit = 2 0 %

FWD Regen Torque Lim. = 20%

REV Regen Torque Lim. = 20%

FWD. RUN
REV. RUN
H1-06 : 7
(Accel/Decel
Time Selection 1)
C1-03
(5 sec)

SPEED FEEDBACK: Sfb.
SPEED REFERENCE: Sref.

C1-01
(15 sec)

C1-02
(10 sec)

Sfb.

C1-04
(7.5 sec)

C1-02

C1-03

C1-04
Sref.

Sref.

C1-01

Sfb.

During regeneration, the regeneration torque limits have been exceeded, thus the actual
speed (Sfb) doesn’t follow the speed reference (Sref). This example also demonstrates the
accel/decel selection 1 ( H 1 - 0 6 data 7 ) .

5-101

5.45
B.

T O R Q U E LIMIT

Continued

H 3 - 0 5 : Multi-function Analog Input 1 Selection
(Term. 16)

Data 1 0 : FWD Torque Limit

The multi-function analog input at terminal 16 may be configured to allow analog control of
the torque limit for both FWD & REV modes. However, the analog reference controls both
FWD torque limit & REV regen torque limit.

1R

H3-05 = 10

GPD 515/G5

*
15 +15V
16 0-10V (20K Ω)
TORQUE
LIMIT

FWD
TORQUE
LIMIT

100%

0%

17

–10V

0V

10V

C
MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT

* 1R is a calibration pot only.

NOTE: A minimum priority circuit is associated with the torque limit function,
which means that the lowest value torque limit setting will have priority.
EXAMPLE:
Forward Torque Limit
FWD Torque Limit

L7-01 = 8 0 %
(Term. 16) = 100% (10V)

The L 7 - 0 1 value will have priority over the analog reference value.
Data 1 1 : REV Torque Limit
The multi-function analog input at terminal 16 may be configured to allow analog control of
the torque limit for both FWD & REV modes. However, the analog reference controls both
REV torque limit & FWD regen torque limit.

1R

H3-05 = 11

GPD 515/G5

*
15 +15V
16 0-10V (20K Ω)
TORQUE
LIMIT

REV
TORQUE
LIMIT

100%

0%

17

–10V

C

0V

10V

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT

* 1R is a calibration pot only.

NOTE: A minimum priority circuit is associated with the torque limit function,
which means that the lowest value torque limit setting will have priority.

5-102

5.45

T O R Q U E LIMIT

Continued
Data 1 2 : Regenerative Torque
Limit

The multi-function analog input at terminal 16 may be configured to allow analog control of
the torque limit for both FWD & REV modes. However, the analog reference controls both
FWD torque limit & REV regenerative torque limits.

1R

H3-05 = 12

GPD 515/G5

*
15 +15V
16 0-10V (20K Ω)
TORQUE
LIMIT

REGEN
TORQUE
LIMIT

100%

0%

17

–10V

C

0V

10V

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT

* 1R is a calibration pot only.

NOTE: A minimum priority circuit is associated with the torque limit function,
which means that the lowest value torque limit setting will have priority.
Data 1 3 * : FWD & REV Torque
Limit
* NOTE: When H 3 - 0 5 is set for " 1 3 ", Terminal 16 is a torque limit ONLY if speed
mode is selected ( d 5 - 0 1 = 0 ). If d 5 - 0 1 = 1 (torque mode), Terminal 16 will be
a torque reference.
Data 1 5 : FWD & REV Torque
Limit
The multi-function analog input at terminal 16 may be configured to allow analog control of
the torque limit for both FWD & REV modes. However, the analog reference controls both
FWD & REV torque limits, and the FWD & REV regenerative torque limits.
H3-05 = 15
1R

GPD 515/G5

*

100%
15 +15V
TORQUE
LIMIT

16 0-10V (20K Ω)
TORQUE
LIMIT

0%
0V

17

10V

C

* 1R is a calibration pot only.
–100%
MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT

NOTE: A minimum priority circuit is associated with the torque limit function,
which means that the lowest value torque limit setting will have priority.

5-103

5.45.1

TWO MOTOR OPERATION

E 3 - 0 1: Control Method Selection (Motor 2)

Setting
0
1
2
3

Parameter
E4-01
E4-02
E4-03
E4-04
E4-05
E4-06
E4-07

Factory setting : 2
Range : 0 to 4

Description
V/f control
V/f with PG feedback
Open loop vector
Flux vector

Description
Maximum Output Frequency (Motor 2)
Maximum Voltage (Motor 2)
Base Frequency (Motor 2)
Mid. Output Frequency (Motor 2)
Mid. Output Voltage (Motor 2)
Min. Output Frequency (Motor 2)
Min. Output Voltage (Motor 2)

Factory Settings
230V Ratings 460V Ratings 600V Ratings
60.0 Hz
60.0 Hz
60.0 Hz
230.0 V
460.0 V
575.0 V
60.0 Hz
60.0 Hz
60.0 Hz
3.0 Hz
3.0 Hz
3.0 Hz
12.6 V
25.3 V
36.6 V
0.5 Hz
0.5 Hz
0.5 Hz
2.3 V
4.6 V
6.5 V

These seven parameters define the V/f pattern for motor 2. The illustration below shows
how these parameters relate to each other in establishing the V/f pattern.
Vmax
(E4-02)

OUTPUT
VOLTAGE
Va
(E4-05)

Vmin
(E4-07)

Fmin

Fa

Fbase

Fmax

(E4-06)

(E4-04)

(E4-03)

(E4-01)

OUTPUT FREQUENCY

Parameter E 3 - 0 1 determines which control method the drive will use when motor 2 is
selected. If E 3 - 0 1 is set to a 2 or a 3, the second motor needs to be auto-tuned. First
select motor 2 (via a multi-function input) then run the auto-tuning routine as described in
Section 2.2A or 2.2B. Parameters E 4 - 0 1 thru E 4 - 0 7 and E 5 - 0 1 thru E 5 - 0 6 are set
when an auto-tune is executed on motor 2. If auto-tuning is not possible, use section 2.4
and the table below to manually calculate and enter the motor parameters.
Parameter
E5-01
E5-02
E5-03
E5-04
E5-05
E5-06

Description
Motor Rated Current (Motor 2)
Motor Rated Slip (Motor 2)
Motor No-load Current (Motor 2)
Number of Motor Poles (Motor 2)
Motor Line-to-line Resistance (Motor 2)
Motor Leakage Inductance (Motor 2)

Set by Auto-Tune?
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

5-104

Equivalent Motor 1 Parameter
E2-01
E2-02
E2-03
E2-04
E2-05
E2-06

5.45.1

TWO MOTOR OPERATION

Continued

H 1 - 0 1 t h r u H 1 - 0 6 : Multi-function Inputs
(Term. 3 thru 8)

Data 1 6 : Motor 2 Select

This function allows the drive to control two different motors at different times. When a
multi-function input is set to a data of “16”, two different sets of motor parameters can
be selected with a contact closure.
Multi-Function Input
Term.
Open (Motor 1)
Closed (Motor 2)

Control Method Setting
Parameter
A1-02
E3-01

V/f Pattern
Parameters
E1-04 thru E1-13
E4-01 thru E4-07

Motor
Parameters
E2-01 thru E2-09
E5-01 thru E5-06

The table above illustrates which parameters are used when motor 1 or motor 2 is
selected.
The drive needs to be in the stop condition before the multi-function input is opened or
closed, otherwise a “Motor Running” warning will be displayed.
H 2 - 0 1 t h r u H 2 - 0 3 : Multi-function Outputs
(Term. 9 & 10, 25,
26, & 27)

Data 1 C : Motor 2 Selected

When a multi-function output terminal is programmed to a data of “1C”, that output will
close whenever motor 2 is selected. As shown in the example below, a multi-function input
selects between motor 1 and motor 2. The multi-function output will only change states
when the drive is in the stopped condition in order to prevent internal drive damage.

5-105

5.46

U S E R PARAMETERS
A 2 - 0 1 t h r u A 2 - 3 2 : User Select Parameters

Data: Programmable
(see below)

This function allows the user to select an exclusive list of parameters, providing a
customized access level.
When the Access Level ( A 1 - 0 1 ) is set to "Advanced", the "Function A2 User
Constants" option will appear in the top level of the menu. The parameters desired for
custom access are entered into A 2 - X X parameters.
After any parameters have been programmed, the "User Program" option appears in the
choice of Access Levels. Choosing this option will allow only those parameters
programmed in A 2 - X X to be accessed in "Programming". Up to 32 parameters may be
programmed. To add parameters to or delete parameters from A 2 - X X , change the
Access Level back to Advanced.
o 2 - 0 3 : User Parameter Default Value

Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 to 2

Setting

Description

0

Disabled

1

Set Default

2

Clears all

This parameter is used to store settings as initialization values. Set all parameters to the
user-defined default values, then set o 2 - 0 3 to "1"; each changed parameter value is
then accepted and stored as its initialization value. Up to 50 parameters may have data
stored as their new (user-defined) initialization value.
"User Initialize" becomes available in the Initialize Parameter option ( A 1 - 0 3 ). Setting
this parameter to "1110" resets all settings to the user-defined defaults, rather than to
factory defaults.

5.47

V/f PATTERN - STANDARD
E 1 - 0 3 : V/f Pattern Selection

This parameter is factory preset to " F ". Table 5-4 describes 14 other preset patterns,
one of which may be better suited for your specific application and load characteristics.
However, if none of these patterns are suitable, this parameter can be set to " F " ( V / f
pattern - custom). The exact pattern is then defined by the settings of E 1 - 0 4 thru
E 1 - 1 0 , described in paragraph 5.48, V/f Pattern – Custom.

5-106

Table 5-4.
APPLIAPPLICATION
CATION

G
E
N
E
R
A
L

SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION

E1-03
Sn-02
DATA
DATA

Standard (Preset) V/f Patterns

V/f PATTERN
V/f PATTERN
(NOTE
3)
(NOTE 3 CATION
(V)
230

P
U
R
P
O
S
E

50Hz

H
I
G
H

0

17.2
11.5
50 (Hz)

0 1.3 2.5

60Hz

60Hz
Saturation

50Hz
Saturation

1

(V)
230

2

2

3

60 72(Hz)

0 1.8 3.6

V
A
R
I
A
B
L
E

T
O
R
Q
U
E

Variable
Torque
1

4

(V)
230

5
57.5

4

40.2

Variable
Torque
2

❋
60Hz

Variable
Torque
1

5

11.5
9.2
0 1.3

50 (Hz)

25

(V)
230

50Hz

Starting
Torque
Low

Starting
Torque
High

60Hz

Starting
Torque
Low

Starting
Torque
High

50 60 (Hz)

0 1.5 3

17.2
11.5

50Hz

T
O
R
Q
U
S E
T
A
R
T
I
N
G

1,
F

17.2
11.5

(V)
230

72Hz

APPLIAPPLICATION
SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
DATA

C
O
N
S
T
A
N
T
H
O
R
S
E
P
O
W
E
R

6

O
P
E
R
A
T
I
O
N

E1-03
Sn-02
DATA

V/f PATTERN
V/f
PATTERN
(NOTE
3)
(NOTE 3)
(V)
230

8
9
8

26.4
20.7
16.1
13.8

9

A

50 (Hz)

0 1.3 2.5

(V)
230

b

B

A

26.4
20.7
14.9

60 (Hz)

0 1.5 3

(V)
230

90Hz

C

17.2
11.5
0 2.3 4.5

120Hz

D

60

90 (Hz)

(V)
230

40.2
20.7
0

3

6

60

120 (Hz)

(V)
230

180Hz

E

7
57.5

6

40.2

Variable
Torque
2

7

34.5
28.9

11.5
9.2
0 1.5

25

60 (Hz)

0

4.5 6

60

NOTES:
✵
Consult Yaskawa for assistance when these settings are desired (typically used for blowers, centrifugal pumps, and fans).
1. The following conditions must be considered when selecting a V/f pattern:
– Pattern matches the voltage-frequency characteristics of the motor.
– Maximum motor speed.
2.
V/f pattern for high starting torque should be selected for:
– Wiring distance.
– Large voltage drop at start.
– AC reactor connected to drive input or output.
– Use of motor rated below drive max. output.
3.
Patterns shown are for 230V input; for other input, multiply all (V) values by (VIN/230). i.e., for 460V input, multiply
by 460/230 = 2. For 575V input, multiply by 575=2.5
230

5-107

(Hz) 180

5.48
A.

V/f PATTERN - CUSTOM
Factory Setting: 2 3 0, 4 6 0 or 5 7 5 V

E 1 - 0 1 : Input Voltage Setting

Range: 155 to 255 V (230V ratings)
310 to 510 V (460V ratings)
445 to 733 V (600V ratings)

This parameter should be set to match the rated (nominal) input voltage.
Initial Voltage Values
230V RATINGS
460V RATINGS
600V RATINGS

B.

E1-04
E1-05
E1-06
E1-07
E1-08
E1-09
E1-10
E1-11
E1-12
E1-13

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

Maximum Output Frequency
Maximum Voltage . . . . . . .
Base Frequency
Mid. Output Frequency A
Mid. Output Voltage A . . . .
Min. Output Frequency
Min. Output Voltage . . . . . .
Mid. Output Frequency B
Mid. Output Voltage B . . . .
Base Voltage . . . . . . . . . . .

......

230.0 V

460.0 V

575.0 V

......

12.6 V

25.3 V

36.6 V

......

2.3 V

4.6 V

6.5 V

......
......

0.0 V
0.0 V

0.0 V
0.0 V

0.0 V
0.0 V

These ten parameters define the custom V/f pattern, o n l y i f E 1 - 0 3 i s s e t t o " F "
(see paragraph 5.47). The illustration below shows how these constants relate to each
other in establishing the custom V/f pattern.

Vmax
( E1-05 )
VB
( E1-12 )

Vbase
( E1-13 )
OUTPUT
VOLTAGE
VA
( E1-08 )
Vmin
( E1-10 )
Fmin
( E1-09 )

FA
( E1-07 )

Fbase
( E1-06 )

FB
( E1-11 )

OUTPUT FREQUENCY

V/f Characteristics Set by E1-04 thru E1-10

5-108

Fmax
( E1-04 )

5.48

V/f PATTERN - CUSTOM

Continued

NOTE: To establish a V/f pattern with a straight line from Fmin to Fbase, set
FA = Fmin, FB = 0.0 Hz, and Vbase = 0.0 V. The settings of VA , VB and Vbase
are then disregarded and do not affect the V/f pattern.
IMPORTANT
The parameter settings are checked whenever power is applied to
the drive, or each time the ENTER key is pressed while in the
Program mode. A parameter set value failure ( OPE5 ) will occur if
any part of the following relationship among E 1 - 0 4 thru E 1 - 1 3
is not TRUE:
Fmax ≥ FB ≥ Fbase ≥ FA ≥ Fmin (unless FA or FB = 0.0)

5-109

5.49

ZERO-SERVO CONTROL
NOTE: This function can only be used in Flux Vector control method ( A 1 - 0 2 = 3 ).

A.

H 1 - 0 1 thru H 1 - 0 6 : Multi-function Input
(Term. 3 thru 8)

Data 7 2 : Zero Servo Command
(for Speed control mode only)

By programming data " 72 " into one of the multi-function
input parameters ( H 1 - 0 1 thru H 1 - 0 6 ), one of the multifunction input terminals (3 thru 8) becomes a zero-servo
control selection input. When the input terminal (i.e.
external contact) is open, the zero-servo function is
disabled, and when the contact is closed, the zero-servo
function is enabled.

GPD 515/G5
ZERO
SERVO
o

o

8

11
0V
The purpose of the zero-servo function is to provide
position control capability at zero speed. When zero-servo
is enabled, and the actual speed is less than the DC Injection Start Frequency ( b 2 - 0 1 ) ,
the shaft position is maintained by monitoring the PG feedback pulses, and correcting the
position error. However, this function doesn’t have the same capabilities of a position
controller, because there is no marker pulse feedback. Therefore, it will not stop in the
same position every time the servo function is enabled.

CAUTION
Applications that require decelerating large inertia loads in very short decel times
may cause overshoots, and a possible runaway condition, causing equipment
damage. Adjustment of zero-servo gain ( b9-01) may be required. Setting b9-01
to " 0 " may correct a runaway condition.

b 2 - 0 1 : DC Injection Braking Start Frequency

Factory setting: 0 . 5
Range: 0.0 to 10.0 Hz

The speed level at which the zero-servo function is enabled is determined by b 2 - 0 1 (DC
Injection Braking Start Frequency), and the closure of the multi-function input. This
function also determines operation at zero speed.

5-110

5.49
B.

Continued

ZERO-SERVO CONTROL
b 9 - 0 1 : Zero-Servo Gain

Factory setting: 5
Range: 0 to 100

This function provides an adjustment for the position loop gain.

CAUTION
The higher the gain, the better the response. However, too high a gain can cause
hunting or overshoot, and possible runaway condition.

DC Injection Braking Start Freq. ( b2-01 )

Speed

Load

on
Zero Servo
Position Error
position loop

speed loop

(zero-servo)

Zero-Servo Timing

C.

b 9 - 0 2 : Zero-Servo Completion Width

Factory setting: 1 0
Range: 0 to 16383 pulses

H 2 - 0 1 thru H 2 - 0 3 : Multi-function Output
(Term. 9 & 10; 25; 26)

Data 3 3 : Zero-Servo
Completed
(See paragraph 5.33)

The function of b 9 - 0 2 is to set the number of pulses used for the multi-function output
terminals. During zero-servo, the multi-function output will be closed (ON) until the
number set into b 9 - 0 2 has been completed. After the number of pulses have been
completed, the multi-function output changes to the open (OFF) state.

5-111

5.50

Z E R O SPEED CONTROL
NOTE: This function can only be used in Flux Vector control method ( A 1 - 0 2 = 3 ).

A.

b 1 - 0 5 : Zero Speed Operation

Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 to 3

The setting of this parameter determines which Zero Speed mode is enabled (see figures
on following pages).
Setting

Description

0

Run at Frequency Reference

1

STOP

2

Run at Minimum Frequency

3

Run at Zero RPM

E 1 - 0 9 : Minimum Output Frequency

Factory setting: 0 . 0 *
Range: 0.0 to 400.0 Hz
* Note: If control method is anything other than Flux
Vector ( A 1 - 0 2 = 3 ), the Factory Setting is 0 . 5

This parameter sets the speed reference level at which Zero Speed mode operation will
activate, in accordance with the selection programmed in b 1 - 0 5 (see figures on following
pages).

b1-05 = 0
b1-05 = 1 or 3

A
SPEED
REF.

0V

A/D

SOFT START
(S-CURVE)

b1-05 = 2

+

ASR
–

E1-09

B
SPEED
FEEDBACK

+
–

E1-09

SPEED
REF.

A

OUTPUT OF A/D CONVERTER
B

INPUT TO S-CURVE

E1-09
TIME
ASR OUTPUT WITH ANALOG INPUT

When the Speed Reference input is an analog signal, Zero Speed mode operation over long
periods of time will cause the output to drift.

5-112

5.50

Z E R O SPEED CONTROL

Continued

b 1 - 0 5 : 0 Run at Frequency Reference
E 1 - 0 9 : (Minimum Output Frequency) ineffective

RUN / STOP

RUN

STOP

SPEED
REFERENCE

INTERNAL
SPEED REF

ZERO SPEED
CONTROL

ZERO SPEED
CONTROL

ACTUAL
SPEED

INTERNAL
RUN

RUN

STOP

b2-04
DC Injection Braking Time at Stop

b 1 - 0 5 : 1 STOP
E 1 - 0 9 : (Minimum Output Frequency) effective

5-113

5-114

5.50

Z E R O SPEED CONTROL

Continued

b 1 - 0 5 : 2 Run at Minimum Frequency
E 1 - 0 9 : (Minimum Output Frequency) effective

RUN / STOP

RUN

STOP

E1-09
SPEED
REFERENCE

E1-09
INTERNAL
SPEED REF

ZERO SPEED
CONTROL

ZERO SPEED
CONTROL

ACTUAL
SPEED

INTERNAL
RUN

RUN

STOP
b2-04
DC Injection Braking Time at Stop

5-115

5.50

Z E R O SPEED CONTROL

Continued

b 1 - 0 5 : 3 Run at Zero RPM
E 1 - 0 9 : (Minimum Output Frequency) effective

RUN / STOP

RUN

STOP

E1-09
SPEED
REFERENCE

INTERNAL
SPEED REF

INTERNAL
RUN

RUN
b2-04
DC Injection Braking
Time at Stop

ZERO SPEED
CONTROL
ACTUAL
SPEED

5-116

STOP

ZERO SPEED
CONTROL

Section 6. FAULT INDICATION
& TROUBLESHOOTING
6.1

GENERAL

A failure in the GPD 515/G5 can fall into one of two categories, Alarm or Fault.
A blinking "Alarm" indication is a warning that a drive trouble condition will soon occur, or
that a programming error has been made. The drive will continue to operate during an
"Alarm" indication.
A blinking "Minor Fault" indication is displayed during less serious faults, or when a
problem exists in the external circuitry. The drive will continue to operate, and a "Minor
Fault" contact will be closed if a multi-function output is programmed for the condition.
A steady "Major Fault" indication is displayed when the drive’s Fault relay has tripped.
The motor coasts to a stop, and a fault signal output is present at control circuit
terminals 18 - 20.

Table 6-1. Fault Indication and Details
DIGITAL OPERATOR
INDICATION
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
(DISPLAY)
FAILURE INDICATION
ITEM

DESCRIPTION

DETAILS

Communication error while drive is set for
Run Command and/or Frequency Reference
from Serial Communication card.

TYPE
(Note 1)

BUS
Option Com Err

Communication
Option Card error

CALL
Serial Com Call

SI-B communication
error

Control data was not received when power supply
was turned on.

A

CE
Memobus Com Err

Communication error

Control data was not received for 2 seconds after
initial communication.

M

CF
Out of Control

Motor out of control

Drive cannot determine speed of motor –
Open Loop Vector Control Method ( A1-02 = 2)
only. (Note 3)

M

CPF00
COM-ERR (OP & INV)

Control circuit fault 1

Communication between Digital Operator and
drive was not established within 5 seconds
after power was applied, or an internal hardware or
software fault was detected on power-up. (Note 3)

M

CPF01
COM-ERR (OP & INV)

Control circuit fault 2

Communication errors between the Digital Operator
and drive occurred for over 2 seconds after
communication was last established, or an internal
hardware or software fault occurred after power-up.

M

(Note 3)

6-1

A
(Note 2)

Table 6-1. Fault Indication and Details – Continued
DIGITAL OPERATOR
DISPLAY

CPF02
BB Circuit Failure
CPF03
EPROM Error
CPF04
Internal A/D Err
CPF05
External A/D Err
CPF06
Option Error

DESCRIPTION

Baseblock circuit fault

DETAILS

Drive failure.
Replace Control card.

EPROM fault

Internal A/D fault

External A/D fault

Option card
connection failure

Check option card connection.
Option card failure.

CPF21
Option CPU down

Communication option card
self-diagnostic error.

Communication option card failure.

CPF22
Option Type Err

Communication option card
Model code error.

CPF23
Option DPRAM Err

Communication option card
DPRAM error.

Speed deviation

E - 15
SI - F/G Com Err

SI - F/G Communications
Error

A communications error occurred and b1-01=3
and/or b1-02=3.

Both FWD and REV
commands were applied
simultaneously

Drive is in “temporary” Ramp to Stop condition; one
input command must be removed to resume
operation.

Deviation between speed reference and speed
feedback exceeded the deviation level ( F1-10
& F1-11 ). Stop mode selection possible ( F1-04 ).

EF0
Opt External Flt

External fault input from
Check communication option card connection and
Communication option card. signal.

EF3
External Fault 3

External fault signal at
terminal 3
External fault signal at
terminal 4

M

(Note 3)

DEV
Speed Deviation

EF4
External Fault 4

M

(Note 3)

Option card (AI-14B) A/D converter malfunction.

EF
External Fault

M

(Note 3)

A/D converter fault in
Analog Speed
Reference card

CPF20
Option A/D Error

TYPE
(Note 1)

M

m
(Note2)

M
(Note2)

m

M
(Note 2)

A fault condition has occurred in the external
M
circuit(s) monitored by the contact providing input to (Note 2)
the indicated terminal.
Stop mode selection possible ( H1-01 thru H1-06 ).
(See Section 5.17)
(Note 3)

6-2

Table 6-1. Fault Indication and Details – Continued
DIGITAL OPERATOR
DISPLAY

DESCRIPTION

DETAILS

TYPE
(Note 1)

EF5
External Fault 5

External fault signal at
terminal 5

M
A fault condition has occurred in the external
circuit(s) monitored by the contact providing input to (Note 2)
the indicated terminal.

EF6
External Fault 6

External fault signal at
terminal 6

Stop mode selection possible ( H1-01 thru H1-06).
(See Section 5.17)

EF7
External Fault 7

External fault signal
at terminal 7

(Note 3)

EF8
External Fault 8

External fault signal at
terminal 8
SI-F / G Communications
Error

A communications error occurred and
b1-03 = 3 and/or b1-02 = 3.

M
(Note 2)

EPROM write-in fault

drive failure.
Cycle power, then attempt to initialize.
Replace Control card.

m

PID Feedback Reference
Loss

PID feedback reference loss detection is enabled
(b5-12 = 1 or 2) and the PID feedback input is less than
the PID feedback loss detection level (b5-13) for longer
than the PID feedback loss detection time (b5-14).

Ground fault

Drive output ground current exceeded 50% of
driverated current.

M

Drive output has open
phase

Problem in drive-to-motor wiring. Enable/disable
with L8-07.

M

Overcurrent

Drive output current exceeded 200% of drive rated
current. (Note 3)

M

OH
Heatsnk Overtemp

Cooling fin overheat

Heatsink fin temperature exceeded the setting of
L8-02 . (Note 3)

OH1
Heatsnk MAX Temp

Drive overheat

Heatsink fin temperature exceeded 105˚C (221˚F)
(Note 3), or internal cooling fan has failed.

M

Drive overheat Pre-alarm

A multi-function input (H1-01 to H1-06) is
programmed for OH2 Alarm Signal (data “B”) and
the corresponding input terminal is closed.

A

Motor overload

Protects the motor. Motor thermal overload
protection has tripped. L1-02 has been exceeded
(initial value: 150% for 60 sec.). (Note 3)

M

E-10
SI-F / G CPU Down
ERR
EPROM R/W Err
FbL
Feedback Loss
GF
Ground Fault
LF
Output Pha Loss
OC
Overcurrent

OH2
Over Heat 2
OL1
Motor Overloaded

6-3

m
(Note 2)

m
(Note 2)

Table 6-1. Fault Indication and Details – Continued
DIGITAL OPERATOR
DISPLAY

DESCRIPTION

DETAILS

TYPE
(Note 1)

M

Drive overload

Protects the drive. Drive overload protection has
tripped.

Overtorque detect 1

Output current exceeds Overtorque Detection
Level 1 ( L6-02 ).

(Note 2)

Overtorque detect 2

Output current exceeds Overtorque Detection
Level 2 ( L6-05 ).

(Note 2)

Drive capacity
selection fault

o2-04 has been changed from the correct factory
setting value. Refer to Table A3-1.

A

OPE02
Limit

Parameter set out of range

One or more parameter values are not within the
allowable setting range.

A

OPE03
Terminal

Multi-function input
setting fault

H1-01 thru H1-06 (multi-function input)-2 or
more parameters are set to the same data (other
than " F " and " FF ").
See paragraph 5.32.

A

Option card
selection error

Frequency reference and/or run source is set for
option card (b1-01=3 and/or b1-02=3), but no
option card is connected.

A

PG-X2 card not installed

Control method set to Flux Vector or V/F with PG,
and no PG-X2 card is installed.

A

Multi-function analog
input selection error

Both multi-function analog inputs (H3-05 and H3-09) have
been programmed for the same data (except 1F) OR an
AI-14B option card is connected, the drive is programmed
for 3-channel individual (F2-01=0), and a multi-function
input is programmed for Option/Inverter Selection (H1-01
to H1-06=2).

A

Selection Parameter error

A parameter has been changed that is not available
in the present Control Method. Example: H1-08=72
(Zero Servo Command) is set while the drive is in
Flux Vector Control (A1-02=3), then the Control
Method is changed to Open Loop Vector (A1-02=2).

A

OPE10
V/F Ptrn Setting

V/f data setting fault

Occurs when the custom V/f pattern does not meet
the following criteria:
( E1-04 ) ≥ ( E1-06 )> ( E1-07 ) ≥ ( E1-09 )

A

OPE11
CarrFrq/ON-Delay

Carrier frequency
parameter(s) set out
of range

Occurs when the carrier frequency parameters are
set as follows: ( C6-01 ) > 5 kHz and ( C6-02 ) ≤ 5
kHz;( C6-03 ) > 6 and ( C6-01 ) < ( C6-02 )

A

Operator disconnected

Digital Operator has been disconnected from drive
while in Run mode.

OL2
Inv Overloaded
OL3
Overtorque Det 1
OL4
Overtorque Det 2
OPE01
kVA Selection

OPE05
Sequence Select
OPE06
PG Opt Missing
OPE07
Analog Selection

OPE08
Terminal

OPR
Oper Disconnect

6-4

M
(Note 2)

Table 6-1. Fault Indication and Details – Continued
DIGITAL OPERATOR
DISPLAY

OS
Overspeed
OV
DC Bus Overvolt
PF
Input Pha Loss
PGO
PG Open
PUF
DC Bus Fuse Open
RH
DynBrk Resistor
RR
DynBrk Transistor
SC
Short Circuit
SVE
Zero Servo Fault
UV
DC Bus Undervolt

UV1
DC Bus Undervolt

UV2
CTL PS Undervolt
UV3
MC Answerback

DESCRIPTION

Motor overspeed

DETAILS

Motor speed exceeds overspeed level ( F1-08 &
F1-09 ). Stop mode selection possible ( F1-03 ).

M
(Note 2)

(Note 3)

Overvoltage

Detection level: Approx. 400VDC for 230V rated
unit; Approx. 800V for 460VDC rated unit; approx
1050 VDC for 600V rated unit. (Note 3)

M

drive input phase missing

Incoming power supply has an open phase, or a
large imbalance exists between L1, L2 &
L3.Enable/disable with L8-05 .

M

PG cable wires are
disconnected

Pulse generator is disconnected from the PG-X2
card (Terminal TA1).

Fuse blown

DC fuse has cleared. Check for short circuit in
output circuitry. (Note 3)

M

Braking resistor overheat

Braking resistor unit temperature exceeds the
allowable value. (Heatsink-mount resistor only,
and only if L8-01=1).

M

Braking transistor failure

Braking transistor failure.

M

Short circuit on drive output
terminals

Very low impedance on output of drive.
Check for correct motor wiring / capacity.

M

Zero Servo fault

Shaft position changed by more than 500,000
revolutions during zero servo operation.

M

Momentary power loss

Low voltage has been detected, but momentary
power loss ride-thru is enabled ( L2-01 ), and
momentary power loss ride-thru time ( L2-02 )
has not yet been exceeded. (Note 3)

m

Main circuit undervoltage

Occurs 2 seconds after detection of low voltage.
Detection level: approx 190VDC for 230V rated unit;
approx 380VDC for 460V rated unit; approx 546
VDC for 600V rated unit. (Note 3)

A

Control circuit
undervoltage

Control circuit voltage is low during operation.

A

Main contactor fault

Main circuit magnetic contactor (soft charge
contactor) does not operate correctly.

A

NOTES:

1.
2.
3.

TYPE
(Note 1)

A = Alarm; m = Minor Fault; M = Major Fault.
The stop mode, and therefore the fault type (alarm, minor or major), is selectable.
See section 6.4 for flowcharts to use in troubleshooting these fault conditions.

6-5

M
(Note 2)

6.2

AUTO-TUNING FAULTS & CORRECTIVE ACTIONS

DIGITAL OPERATOR
DISPLAY
INDICATION

DESCRIPTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

Tune Aborted
Data Invalid

Motor data is not correct

Tune Aborted
Resistance

Line-to-line resistance not
within tolerance

Tune Aborted
No-Load Current

•
•

Check the input data.
Check the drive and motor capacities.

•
•

Check the input data.
Check the motor wiring.

•
•

Increase acceleration time ( C1-01 ).
Increase torque limit values ( L7-01 , -02 ) if they
are reduced from factory settings.
Uncouple the motor from the load.

No-load current (magnetizing
current) not within tolerance

Tune Aborted
Sat Coef 1

Iron core saturation
coefficient 1 not within
tolerance

Tune Aborted
Sat Coef 2

Iron core saturation
coefficient 2 not within
tolerance

Tune Aborted
Rated Slip

Rated slip not within
tolerance

Tune Aborted
Accelerate

Motor did not accelerate in
the specified time

•

Tune Aborted
PG Direction

Encoder phasing opposite
that of motor phasing

•
•

Tune Aborted
Motor Speed

Torque reference exceeded
100% during auto-tuning

Tune Aborted
Over Load

Torque reference exceeded
20% during auto-tuning

Swap two motor leads.
OR
Swap channels on the input to the PG-X2 card
(on terminal block TA1, swap wires at terminals
4 & 6 and swap wires at terminals 5 & 7).

•
•
•

Uncouple motor from load.
Increase acceleration time ( C1-01 ).
Check input data, especially the encoder PPR
( F1-01 ).

•

Check Table 6-1 for specific minor
fault indicated by “XXX.”

(Displayed after completion of tuning)

Tune Aborted
Minor Fault : XXX
Tune Aborted
PG Circuit

A minor drive fault occurred

PG cable wires are
disconnected

•

6-6

Pulse generator is disconnected from
the PG-X2 card (Terminal TA1).
Check PG wiring.

6.3

DISPLAYING FAULTS

A . Displaying F a u l t Conditions
Whenever the fault relay trips (drive shutdown), the fault that caused the trip (except for
Illegal Constant or Control Function Hardware) is entered into non-volatile RAM. The drive
also retains the operating conditions when the fault occurred.
These conditions can only be displayed when the drive is in the Drive mode (DRIVE light is
on).

Table 6-2. Displaying Fault Conditions
DESCRIPTION

DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
(See Note 1)

KEY SEQUENCE

If a major fault has just
occurred, but the drive
has not been reset,
proceed directly to Step A.

The DRIVE and STOP lights are
illuminated, and the FWD, REV,
SEQ, & REF lights are flashing.

EF3
External Fault 3
If the drive has been reset,
the conditions at the last
fault can still be displayed:

Press

, then
MENU
then

Press

DATA
ENTER
4 times

,

Function U2
Fault Trace
Current Fault
None

DATA
ENTER

Proceed to Step A.
Step A
Display the frequency reference
that was present when the fault
occurred.

Press

Last Fault
External Fault 3

Press

Display the output frequency
that was present when the
fault occurred.

Frequency Ref
U2-03= 10.00 Hz

Press

Output Freq
U2-04= 10.00 Hz

6-7

Table 6-2. Displaying Fault Conditions – Continued
DESCRIPTION
Continue pressing

DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
(See Note 1)

KEY SEQUENCE

to cycle through all of the condition displays. These include: output current,
output voltage, DC bus voltage, kWatts, input terminal status, output terminal
status, operation status, and elapsed time.

NOTE: To decode the input terminal status, output terminal status, and operation status displays, refer to Appendix 1,
Table A1-10, U1-10 to U1-12.
NOTES:
1.

Actual displays will differ depending on the recorded fault and the operating conditions.

If the FWD, REV, SEQ, & REF lights are flashing, enter a RESET command (from the Digital
Operator or external signal) to prepare the drive for restart of operation.
IMPORTANT: In 2-wire control, any RUN/STOP command must be removed before
the RESET will be accepted.

B . Displaying Fault History
Whenever the fault relay trips (drive shutdown), the fault that caused the trip (except for
Illegal Constant or Control Function Hardware) is entered into non-volatile RAM. The drive
retains the last four faults and the operating conditions when the last fault occurred.
(NOTE: Time is in operating hours.)
These faults can only be displayed when the drive is in the Drive mode (DRIVE light is on).
The drive can be stopped or running.

Table 6-3. Displaying Fault History
DESCRIPTION
Display the fault history
function menu.

DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
(See Note 1)

KEY SEQUENCE
Press

, then
MENU
then

Display the last fault that
occurred (most recent in time)

Press

Display the second from the
last fault that occurred.

Press

DATA
ENTER
twice

,

Function U3
Fault History
Last Fault
External Fault 3

DATA
ENTER

Fault Message 2
Motor Overloaded

6-8

Table 6-3. Displaying Fault History – Continued
DESCRIPTION

DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
(See Note 1)

KEY SEQUENCE

Display the third from the
last fault that occurred.

Press

Fault Message 3
DC Bus Undervolt

Display the fourth from the
last fault that occurred.

Press

Fault Message 4
None
NOTE: If less than four faults
have occurred since the drive
was initialized, "None" will appear
on the Digital Operator.

Display the operating hours
when the last fault occurred.

Press

Elapsed Time 1
U3-05= 57 H

Display the operating hours
when the second from the last
fault occurred.

Press

Elapsed Time 2
U3-06= 41 H

Display the operating hours
when the third from the last
fault occurred.

Press

Elapsed Time 3
U3-07=
5H

Display the operating hours
when the fourth from the last
fault occurred.

Press

Elapsed Time 4
U3-08=
0H

NOTES:
1.

Actual displays will differ depending on the recorded fault and the operating conditions.

6-9

6.4

TROUBLESHOOTING FLOWCHARTS

If the drive malfunctions, locate the cause and take corrective action by following the
flowcharts given in this section.
A. TROUBLESHOOTING MOTOR SYMPTOMS
Motor
Motor
Motor
Motor

Does Not Rotate ................................................................................
Stalls During Acceleration..................................................................
Does Not Rotate at Set Speed ..........................................................
Hunting ..............................................................................................

Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart

6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4

Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart

6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
6.12
6.13
6.14

B. TROUBLESHOOTING FOR FAULT CONDITIONS
oV – Overvoltage ........................................................................................
PUF – DC Bus Fuse Open .............................................................................
oC – Overcurrent .........................................................................................
oL1 – Motor Overload .................................................................................
UV – Undervoltage ......................................................................................
oH – Heatsink Overtemp .............................................................................
CPFXX – Control Function Error ...................................................................
EFX – External Fault ....................................................................................
oS – Overspeed ...........................................................................................
CF – Out of Control .....................................................................................

WARNING
Oscilloscope chassis may be at voltages potentially hazardous to
life if not properly grounded. If oscilloscope is used to measure
high voltage waveforms, use only a dual channel oscilloscope in
the differential mode with X100 probes.
Always connect
oscilloscope chassis to earth ground.

WARNING
Voltages dangerous to life exist when equipment is open and
energized. Do not work alone.

CAUTION
To prevent equipment damage always remove incoming threephase power before test equipment is connected or removed.
Never disconnect or connect the wiring while the power is applied.

6-10

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.1

MOTOR DOES NOT ROTATE
"CHARGE" LAMP
ON MAIN PC BOARD
LIT?

NO

YES
RATED VOLTAGE
ACROSS TERMINALS
L1(R), L2(S), AND L3(T)?

CHECK CIRCUIT
BREAKER, MAGNETIC
CONTACTOR AND
INPUT POWER.

NO

YES

NO

YES

RUN
LAMP
ON?

FAULT
SHOWN ON
ALPHA-NUMERIC
DISPLAY?

NO

GO TO APPROPRIATE
CHART, 6.5 THRU 6.13.

YES

DISPLAY U1-10,
INPUT STATUS

(CONTROL BY
EXT. INPUTS)

2-WIRE CONTROL

3-WIRE CONTROL

NO
(CONTROL
BY DIGITAL
OPERATOR)

DIGITAL
OPERATOR
ASSEMBLY
IS FAULTY.
REPLACE.

STOP COMMAND
STILL ON?
YES
(OPEN CIRCUIT
BETWEEN
TERMINALS 11 AND 2)

CLOSE
STOP
COMMAND
INPUT.

FWD RUN/STOP
& REV RUN/STOP
BOTH OFF?
YES
(OPEN CIRCUITS FROM
TERMINAL 11 TO
TERMINALS 1 AND 2)

NO

NO

RUN
COMMAND ON? NO
(CLOSED CIRCUIT
[ MOMENTARY INPUT ]
BETWEEN
TERMINALS 11 AND 1)

FWD RUN/STOP
& REV RUN/STOP
YES
BOTH ON?
(CLOSED CIRCUITS FROM
TERMINAL 11 TO
TERMINALS 1 AND 2)

INPUT RUN
COMMAND.

INPUT A
RUN/STOP
COMMAND.

RELEASE
ONE
RUN/STOP
COMMAND
INPUT.

NO

YES

APPROX. 15VDC FROM
TERMINAL 15(+) TO 17?

NO

YES

PROPER FREQUENCY
REFERENCE INPUT?
NO
(TERMINAL 17(–) TO 13 ( U1-15 ),
14 ( U1-16 ), OR 16 ( U1-17 ) )

YES

A
6-11

TO NEXT
PAGE

DRIVE'S
CONTROL POWER
CIRCUIT IS FAULTY.

CHECK EXTERNAL
CIRCUITS FOR
PROBLEM AND
REPAIR.

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.1 (Continued)
FROM
PRECEDING
PAGE

A

VOLTAGE PRESENT ACROSS
OUTPUT TERMINALS
T1(U), T2(V) AND T3(W)?

NO

DRIVE
IS FAULTY.

YES

CHECK CONNECTIONS FOR
PROBLEM AND
REPAIR.

PROPER CONNECTIONS
FROM DRIVE TO
MOTOR?

NO

YES
CONTROL METHOD?
V/F w/ PG

PROPER
CONNECTIONS
FROM DRIVE
TO PG
(ENCODER)?

NO

YES

Flux Vector

PROPER
CONNECTIONS
FROM DRIVE
TO PG
(ENCODER)?

NO

V/F

Open Loop Vector

TORQUE LIMIT
SETTING
CORRECT?

NO

SET TORQUE LIMIT
(ANALOG INPUT, OR
L7-01 & L7-02 ) TO
PROPER VALUE.

YES

YES

VOLTAGE PRESENT AT
MOTOR TERMINALS
T1(U), T2(V) AND T3(W)?

NO

CHECK FOR
PROBLEM IN MOTOR,
MECHANICAL
SYSTEM OR BRAKE.

YES

LOAD TORQUE
TOO LARGE?

- REDUCE LOAD
TORQUE (DISCONNECT LOAD).

YES

- REPLACE DRIVE
WITH ONE OF
LARGER CAPACITY.

NO

VOLTAGE BALANCED
(WITHIN 2%)
BETWEEN PHASES, AT
T1(U), T2(V) AND T3(W)?

YES

MOTOR
IS FAULTY.

6-12

NO

DRIVE
IS FAULTY.

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.2

MOTOR STALLS DURING ACCELERATION

ACCELERATION TIME
TOO SHORT?

WITH DRIVE IN
STOPPED CONDITION,
EXTEND ACCELERATION TIME BY
REPROGRAMMING
C1-01, C1-03, C1-05,
OR C1-07 .

YES

NO

LOAD TORQUE
TOO HIGH?

YES

NO

CHECK IF SPECIAL
MOTOR IS USED.

NO

LOAD
INERTIA
LARGE?

YES
CONTROL METHOD?
V/F
or
V/F w/ PG

V/f SELECTION
APPROPRIATE?

Flux Vector
or
Open Loop Vector

YES

NO

WITH DRIVE
IN STOPPED
CONDITION, SET
OPTIMUM V/f
PATTERN BY
REPROGRAMMING
E1-03 .

LARGE MOTOR
TERMINAL
VOLTAGE DROP?

YES

- USE LARGER WIRE
BETWEEN DRIVE
AND MOTOR.
- SHORTEN WIRING
DISTANCE BETWEEN
DRIVE AND MOTOR.

NO

- DECREASE LOAD
INERTIA.

- DECREASE LOAD
TORQUE.

- EXTEND ACCELERATION TIME BY
REPROGRAMMING
C1-01, C1-03, C1-05,
OR C1-07 .

- REPLACE DRIVE
WITH ONE OF
LARGER
CAPACITY.

6-13

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.3

MOTOR DOES NOT ROTATE AT SET SPEED
YES

CORRECT MOTOR FOR NO
USE WITH DRIVE?

CONSULT YASKAWA
ABOUT MOTOR SELECTION.

CONTROL METHOD?
V/F
or
Open Loop Vector

PROPER
CONNECTIONS
FROM DRIVE
TO MOTOR?

Flux Vector
or
V/F w/ PG

PROPER CONNECTIONS
FROM DRIVE TO
MOTOR AND PG?

YES

CHECK CONNECTIONS
FOR PROBLEM AND
REPAIR.

NO

YES
PROPER FREQUENCY
REFERENCE INPUT?
(TERMINAL 17(–) TO 13 ( U1-15 ),
14 ( U1-16 ), OR 16 ( U1-17 ) )

NO

CHECK CONNECTIONS FOR
PROBLEM AND
REPAIR.

NO

CHECK EXTERNAL
CIRCUITS FOR
PROBLEM AND
REPAIR.

YES
ALL GROUP b PARAMETER
NO
SETTINGS PROPER
FOR APPLICATION?

CHECK SETTINGS;
REPROGRAM
AS REQUIRED.

YES
CONTROL METHOD?
Flux Vector
or
V/F w/ PG

NO

IS PG
POWER SUPPLY
NORMAL?

YES

CONSULT
YASKAWA.

NO

V/F
or
Open Loop Vector

IS PG OUTPUT
SIGNAL NORMAL?
(See Section 6.6)

YES
EXCESSIVE
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
CHATTER?

YES

NO
APPROX. 15VDC FROM
TERMINAL 15(+) TO 17?

YES

DRIVE
IS FAULTY.

6-14

NO

CHECK FOR
PROBLEM IN MOTOR,
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
OR BRAKE.

DRIVE'S
CONTROL POWER
CIRCUIT IS FAULTY.

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.4

MOTOR HUNTING

CONTROL METHOD?
V/F
or
Open Loop Vector

Flux Vector
or
V/F w/ PG

PROPER PHASE SEQUENCE
NO
OF CONNECTIONS FROM
DRIVE TO MOTOR?

CHECK CONNECTIONS
FOR PROBLEM AND
REPAIR.

YES

CHECK STALL
PREVENTION
SETTINGS
( L3-01 OR L3-06 ).

PROPER CONNECTIONS
FROM DRIVE TO
PG (ENCODER)?

NO

CHECK CONNECTIONS
FOR PROBLEM AND
REPAIR.

YES
ALL PARAMETER SETTINGS
RELATED TO ASR PROPER NO
FOR APPLICATION?

YES

CHECK SETTINGS;
REPROGRAM
AS REQUIRED.

WITH DRIVE IN STOPPED
CONDITION, REDUCE APPLICABLE
ASR PROPORTIONAL GAIN
( C5-01 OR C5-03 ) SETTING.

DOES MOTOR STILL
HUNT?

NO

YES

EXCESSIVE
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
CHATTER?

NO

REFER TO PARA. 2.2
AND VERIFY NOISE
PROBLEM, THEN
CORRECT.

YES

ERRONEOUS
OPERATION DUE
TO NOISE?

NO

DRIVE
IS FAULTY.

6-15

YES

DETERMINE THE
OPTIMUM SETTING FOR
WHICH THE MOTOR
WILL NOT HUNT.

CHECK FOR
PROBLEM IN MOTOR,
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
OR BRAKE.
REDUCE ASR OUTPUT
LAG TIME ( C5-06 ) BY
SMALL AMOUNTS UNTIL
AMOUNT OF CHATTER
IS ACCEPTABLE.

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.5

" oV – Overvoltage " FAULT INDICATION
IS INPUT AC SUPPLY
VOLTAGE CORRECT?

NO

YES

DOES OV TRIP
OCCUR ONLY
DURING DECELERATION?

DECREASE TO
PROPER VOLTAGE
RANGE.

WITH DRIVE IN
STOPPED CONDITION,
INCREASE DECELERATION TIME BY
REPROGRAMMING
C1-02, C1-04, C1-06,
OR C1-08 .

YES

NO

REMOVE NOISE SOURCE:
ERRONEOUS
OPERATION DUE
TO NOISE?

YES

NO

• CONNECT SURGE
SUPPRESSOR TO RELAY
AND MAGNETIC CONTACTOR COILS.

DOES OV TRIP
STILL OCCUR
DURING DECELERATION?

• PROVIDE LINE FILTER
TO REMOVE NOISE ON
INPUT POWER LINE.

CONTROL SIGNALS TO
GATE DRIVE PCB ARE
FAULTY. REPLACE
CONTROL PCB.

YES

NO

IS BRAKING
OPTION
INSTALLED?

YES

ADD BRAKING OPTION,
OR REPLACE DRIVE
WITH ONE OF LARGER
CAPACITY.

6-16

CHECK LOAD
INERTIA
REQUIREMENTS.

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.6

" PUF – DC Bus Fuse Open " FAULT INDICATION

DISCONNECT LEADS FROM
OUTPUT TERMINALS
T1(U), T2(V) AND T3(W).

ARE MOTOR WINDINGS
SHORTED (T1 TO T2,
T2 TO T3, OR T3 TO T1)?

YES

MOTOR
IS FAULTY.

NO

ARE DRIVE
YES
OUTPUT PHASES
SHORTED TO GROUND?
T1(U), T2(V), T3(W) TO G(E).

LOCATE AND
REMOVE SHORT.

NO

CHECK POWER TRANSISTORS
(SEE PARAGRAPH 6.5).
ARE TRANSISTORS
DAMAGED?

YES

NO

DRIVE
IS FAULTY.

CAUTION
DO NOT REPLACE DC BUS FUSE WITHOUT
FIRST CHECKING OUTPUT TRANSISTORS.

6-17

REPLACE
DAMAGED POWER
TRANSISTORS.

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.7

" oC – Overcurrent " FAULT INDICATION
DOES OUTPUT
CURRENT EXCEED
200% OF RATING?

WITH DRIVE IN STOPPED CONDITION, INCREASE ACCELERATION
TIME BY REPROGRAMMING C1-01,
C1-03, C1-05, OR C1-07 , IF OC
TRIP OCCURS ONLY DURING
ACCELERATION.
OTHERWISE, REDUCE LOAD.

YES

NO

DOES OC TRIP
OCCUR, OR MC
ANSWERBACK
TRIP, WHEN POWER
IS TURNED ON?

MACHINE JAMMED
OR MOTOR
FAILURE?

NO

YES

NO

YES

CHECK POWER
TRANSISTORS
(SEE PARAGRAPH 6.5).
ARE TRANSISTORS
DAMAGED?

CLEAR JAM, OR
REPLACE MOTOR.
DISCONNECT WIRING
FROM OUTPUT TERMINALS
T1, T2 AND T3 AND
CHECK LOAD IMPEDANCE.

REPLACE
DAMAGED POWER
TRANSISTORS.

YES

NO

DOES OC TRIP
STILL OCCUR?

YES

WITH DRIVE IN STOPPED
CONDITION, INCREASE
ACCELERATION TIME BY
REPROGRAMMING C1-01,
C1-03, C1-05, OR C1-07 .

DECREASE
LOAD INERTIA.

NO

MOTOR STARTED BY CONTACTS
WIRED BETWEEN DRIVE
AND MOTOR?

YES

- REPLACE DRIVE WITH
ONE OF LARGER CAPACITY.

NO

ERRONEOUS OPERATION
DUE TO NOISE?

- REWIRE TO ELIMINATE MOTOR
FULL VOLTAGE STARTING.

YES

REMOVE NOISE SOURCE:
• CONNECT SURGE SUPPRESSOR
TO RELAY AND MAGNETIC CONTACTOR COILS.

NO

• PROVIDE LINE FILTER TO
REMOVE NOISE ON INPUT
POWER LINE.

CONTROL PCB OR GATE
DRIVE PCB IS FAULTY.
REPLACE FAULTY BOARD.

6-18

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.8

" oL1 – Motor Overload " FAULT INDICATION
YES

LOAD TOO LARGE
(MOTOR OVERHEATED)?

DECREASE LOAD
WITHIN RATING.

NO

IS DRIVE CAPACITY
( o2-04 ) FACTORY SET
CORRECTLY?

NO

SET ACCORDING TO
APPENDIX 3, TABLE A3-1.

YES
IS ELECTRONIC THERMAL
NO
OVERLOAD ( L1-01 & L1-02 )
SET CORRECTLY?

WITH DRIVE IN
STOPPED CONDITION,
REPROGRAM L1-01 & L1-02 .

YES

DISCONNECT WIRING FROM
OUTPUT TERMINALS T1(U),
T2(V) AND T3(W). IS OL
STILL INDICATED?

NO

CHECK MOTOR
AND LOAD.

YES

ERRONEOUS OPERATION
DUE TO NOISE?

YES

REMOVE NOISE SOURCE:
• CONNECT SURGE
SUPPRESSOR TO RELAY
AND MAGNETIC CONTACTOR COILS.

NO

PG-X2 PCB, CONTROL
PCB, OR GATE DRIVE
PCB IS FAULTY.
REPLACE FAULTY BOARD.

6-19

• PROVIDE LINE FILTER
TO REMOVE NOISE ON
INPUT POWER LINE.

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.9

" UV – Undervoltage " FAULT INDICATION

IS INPUT AC
SUPPLY
CORRECT?

- INCREASE VOLTAGE
WITHIN PROPER RANGE.

NO

- CHECK WIRING BETWEEN
MAIN AC CONTACTOR
AND DRIVE.

YES

IS THERE
AT LEAST 450VDC
(FOR 460V DRIVE) OR
225VDC (FOR 230V DRIVE)
ON THE DC BUS?
(SELECT MONITOR DISPLAY
U1-07 TO CHECK VOLTAGE)

NO

DRIVE
IS FAULTY.

YES

REMOVE NOISE SOURCE:
ERRONEOUS OPERATION
DUE TO NOISE?

YES

NO

CONTROL PCB OR GATE
DRIVE PCB IS FAULTY.
REPLACE FAULTY BOARD.

6-20

• CONNECT SURGE
SUPPRESSOR TO RELAY
AND MAGNETIC CONTACTOR COILS.
• PROVIDE LINE FILTER
TO REMOVE NOISE ON
INPUT POWER LINE.

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.10

" oH – Heatsink Overtemp " FAULT INDICATION
IS AMBIENT
TEMPERATURE
45°C (113°F)
OR GREATER?

YES

REDUCE AMBIENT
TEMPERATURE.

NO
IS HEAT SINK
CLEAN?

NO

CLEAN HEAT
SINK.

YES

COOLING FAN
STOPPED?

YES

REPLACE
COOLING FAN.

NO

ERRONEOUS OPERATION
DUE TO NOISE?

YES

REMOVE NOISE SOURCE:
• CONNECT SURGE
SUPPRESSOR TO RELAY
AND MAGNETIC CONTACTOR COILS.

NO

CONTROL PCB OR GATE
DRIVE PCB IS FAULTY.
REPLACE FAULTY BOARD.

6-21

• PROVIDE LINE FILTER
TO REMOVE NOISE ON
INPUT POWER LINE.

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.11

" CPFXX – " CONTROL FUNCTION ERROR FAULT INDICATION

TURN OFF POWER. AFTER
"CHARGE" LAMP ON MAIN
PC BOARD GOES OUT,
TURN POWER BACK ON.

IS CPF STILL
INDICATED?

YES

NO

1. CHECK THAT ALL DRIVE
HARNESS CONNECTORS,
AND CONTROL BOARD
MOUNTED PCB's, ARE
FIRMLY SEATED.
2.CHECK THAT NO NOISE
SOURCE IS PRESENT.
3. REPROGRAM A1-03 USING
FACTORY RESET CODES.
OBSERVE CAUTION
ON PAGE vii.
4. CHECK o2-04 FOR PROPER
VALUE.

NO

IS CPF STILL
INDICATED?

YES

DRIVE IS OK.
RETURN TO NORMAL
OPERATION.

SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
HAS DETECTED FAILURE IN
THE CPU OR PERIPHERAL
COMPONENTS.
REPLACE THE CONTROL PCB,
OR APPROPRIATE CONTROL
MOUNTED PCB.

6-22

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.12

" EFX – " EXTERNAL FAULT INDICATION

IS AN EXTERNAL FAULT SIGNAL
PRESENT (CLOSED CIRCUIT
BETWEEN TERMINAL 3 AND
11; OR OPEN CIRCUIT
BETWEEN TERMINAL 11
AND WHICHEVER TERMINAL
(4-8) HAS BEEN PROGRAMMED
FOR EXT. FAULT INPUT)?

YES

NO

CONTROL PCB IS
FAULTY. REPLACE.

6-23

FAULT HAS OCCURRED
IN CIRCUITS OUTSIDE
THE DRIVE.
TROUBLESHOOT AND
CORRECT.

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.13

" oS – Overspeed " FAULT INDICATION

CORRECT ENCODER PPR
VALUE PROGRAMMED
IN F1-01 ?

NO

RE-PROGRAM
F1-01 SETTING.

YES

EXCESSIVE NOISE
ON ENCODER
SIGNAL INPUTS TO
THE DRIVE?
(See Section 6.6)

YES

CONSULT YASKAWA
ABOUT SPECIFICATIONS OF
USER-SUPPLIED ENCODER.

NO

FORWARD DIRECTION OK,
BUT TRACKING PROBLEM
IN REVERSE DIRECTION?

YES

NO

CONSULT
YASKAWA.

6-24

ENCODER
PROBLEM.

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.14

" CF – Out of Control " FAULT INDICATION

ARE REGENERATIVE
TORQUE LIMITS SET
HIGH ENOUGH?

NO

INCREASE L7-03 AND
L7-04 .

YES

INCREASE C1-02 (OR
C1-04 , C1-06 , OR C1-08 )

YES

INCREASE E1-09
(TYPICALLY TO 1.5 Hz )

NO

REPROGRAM E2-02
TO PROPER SETTING.

YES

CAN DECELERATION
TIME BE EXTENDED?

NO

CAN MINIMUM
FREQUENCY BE
INCREASED?

NO

IS MOTOR RATED SLIP
SET PROPERLY?

YES

CONSULT
YASKAWA.

6-25

TROUBLESHOOTING C H A R T 6 . 1 5

NO DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

NO
DISPLAY

230/460
ON
L1, L2, L3?

NO

APPLY
POWER

YES

CHARGE
LAMP
ON?

NO

YES

IS VOLTAGE
BETWEEN
TERM. 1 & 11
≈ 24 VDC?

NO

DAMAGED PRECHARGE
RESISTOR, INPUT
DIODES, OR OUTPUT
TRANSISTORS

IS VOLTAGE
BETWEEN
OR TERM. 15/17
+15 VDC?

NO

YES

IS VOLTAGE
BETWEEN
TERM. 15 & 17
+15 VDC?

NO

EITHER CONTROL CARD
OR GATE DRIVE IS
FAULTY

YES

CHECK ALL
CONNECTORS,
EXCHANGE
OPERATOR /
CABLE

6-26

REPLACE
GATE DRIVE
BOARD

6.5
A.

D I O D E A N D IGBT (TRANSISTOR) MODULE RESISTANCE TEST
DIODE MODULE

Measure the resistance across the module terminals with a volt-ohm meter. Set the meter
at the X1 range. The measured resistance should be within the values listed in Table 6-4.
NOTE: If the DC bus fuse is blown (PUF), the values shown below may not be accurate.

WARNING
Power should be removed from L1, L2, & L3 and the CHARGE light
should be out prior to conducting these tests.
Table 6-4. Diode Module Resistances
++

––

ON
ON

ON
ON

L1
L2
L3
–
–
–

+1
+1
+1
L1
L2
L3

NORMAL
NORMAL
READING
READING
(OHMS)
(OHMS)

ABNORMAL
ABNORMAL
READING
READING
(OHMS)
(OHMS)

––

ON
ON

ON
ON

L1
L2
L3
+2
+2
+2

–
–
–
L1
L2
L3

+2

–

0Ω
or INFINITE

NORMAL
NORMAL
READING
READING
(OHMS)
(OHMS)

INFINITE

▲

2.5 to 50 Ω
or
0.25 to 0.7
if using
scale

++

MAGNITUDE
OF CAP
CHARGE TO
INFINITE

ABNORMAL
ABNORMAL
READING
READING
(OHMS)
(OHMS)

LESS
THAN
1M Ω

0Ω
or INFINITE

RESISTANCE TEST FOR 3Ø CONVERTER MODULES (BRIDGE RECT)

▲
L1
L2

●

▲

+ 2 or + 1

●

▲

●
●
●

L3

▲

▲

▲

●

●

–

VOM RESISTANCE SCALE R x 1
+ IS THE POSITIVE POLARITY LEAD *
– IS THE NEGATIVE POLARITY LEAD
* The VOM red lead is not necessarily the positive potential in the resistance mode. For these tests the + lead
refers to the positive potential. Make sure you know which polarity you have on your VOM.

6-27

B . TRANSISTOR MODULE
Measure the resistance across the module terminals with a volt-ohm meter. Set the meter
to the X1 range. The measured resistance should be within the values listed in Table 6-5.
NOTE: If the DC bus fuse is blown (PUF), the values shown below may not be
accurate.
Table 6-5. Transistor Module Resistances
+

–

ON

ON

B1/ + 3/ +1
B1/ + 3/ +1
B1/ + 3/ +1

INFINITE

T1/U
T2/V
T3/W

T1/U
T2/V
T3/W
–
–
–

T1/U
T2/V
T3/W

B1/ + 3/ +1
B1/ + 3/ +1
B1/ + 3/ +1

2.5 to 50 Ω or
0.3 to 0.7 if
using
scale

ABNORMAL
READING
(OHMS)
0Ω

0 Ω or
INFINITE

▲

–
–
–

NORMAL
READING
(OHMS)

T1
T2
T3

RESISTANCE TEST FOR 3Ø TRANSISTOR MODULES

●

▲

▲

●

▲

●

▲

●

▲

▲

●

T1 or
U

B1, + 1 or + 3

●

–

●

T2 or
V

T3 or
W

VOM RESISTANCE SCALE R x 1
+ IS THE POSITIVE POLARITY LEAD *
- IS THE NEGATIVE POLARITY LEAD
* The VOM red lead is not necessarily the positive potential in the resistance mode. For these tests the + lead
refers to the positive potential. Make sure you know which polarity you have on your VOM.

6-28

6.6

CHECKING ENCODER PULSES

In order to check the encoder pulses, an oscilloscope is needed. The pulses can be
checked after they have been processed by the PG-X2 card or at the motor.

WARNING
The following tests require power to be applied to the drive while
the front cover is off. Proper precautions should be taken to
prevent electric shock and damage to the equipment.
A . Checking Encoder Pulses at Test Points on the PG-X2 Card
1 . Remove power from L1, L2, & L3 and wait for the CHARGE light to go out.
2 . Connect the common of the oscilloscope to the test point labeled GND.
3 . Connect one channel of the scope to PA. (If the scope is two channel, connect the
second channel to PB).
4 . Set the scope for 2V/div, 50ms/div, normal trigger, and rising edge trigger.
5 . Apply power to the GPD 515, but do N O T apply a run command.
6 . Turn the motor shaft by hand. As Figure 6-1 shows, there should be pulses on both
channels at a +5V level, 50% duty cycle, and they should be separated by 90
electrical
degrees (half a pulse).
7 . If one or both channels do not have the correct pulses present (i.e. missing pulses,
incorrect duty cycle, improper voltage, etc.), go to procedure B.
B. Checking the Pulses at the Input to the PG-X2 Card
1 . Remove power from L1, L2, & L3 and wait for the CHARGE light to go out.
2 . Connect the common of the scope to terminal 2 of TA1.
3 . Connect one channel of the scope to terminal 4 of TA1. (If the scope is two channel,
connect the second channel to terminal 5 of TA1.)
4 . Set the scope for 5V/div, 50ms/div, normal trigger, and rising edge trigger.
5 . Apply power to the drive, but do N O T apply a run command.
6 . Turn the motor shaft by hand. As Figure 6-1 shows, there should be pulses on both
channels, 50% duty cycle, and they should be the inverse of each other (separated by
180 electrical degrees).
7. Disconnect the two scope channels, and reconnect them to terminals 6 and 7 of TA1.

6-29

NOTE 1: Encoder output voltage should be at or near the encoder power supply voltage.

Figure 6-1. PG-X2 Card Inputs / Test Points
8 . Turn the motor shaft by hand. As Figure 6-1 shows, there should be pulses on both
channels, 50% duty cycle, and they should be the inverse of each other (separated by
180 electrical degrees.
9 . If one or both channels do not have the correct pulses present (i.e. missing pulses,
incorrect duty cycle, improper voltage, etc.), go to procedure C.

6-30

C . Checking the Pulses at a VCM Motor
1 . Remove power from L1, L2, & L3 and wait for the CHARGE light to go out.
2 . Take apart the military style connector at the motor.
3 . Connect the common of the scope to pin F.
4 . Connect one channel of the scope to pin A. (If the scope is two channel, connect the
second channel to pin H.)
5 . Set the scope for 5V/div, 50ms/div, normal trigger, and rising edge trigger.
6 . Apply power to the drive, but do N O T apply a run command.
7 . Turn the motor shaft by hand. As Figure 6-1 shows, there should be pulses on both
channels, 50% duty cycle, and they should be the inverse of each other (separated by
180 electrical degrees).
8 . Disconnect the two scope channels, and reconnect them to pins B and I.
9 . Turn the motor shaft by hand. As Figure 6-1 shows, there should be pulses on both
channels, 50% duty cycle, and they should be the inverse of each other (separated by
180 electrical degrees).
10. If no pulses can be seen on any of the four pins (A, B, H, & I), check the power supply
between pins D and F. If it is not at or near 12VDC, check the power supply back at
the PG-X2 card on TA1 terminals 1 & 2. If the power supply is not good at TA1,
replace the PG-X2 card.

6-31

6-32

Appendix 1.

LISTING OF PARAMETERS

The GPD 515/G5 control circuits use various parameters to select functions and
character-istics of the drive. For methods of changing of parameter settings, see Section
4.
The following tables list all parameters in numerical order. For each parameter, reference
paragraph(s) in Section 2 or 5 are listed (if applicable) where the features of the drive
affected by that parameter are described.
Table A1-1. Drive AX-XX Parameters
PARAMETER

FUNCTION

NUMBER

NAME

DESCRIPTION

INCRE-

SETTING

FACTORY

MENT

RANGE

SETTING

ACCESS LEVEL PARA.
(See Note 2)
REF .
0
1
2
3

A1-00

Language
Selection

0
1
2
3
4
5
6

:
:
:
:
:
:
:

English
Japanese
German
French
Italian
Spanish
Portuguese

1

0-6

0
(See Note 1)

Q Q Q Q

2.3

A1-01

Parameter
Access
Level

0
1
2
3
4

:
:
:
:
:

Operation only
User program
Quick-start
Basic
Advanced

1

0-4

2

Q Q Q Q

5.4
See
Note
2

A1-02

Control
Method
Selection

0
1
2
3

:
:
:
:

V/f control
V/f with PG feedback
Open loop vector
Flux vector

1

0-3

2
(See Note 1)

Q Q Q Q

2.2

A1-03

Initialize
Parameters

0
:
1110 :
2220 :
3330 :

1

0000 9999

0000

Q Q Q Q

5.37

A1-04

Enter
Password

1

0000 9999

0000

Q Q Q Q

A2-01
thru
A2-32

User Program
Access
Parameters

1

b1-01 o2-09

----

A A

No initialize
User initialize
2-wire initialize
3-wire initialize

Select parameters to be
available in User Program
Access Level

A A

NOTES:
1.

Settings of these parameters will not be initialized by programming A 1 - 0 3 t o
“ 1110 ”, “ 2220 ”, or “ 3330 ”.

2.

Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level
( A 1 - 0 1 ) and Control Method ( A 1 - 0 2 ; 0 = V/f, 1 = V/f w/PG, 2 = Open Loop
Vector, 3 = Flux Vector) the drive is programmed for. Each column represents the
Access Level for a given Control Method: Q = Quick-start; B = Basic; A = Advanced;
— = not available.

A1-1

5.4

Table A1-2. Drive bX-XX Parameters
PARAMETER

FUNCTION

NUMBER

NAME

DESCRIPTION

INCRE-

SETTING

FACTORY

MENT

RANGE

SETTING

ACCESS LEVEL PARA.
(See Note 3)
REF .
0
1
2
3

b1-01

Reference
Selection

0
1
2
3
4

:
:
:
:
:

Digital Operator
Terminal
Serial communication
Option PCB
EWS

1

0-4

1

Q Q Q Q 5.25 A,
5.28,
5.36

b1-02

Operation
Method
Selection

0
1
2
3
4

:
:
:
:
:

Digital Operator
Terminal
Serial communication
Option PCB
EWS

1

0-4

1

Q Q Q Q 5.25 A,
5.28

b1-03

Stopping
Method
Selection

0
1
2
3

:
:
:
:

Ramp to stop
Coast to stop
DC injection to stop
Coast with timer

1

0-3
(See Note 1)

0

Q Q Q Q

b1-04

Reverse
Operation
Prohibit

0 : Enable reverse operation
1 : Disable reverse operation

1

0, 1

0

B B

b1-05

Zero-Speed
Operation
(level
determined
by E1-09 )

0
1
2
3

1

0-3

0

— — — A

b1-06

Logic Input
Scan Rate

0 : 2ms – 2 scans
1 : 5ms – 2 scans

1

0, 1

1

A A

A A

b1-07

Local/Remote
Run Selection

0 : Cycle external Run
1 : Accept external Run

1

0, 1

0

A A

A A

5.32A

b1-08

Run Command 0 : Run command is disabled
Selection
during program mode
During
1 : Run command enabled
Program
during program mode

1

0-1

0

A A

A A

5.26

b2-01

DC Injection
Braking Start
Frequency

0.1 Hz

0.0 - 10.0

0.5

B B

B B

5.10,
5.32

b2-02

DC Injection
Braking
Current

1%

0 - 100

50

B B

B —

5.10

b2-03

DC Injection
Braking Time
at Start

0.01
sec

0.00 - 10.00

0.00

B B

B B

5.10

b2-04

DC Injection
Braking Time
at Stop

0.01
sec

0.00 - 10.00

0.00

B B

B B

5.10

b2-08

Field
100% is no load current value
Compensation at Min. frequency (E1-09).
At Start

1%

0 - 500

0

:
:
:
:

Run at frequency reference
Stop
Run at min. freq. ( E1-09 )
Run at zero speed

A1-2

5.10,2
5.40

B B

— — A A

5.50

5.10B

Table A1-2. Drive bX-XX Parameters – Continued
PARAMETER

FUNCTION

NUMBER

NAME

DESCRIPTION

0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

ACCESS LEVEL PARA.
(See Note 3)
REF .
0
1
2
3

INCRE-

SETTING

FACTORY

MENT

RANGE

SETTING

1

0, 1

0
(See Note 2)

A A

b3-01

Speed Search
Selection

b3-02

Speed Search
Deactivation
Current Level

1%

0 - 200

100
(See Note 2)

A — A — 5.32 D

b3-03

Speed Search
Deceleration
Time

0.1
sec

0.0 - 10.0

2.0

A — A — 5.32 D

b4-01

Timer
Function
ON-Delay
Time

0.1
sec

0.0 - 300.0

0.0

A A

A A

5.32 E

b4-02

Timer
Function
OFF-Delay
Time

0.1
sec

0.0 - 300.0

0.0

A A

A A

5.32 E

b5-01

PID Control
Mode
Selection

1

0-4

0

A A

A A

5.36

b5-02

PID
Proportional
Gain

0.01

0.00 - 25.00

1.00

A A

A A

5.36

b5-03

PID Integral
Time

0.1
sec

0.0 - 360.0

1.0

A A

A A

5.36

b5-04

PID Integral
Limit

0.1 %

0.0 - 100.0

100.0

A A

A A

5.36

b5-05

PID
Differential
Time

0.01
sec

0.00 - 10.00

0.00

A A

A A

5.36

b5-06

PID Output
Limit

0.1 %

0.0 - 100.0

100.0

A A

A A

5.36

b5-07

PID Offset
Adjustment

0.01 %

–100.0 100.0

0.0

A A

A A

5.36

b5-08

PID Primary
Delay Time
Constant

0.01
sec

0.00 - 10.00

0.00

A A

A A

5.36

b5-09

PID Output
Selection

1

0, 1

0

A A

A A

5.36D

0
1
2
3

:
:
:
:

Disabled
D=Feedback
D=Feed forward
Reference + PID
(D=Feedback)
4 : Reference + PID
(D=Feed Forward)

0 : Not Inverted
1 : Inverted

A1-3

A A

5.32 D

Table A1-2. Drive bX-XX Parameters – Continued
PARAMETER

FUNCTION

NUMBER

NAME

DESCRIPTION

ACCESS LEVEL PARA.
(See Note 3)
REF .
0
1
2
3

INCRE-

SETTING

FACTORY

MENT

RANGE

SETTING

0.1

0.0 - 25.0

1.0

A A

A A

5.36D

b5-10

PID Output
Gain

b5-11

PID Output
Reverse
Selection

0 : If PID output tries to go
negative, it will be limited
to 0 (motor stops)
1 : PID output is allowed to go
negative (motor runs in
reverse)

1

0, 1

0

A A

A A

5.36D

b5-12

Feedback Loss 0 : Detection is disabled
Detection
1 : Detection is enabled Selection (PID)
alarm only
2 : Detection is enabled - fault

1

0-2

0

A A

A A

5.36E

b5-13

Feedback
Loss Detection
Level (PID)

1%

0 - 100

0

A A

A A

5.36E

b5-14

Feedback
Loss Detection
Delay Time
(PID)

0.1
sec

0.0 - 25.5

1.0

A A

A A

5.36E

b6-01

Dwell
Frequency
at Start

0.1 Hz

0.0 - 400.0

0.0

A A

A A

5.14

b6-02

Dwell Time
at Start

0.1
sec

0.0 - 10.0

0.0

A A

A A

5.14

b6-03

Dwell
Frequency
at Stop

0.1 Hz

0.0 - 400.0

0.0

A A

A A

5.14

b6-04

Dwell Time
at Stop

0.1
sec

0.0 - 10.0

0.0

A A

A A

5.14

b7-01

Droop Control
Level

0.1 %

0.0 - 100.0

0.0

— — — A

5.13

b7-02

Droop Control
Delay Time

0.01
sec

0.03 - 2.00

0.05

— — — A

5.13

b8-01

Energy-saving
Gain

1%

0 - 100

80

A A — —

5.16A

b8-02

Energy-saving
Frequency

0.1 Hz

0.0 - 400.0

0.0

A A — —

5.16A

b8-03

Automatic
Energy-saving
Selection

1

0, 1

0

— — A A

5.16B

b8-04

Automatic
Energy-saving
Gain

0.1

0.0 - 10.0

Note 2

— — A A

5.16B

0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

A1-4

Table A1-2. Drive bX-XX Parameters – Continued
PARAMETER

FUNCTION

NUMBER

NAME

DESCRIPTION

ACCESS LEVEL PARA.
(See Note 3)
REF .
0
1
2
3

INCRE-

SETTING

FACTORY

MENT

RANGE

SETTING

0.01
sec

0.0 - 10.0

Note 2

— — A A

5.16B

b8-05

Automatic
Energy-saving
Time Constant

b9-01

Zero-Servo
Gain

1

0 - 100

5

— — — A

5.49

b9-02

Zero-Servo
Completion
Width

1

0 - 16383

10

— — — A

5.49

NOTES:
1.

Setting range is only 0 and 1 when control method is set to Flux Vector control
( A 1 - 0 2 = 3).

2.

Will change with control method. See Appendix 3, Table A3-2.

3.

Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level
( A 1 - 0 1 ) and Control Method ( A 1 - 0 2; 0 = V/f, 1 - V/f w/PG, 2 = Open Loop
Vector, 3 = Flux Vector) the drive is programmed for. Each column represents the
Access Level for a given Control Method: Q = Quick-start; B = Basic; A = Advanced;
— = not available.

A1-5

Table A1-3. Drive CX-XX Parameters
PARAMETER

FUNCTION

NUMBER

NAME

C1-01

Acceleration
Time 1

C1-02

Deceleration
Time 1

DESCRIPTION

INCRE-

SETTING

FACTORY

MENT

RANGE

SETTING

0.01
sec.
or

0.00 - 600.00

10.00

or

or

0.0 - 6000.0

10.0

0.1
sec.

(Dependent
upon C1-10
(Depensetting)
dent
upon
C1-10
setting)

Q Q Q Q

5.2

Q Q Q Q

5.2

B B

B B

5.2

B B

B B

5.2

A A

A A

5.2

C1-03

Acceleration
Time 2

C1-04

Deceleration
Time 2

C1-05

Acceleration
Time 3

C1-06

Deceleration
Time 3

A A

A A

5.2

C1-07

Acceleration
Time 4

A A

A A

5.2

C1-08

Deceleration
Time 4

A A

A A

5.2

C1-09

Fast-Stop
Decel. Time

B B

B B

5.2

C1-10

Accel/Decel
Time Setting
Unit

C1-11

0 : 0.01 seconds
1 : 0.1 seconds

(Dependent
upon C1-10
setting)

ACCESS LEVEL PARA.
(See Note 3)
REF .
0
1
2
3

1

0, 1

1

A A

A A

5.2

Accel/Decel
Time Switching
Frequency

0.1 Hz

0.0 - 400.0

0.00

A A

A A

5.2

C2-01

S-Curve
Characteristic
at Accel. Start

0.01
sec

0.0 - 2.50

0.20

A A

A A

5.3

C2-02

S-Curve
Characteristic
at Accel. End

0.01
sec

0.0 - 2.50

0.20

A A

A A

5.3

C2-03

S-Curve
Characteristic
at Decel. Start

0.01
sec

0.0 - 2.50

0.20

A A

A A

5.3

C2-04

S-Curve
Characteristic
at Decel. End

0.01
sec

0.0 - 2.50

0.00

A A

A A

5.3

A1-6

Table A1-3. Drive CX-XX Parameters – Continued
PARAMETER

FUNCTION

NUMBER

NAME

C3-01

ACCESS LEVEL PARA.
(See Note 3)
REF .
0
1
2
3

INCRE-

SETTING

FACTORY

MENT

RANGE

SETTING

Slip
Compensation
Gain

0.1

0.0 - 2.5

(See Note 1)

B — B B

5.38

C3-02

Slip
Compensation
Primary Delay
Time

1 ms

0 - 10000

(See Note 1)

A — A —

5.38

C3-03

Slip
Compensation
Limit

1%

0 - 250

200

A — A —

5.38

C3-04

Slip
Compensation
Selection
During
Regeneration

1

0, 1

0

A A

A —

5.38

C3-05

Flux Select

1

0, 1

0

— — A —

5.38

C3-06

Output Voltage 0 : Disabled - Output voltage
Limit
limit and slip compensation
are disabled above base
speed
1 : Enabled - Output voltage
limit and slip compensation
are enabled above base
speed

1

0, 1

0

— — A A

5.38

C4-01

Torque
Compensation
Gain

0.01

0.00 - 2.50

1.00

B B

B —

5.42

C4-02

Torque
Compensation
Time Constant

1 ms

0 - 10000

(See Note 1)

A A

A —

5.42

C4-03

Forward Torque
Compensation
At Start

0.1%

0.0 - 200.0

0.0

— — A —

5.42

C4-04

Reverse Torque
Compensation
At Start

0.1%

-200.0 - 0.0

0.0

— — A —

5.42

C4-05

Torque
Compensation
At Start Time
Constant

1 ms

0 - 200

10

— — A —

5.42

DESCRIPTION

0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

0 : Slip Included - Flux is
calculated after slip
compensation is applied
1 : Slip Excluded - Flux is
calculated before slip
compensation is applied

A1-7

Table A1-3. Drive CX-XX Parameters – Continued
PARAMETER

FUNCTION

NUMBER

NAME

DESCRIPTION

INCRE-

SETTING

FACTORY

MENT

RANGE

SETTING

ACCESS LEVEL PARA.
(See Note 3)
REF .
0
1
2
3

C5-01

ASR
Proportional
Gain 1

0.01

C5-02

ASR Integral
Time 1

0.001
sec

C5-03

ASR
Proportional
Gain 2

0.01

C5-04

ASR Integral
Time 2

0.001
sec

0.000 10.000

C5-05

ASR Limit

0.1 %

0.0 - 20.0

C5-06

ASR Primary
Delay Time

0.001 0.000 - 0.500
sec

C5-07

ASR
Switching
Frequency

0.1 Hz

C5-08

ASR Integral
Limit

1%

C6-01

Carrier
Frequency
Upper Limit

0.1
kHz

0.4 - 15.0
10.0
(See Note 2) (See Note 2)

B B

B B

5.8

C6-02

Carrier
Frequency
Lower Limit

0.1
kHz

0.4 - 15.0
10.0
(See Note 2) (See Note 2)

A A — —

5.8

C6-03

Carrier
Frequency
Proportional
Gain

1

00 - 99
00
(See Note 2) (See Note 2)

A A — —

5.8

C7-01

Hunting
Prevention
Selection

C7-02

Hunting
Prevention
Gain

0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

0.00 - 300.00 (See Note 1) — B — B

0.000 10.000

5.7

(See Note 1) — B — B

5.7

0.00 - 300.00 (See Note 1) — B — B

5.7

(See Note 1) — B — B

5.7

5.0

— A — —

0.004

— — — A

5.7

0.0 - 400.0

0.0

— — — A

5.7

0 - 400

400

— — — A

1

0, 1

1

A A — —

5.23

0.01

0.00 - 2.50

1.00

A A — —

5.23

A1-8

Table A1-3. Drive CX-XX Parameters – Continued
PARAMETER

FUNCTION

NUMBER

NAME

DESCRIPTION

INCRE-

SETTING

FACTORY

MENT

RANGE

SETTING

ACCESS LEVEL PARA.
(See Note 3)
REF .
0
1
2
3

C8-08

AFR Gain

0.01

0.00 - 10.00

1.00

— — A —

5.6

C8-09

AFR Time

1 ms

0 - 2000

50

— — A —

5.6

C8-30

Carrier
Frequency
During AutoTuning

1

0, 1

2

— — A —

0 : Fc = 2 kHz
1 : Fc = C6-01
2 : Fc = 5 kHz

NOTES:
1.

Factory setting differs depending on the control method ( A 1 - 0 2 ) .

2.

Setting range and factory setting differ depending on drive capacity and the control
method.

3.

Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level
( A 1 - 0 1 ) and Control Method ( A 1 - 0 2 ; 0 = V/f, 1 = V/f w/PG, 2 = Open Loop
Vector, 3 = Flux Vector) the drive is programmed for. Each column represents the
Access Level for a given Control Method: Q = Quick-start; B = Basic; A = Advanced;
— = not available.

A1-9

Table A1-4. Drive dX-XX Parameters
PARAMETER

FUNCTION

NUMBER

NAME

DESCRIPTION

INCRE-

SETTING

FACTORY

MENT

RANGE

SETTING

ACCESS LEVEL PARA.
(See Note 1)
REF .
0
1
2
3

d1-01

Frequency
Reference 1

0.1 Hz

0.00 - 400.0

0.00

Q Q Q Q 5.25 B

d1-02

Frequency
Reference 2

0.1 Hz

0.00 - 400.0

0.00

Q Q Q Q 5.25 B

d1-03

Frequency
Reference 3

0.1 Hz

0.00 - 400.0

0.00

Q Q Q Q 5.25 B

d1-04

Frequency
Reference 4

0.1 Hz

0.00 - 400.0

0.00

Q Q Q Q 5.25 B

d1-05

Frequency
Reference 5

0.1 Hz

0.00 - 400.0

0.00

B B

B B

5.25 B

d1-06

Frequency
Reference 6

0.1 Hz

0.00 - 400.0

0.00

B B

B B

5.25 B

d1-07

Frequency
Reference 7

0.1 Hz

0.00 - 400.0

0.00

B B

B B

5.25 B

d1-08

Frequency
Reference 8

0.1 Hz

0.00 - 400.0

0.00

B B

B B

5.25 B

d1-09

Jog Frequency
Reference

0.1 Hz

0.00 - 400.0

6.00

Q Q Q Q

5.24,
5.25 B

d2-01

Frequency
Reference
Upper Limit

0.1 %

0.0 - 110.0

100.0

B B

B B

5.22,
5.32 G

d2-02

Frequency
Reference
Lower Limit

0.1 %

0.0 - 109.0

0.0

B B

B B

5.22

d3-01

Critical
Frequency
Rejection 1

0.1 Hz

0.0 - 400.0

0.0

B B

B B

5.9

d3-02

Critical
Frequency
Rejection 2

0.1 Hz

0.0 - 400.0

0.0

B B

B B

5.9

d3-03

Critical
Frequency
Rejection 3

0.1 Hz

0.0 - 400.0

0.0

B B

B B

5.9

d3-04

Critical
Frequency
Rejection
Width

0.1 Hz

0.0 - 20.0

1.0

B B

B B

5.9

d4-01

Frequency
Reference
Hold
Function
Selection

1

0, 1

0

A A

A A

5.21,
5.32 G

0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

A1-10

Table A1-4. Drive dX-XX Parameters – Continued
PARAMETER

FUNCTION

NUMBER

NAME

DESCRIPTION

ACCESS LEVEL PARA.
(See Note 1)
REF .
0
1
2
3

INCRE-

SETTING

FACTORY

MENT

RANGE

SETTING

1%

0 - 100

10

A A

1

0, 1

0

— — — A

5.43

1 ms

0 - 1000

0

— — — A

5.43

1

1, 2

1

— — — A

5.43

d4-02

Trim Control
Level

d5-01

Torque Control
Selection

d5-02

Torque
Reference
Delay Time

d5-03

Speed Limit
Selection

d5-04

Speed Limit

1%

–120 - +120

0

— — — A

5.43

d5-05

Speed Limit
Bias

1%

0 - 120

10

— — — A

5.43

d5-06

Speed/Torque
Control
Switching
Timer

1 ms

0 - 1000

0

— — — A

5.43

0 : Speed Control
1 : Torque Control

1 : Analog input
(term. 13 & 14)
2 : d5-04 setting

A A

NOTES:
1.

Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level
( A 1 - 0 1 ) and Control Method ( A 1 - 0 2 ; 0 = V/f, 1 = V/f w/PG, 2 = Open Loop
Vector, 3 = Flux Vector) the drive is programmed for. Each column represents the
Access Level for a given Control Method: Q = Quick-start; B = Basic; A = Advanced;
— = not available.

A1-11

5.32 H

Table A1-5. Drive EX-XX Parameters
PARAMETER

FUNCTION

NUMBER

NAME

DESCRIPTION

ACCESS LEVEL PARA.
(See Note 1)
REF .
0
1
2
3

INCRE-

SETTING

FACTORY

MENT

RANGE

SETTING

1V

155 - 255
(230V ratings)
310 - 510
(460V ratings)
445 - 733
(600V ratings)

230
(230V ratings)
460
(460V ratings)
575
(600V ratings)

Q

Q

Q

Q

5.48

1

0-2

0

Q

Q

Q

Q

5.41

1H

0-F

F

Q

Q

-

-

5.47

E1-01

Input Voltage
Setting

E1-02

Motor
Selection

0 : General Purpose motor
(TEFC)
1 : Blower Cooled motor
(TENV or TEBC)
2 : Vector Motor

E1-03

V/f Pattern
Selection

0 to E : 15 preset V/f patterns
F : Custom pattern using E1-04
thru E1-10

E1-04

Maximum
Output
Frequency

0.1 Hz

40.0 - 400.0

60.0

Q

Q

Q

Q

2.4,
5.48

E1-05

Maximum
Voltage

0.1 V

0.0 - 255.0
(230V ratings)
0.0 - 510.0
(460V ratings)
0.0 - 733.1
(600V ratings)

230.0
(230V ratings)
460.0
(460V ratings)
575.0
(600V ratings)

Q

Q

Q

Q

2.4,
5.48

E1-06

Base
Frequency

0.1 Hz

0.0 - 400.0

60.0

Q

Q

Q

Q

2.4,
5.48

E1-07

Mid. Output
Frequency A

0.1 Hz

0.0 - 400.0

(See Note 1)

Q

Q

A

-

5.48

E1-08

Mid. Output
Voltage A

0.1 V

(See Note 1)
12.6
(460V ratings)
25.3
(460V ratings)
36.3
(600V ratings)

Q

Q

A

-

5.48

0.0 - 255.0
(230V ratings)
0.0 - 510.0
(460V ratings)
0.0 - 733.1
(600V ratings)

E1-09

Min. Output
Frequency

0.1 Hz

0.0 - 400.0

(See Note 1)

Q

Q

A

A

5.48

E1-10

Min. Output
Voltage A

0.1 V

(See Note 1)
2.3
(460V ratings)
4.6
(460V ratings)
6.5
(600V ratings)

Q

Q

A

-

5.48

0.0 - 255.0
(230V ratings)
0.0 - 510.0
(460V ratings)
0.0 - 733.1
(600V ratings)

E1-11

Mid. Output
Frequency B

0.1 Hz

0.0 - 400.0

0.0

A

A

A

A

5.48

E1-12

Mid. Output
Voltage B

0.1 V

0.0 - 255.0
(230V ratings)
0.0 - 510.0
(460V ratings)
0.0 - 733.1
(600V ratings)

0.0

A

A

Q

Q

5.48

E1-13

Base Voltage

0.1 V

0.0 - 255.0
(230V ratings)
0.0 - 510.0
(460V ratings)
0.0 - 733.1
(600V ratings)

0.0

A

A

Q

Q

5.48

A1-12

Table A1-5. Drive EX-XX Parameters – Continued
FUNCTION

NUMBER

NAME

E2-01

Motor Rated
Current

E2-02

Motor Rated
Slip

E2-03

Motor No-load
Current

E2-04

Number of
Motor Poles

1
pole

2 - 48

4

E2-05

Motor
Line-to-line
Resistance

0.001
Ω

0.000 65.000

(See Note 3)

E2-06

Motor Leakage
Inductance

0.1 %

0.0 - 40.0

E2-07

Motor
Iron-core
Saturation
Coefficient 1

0.01

0.00 - 0.50

0.50

— — A A

2.4

E2-08

Motor
Iron-core
Saturation
Coefficient 2

0.01

0.50 - 0.75

0.75

— — A A

2.4

E2-09

Motor
Mechanical
Loss

0.1 %

0.0 - 10.0

0.0

— — — A

2.4

E2-10

Torque
Compensation
Iron Loss

1W

0 - 65535

(See
Note 3)

A A — —

E3-01

Control
Method
Selection
(Motor 2)

1

0-3

E4-01

Maximum
Output
Frequency
(Motor 2)
Maximum
Voltage
(Motor 2)

0.1 Hz 40.0 - 400.0

E4-03

Base
Frequency
(Motor 2)

0.1 Hz

0.0 - 400.0

E4-04

Mid. Output
Frequency
(Motor 2)

0.1 Hz

0.0 - 400.0

E4-02

DESCRIPTION

INCRE-

SETTING

FACTORY

MENT

RANGE

SETTING

ACCESS LEVEL PARA.
(See Note 4)
REF .
0
1
2
3

PARAMETER

(See 0.00 - 1500.0 (See Note 3)
Note 2)

Q Q Q Q

2.4,
5.41

(See Note 3)

A A

Q Q

2.4

0.01 A 0.00 - 1500.0 (See Note 3)

A A

Q Q

2.4

— Q — Q

2.4

A A

A A

2.4

(See Note 3) — — A A

2.4

0.01
Hz

0
1
2
3

: V/f control
: V/f with PG feedback
: Open loop vector
: Flux vector

0.1 V

A1-13

0.00 - 20.00

Q Q Q Q
2
(See Note 5)

5.45.1

Q Q

5.45.1

0.0 - 255.0
Q Q Q Q
230.0
(230V ratings) (230V ratings)
0.0 - 510.0
460.0
(460V ratings) (460V ratings)
0.0 - 733.1
575.0
(600V ratings) (600V ratings)

5.45.1

60.0

Q Q Q Q

5.45.1

(See Note 1)

Q Q Q Q

5.45.1

60.0

Q Q

Table A1-5. Drive EX-XX Parameters – Continued
PARAMETER

FUNCTION

NUMBER

NAME

DESCRIPTION

INCRE-

SETTING

FACTORY

MENT

RANGE

SETTING

E4-05

Mid. Output
Voltage
(Motor 2)

0.1 Hz

E4-06

Min. Output
Frequency
(Motor 2)

0.1 Hz

E4-07

Min. Output
Voltage
(Motor 2)

0.1 V

E5-01

Rated
Current
(Motor 2)

E5-02

Rated
Slip
(Motor 2)

E5-03

No-load
Current
(Motor 2)

E5-04

Number of
Motor Poles
(Motor 2)

2
poles

2 - 48

4

E5-05

Line-to-line
Resistance
(Motor 2)

0.001
Ω

0.000 65.000

(See Note 3)

E5-06

Leakage
Inductance
(Motor 2)

0.1%

0.0 - 40.0

ACCESS LEVEL PARA.
(See Note 4)
REF .
0
1
2
3

(See Note 1) Q Q Q Q
0.0 - 255.0
12.6
(230V ratings) (230V ratings)
0.0 - 510.0
25.3
(460V ratings) (460V ratings)
0.0 - 733.1
36.3
(600V ratings) (600V ratings)
0.0 - 400.0

(See Note 1)

5.45.1

Q Q Q A

5.45.1

(See Note 1) Q Q Q Q
0.0 - 255.0
2.3
(230V ratings) (230V ratings)
0.0 - 510.0
4.6
(460V ratings) (460V ratings)
0.0 - 733.1
6.5
(600V ratings) (600V ratings)

5.45.1

(See 0.00 - 1500.0 (See Note 3)
Note 2) (See Note 3)

Q Q Q Q

5.45.1

(See Note 3)

A A

Q Q

5.45.1

(See 0.00 - 1500.0 (See Note 3)
Note 2)

A A

Q Q

5.45.1

— A — A

5.45.1

A A

A A

5.45.1

(See Note 3) — — A A

5.45.1

0.01
Hz

0.00 - 20.00

NOTES: 1 . Factory setting differs depending on the selected Control Method ( A 1 - 0 2 ) .
2 . Setting increment is 0.01A for models GPD515C-A003 thru -A033 (CIMR-G5M20P41F thru
27P51F), -B001 thru -B021 (40P41F thru 47P51F), and -C003 thru -C012 (51P51F thru
57P51F).
Setting increment is 0.1A for models GPD515C-A049 thru -A300 (CIMR-G5M20111F thru
20750F), -B001 thru -B011 (40111F thru 43000F), and -C017 thru -C200 (50111F thru
51600F).
3 . Factory setting differs depending on drive capacity.
4 . Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level
( A 1 - 0 1 ) and Control Method ( A 1 - 0 2 ; 0 = V/f, 1 = V/f w/PG, 2 = Open Loop
Vector, 3 = Flux Vector) the drive is programmed for. Each column represents the
Access Level for a given Control Method: Q = Quick-start; B = Basic; A = Advanced;
— = not available.
5 . Settings of these parameters will not be initialized by programming A 1 - 0 3 t o
“1110”, “2220”, or “3330”.

A1-14

Table A1-6. Drive FX-XX Parameters
PARAMETER

FUNCTION

NUMBER

NAME

F1-01

Encoder (PG)
Constant

F1-02

Operation
Selection at
PG Open
Circuit

0
1
2
3

:
:
:
:

F1-03

Operation
Selection at
Overspeed

0
1
2
3

F1-04

Operation
Selection at
Speed
Deviation

0
1
2
3

F1-05

ACCESS LEVEL PARA.
(See Note 2)
REF .
0
1
2
3

INCRE-

SETTING

FACTORY

MENT

RANGE

SETTING

1 ppr

0 - 60000

1024

Ramp to stop
Coast to stop
Fast-stop
Alarm only

1

0-3

1

— B — B

5.15 B

:
:
:
:

Ramp to stop
Coast to stop
Fast-stop
Alarm only

1

0-3

1

— B — B

5.15 C

:
:
:
:

Ramp to stop
Coast to stop
Fast-stop
Alarm only

1

0-3

3

— B — B

5.15 D

PG Rotation

0 : Counter-clockwise
1 : Clockwise

1

0, 1

0

— B — B

5.15 E

F1-06

PG Division
Rate (PG
Pulse Monitor

Effective only with control
circuit board PG-B2

1

1 - 132

1

— B — B Separate
Opt. Instr.
Sheet

F1-07

Integral Value
During
Accel/Decel
Selection

0 : Disabled
1 : Enable

1

0, 1

0

— B — — 5.15 F

F1-08

Overspeed
Detection
Level

1%

0 - 120

115

F1-09

Overspeed
Detection
Delay Time

0.1
sec

0.0 - 2.0

F1-10

Excessive
Speed
Deviation
Detection
Level

1%

0 - 50

10

— A — A

5.15 D

F1-11

Excessive
Speed
Deviation
Detection
Delay Time

0.1
sec

0.0 - 10.0

0.5

— A — A

5.15 D

F1-12

Number of PG
Gear Teeth 1

1

0 - 1000

0

— A — — 5.15 G

F1-13

Number of PG
Gear Teeth 2

1

0 - 1000

0

— A — — 5.15 G

F1-14

PGo Detect
Time

0.1
sec

0.0 - 10.0

2.0

DESCRIPTION

A1-15

— Q — Q 2.2 B,D,
5.15 A

— A — A

5.15 C

(See Note 1) — A — A

5.15 C

— A — A

5.15 B

Table A1-6. Drive FX-XX Parameters – Continued
PARAMETER

FUNCTION

NUMBER

NAME

F2-01

AI-14 Bi-polar
or Uni-polar
Input
Selection

F3-01

DI-16 Digital
Input Option

F4-01

ACCESS LEVEL PARA.
(See Note 2)
REF .
0
1
2
3

INCRE-

SETTING

FACTORY

MENT

RANGE

SETTING

1

0, 1

0

B B

B — Separate
Option
Instr.
Sheet

1

0-7

0

B B

B B Separate
Option
Instr.
Sheet

AO-08 / AO-12
Channel 1
Monitor
Selection

1

1 - 38

2

B B

B B Separate
Option
Instr.
Sheet

F4-02

AO-08 / AO-12
Channel 1
Gain

0.01

0.00 - 2.50

1.00

B B

B B Separate
Option
Instr.
Sheet

F4-03

AO-08 / AO-12
Channel 2
Monitor
Selection

1

1 - 38

3

B B

B B Separate
Option
Instr.
Sheet

F4-04

AO-08 / AO-12
Channel 2
Gain

0.01

0.00 - 2.50

0.50

B B

B B Separate
Option
Instr.

F4-05

AO-08 / AO-12
Channel 1
Bias

0.1%

-10.0 - 10.0

0.0

B B

B B Separate
Option
Instr.
Sheet

F4-06

AO-08 / AO-12
Channel 2
Bias

0.1%

-10.0 - 10.0

0.0

B B

B B Separate
Option
Instr.
Sheet

F5-01

DO-02
Channel 1
Output
Selection

1

0 - 37

0

B B

B B Separate
Option
Instr.
Sheet

F5-02

DO-02
Channel 2
Output
Selection

1

0 - 37

1

B B

B B Separate
Option
Instr.
Sheet

F6-01

DO-08 Output
Mode
Selection

0 : 8-channel individual
1 : Binary output

1

0, 1

0

B B

B B Separate
Option
Instr.
Sheet

F7-01

PO-36F
Frequency
Multiple
Selection

0
1
2
3
4

1

0-4

1

B B

B B Separate
Option
Instr.
Sheet

DESCRIPTION

0 : 3-channel individual
1 : 3-channel addition

0 : BCD 1%
5 : BCD 0.01 Hz
1 : BCD 0.1 % 6 : BCD (5DG)
2 : BCD 0.01 %
0.01 Hz
3 : BCD 1 Hz
7 : Binary
4 : BCD 0.1 Hz

:
:
:
:
:

1 x Output frequency
6 x Output frequency
10 x Output frequency
12 x Output frequency
36 x Output frequency

A1-16

Table A1-6. Drive FX-XX Parameters – Continued
PARAMETER

FUNCTION

NUMBER

NAME

DESCRIPTION

INCRE-

SETTING

FACTORY

MENT

RANGE

SETTING

ACCESS LEVEL PARA.
(See Note 2)
REF .
0
1
2
3

F8-01

Communication 0 : Rampt to Stop
Error (E-15)
1 : Coast to Stop
Detection
2 : Fast Stop
Selection
3 : Alarm Only

1

0, 1

1

B B

B —

F9-01

Option
External Fault
(EFO)
Selection

0 : Normally Open
1 : Normally Closed

1

0, 1

0

A A

A A

F9-02

Option
External Fault
(EFO)
Detection

0 : Always Detected
1 : Only During Run

1

0, 1

0

A A

A A

F9-03

Option
External Fault
(EFO)
Action

0
1
2
3

1

0-3

1

A A

A A

F9-04

Trace
Sample
Time

1

0 - 60,000

0

A A

A A

F9-05

Torque
Reference
Limit
Selection

0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

1

0, 1

1

— — — A

F9-06

DP-RAM
Communication
(BUS) Fault
Selection

0
1
2
3

1

0-3

1

A A

:
:
:
:

:
:
:
:

Ramp to Stop
Coast to Stop
Fast Stop
Alarm Only

Ramp to Stop
Coast to Stop
Fast Stop
Alarm Only

A A

NOTES:
1.

Factory setting differs depending on the selected Control Method ( A 1 - 0 2 ) - see
Table A3-2.

2.

Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level
( A 1 - 0 1 ) and Control Method ( A 1 - 0 2 ; 0 = V/f, 1 = V/f w/PG, 2 = Open Loop
Vector, 3 = Flux Vector) the drive is programmed for. Each column represents the
Access Level for a given Control Method: Q = Quick-start; B = Basic; A = Advanced;
— = not available.

A1-17

Table A1-7. Drive HX-XX Parameters
PARAMETER

FUNCTION

NUMBER

NAME

H1-01

ACCESS LEVEL PARA.
(See Note 2)
REF .
0
1
2
3

INCRE-

SETTING

FACTORY

MENT

RANGE

SETTING

Multi-function
Input
(Terminal 3)

1

0 - 77

24

B B

B B

5.16,
5.25,
5.32

H1-02

Multi-function
Input
(Terminal 4)

1

0 - 77

14

B B

B B

5.16,
5.25,
5.32

H1-03

Multi-function
Input
(Terminal 5)

1

0 - 77

3 (0)
(See Note 1)

B B

B B

5.16,
5.25,
5.32

H1-04

Multi-function
Input
(Terminal 6)

1

0 - 77

4 (3)
(See Note 1)

B B

B B

5.16,
5.25,
5.32

H1-05

Multi-function
Input
(Terminal 7)

1

0 - 77

6 (4)
(See Note 1)

B B

B B

5.16,
5.25,
5.32

H1-06

Multi-function
Input
(Terminal 8)

1

0 - 77

8 (6)
(See Note 1)

B B

B B

5.16,
5.25,
5.32

H2-01

Multi-function
Output
(Term. 9 & 10)

1

0 - 37

0

B B

B B

5.33

H2-02

Multi-function
Output
(Term. 25-27)

1

0 - 37

1

B B

B B

5.33

H2-03

Multi-function
Output
(Term. 26-27)

1

0 - 37

2

B B

B B

5.33

H3-01

Auto Speed
Reference
Signal Level
Selection
(Terminal 13)

1

0, 1

0

B B

B B

5.19

H3-02

Auto Speed
Reference
Signal Gain
(Terminal 13)

0.1 %

0.0 - 1000.0

100.0

B B

B B

5.18

H3-03

Auto Speed
Reference
Signal Bias
(Terminal 13)

0.1 %

–100.0 +100.0

0.0

B B

B B

5.18

DESCRIPTION

0 : 0 to 10 VDC
1 : ±10 VDC

A1-18

Table A1-7. Drive HX-XX Parameters – Continued
PARAMETER

FUNCTION

NUMBER

NAME

DESCRIPTION

0 : 0 to 10 VDC
1 : ±10 VDC

ACCESS LEVEL PARA.
(See Note 2)
REF .
0
1
2
3

INCRE-

SETTING

FACTORY

MENT

RANGE

SETTING

1

0, 1

0

B B

B B

5.19

H3-04

Multi-function
Analog Input 1
Signal Level
Selection
(Terminal 16)

H3-05

Multi-function
Analog
Input 1
Selection
(Terminal 16)

1

0 - 1F

0

B B

B B

5.30

H3-06

Multi-function
Analog
Input 1 Gain
(Terminal 16)

0.1 %

0.0 - 1000.0

100.0

B B

B B

5.18

H3-07

Multi-function
Analog
Input 1 Bias
(Terminal 16)

0.1 %

–100.0 +100.0

0.0

B B

B B

5.18

H3-08

Multi-function
Analog Input 2
Signal Level
Selection
(Terminal 14)

1

0-2

2

A A

A A

5.19

H3-09

Multi-function
Analog
Input 2
Selection
(Terminal 14)

1

0 - 1F

1F

A A

A A

5.30

H3-10

Multi-function
Analog
Input 2 Gain
(Terminal 14)

0.1 %

0.0 - 1000.0

100.0

A A

A A

5.18

H3-11

Multi-function
Analog
Input 2 Bias
(Terminal 14)

0.1 %

–100.0 +100.0

0.0

A A

A A

5.18

H3-12

Analog Input
Filter Time
Constant

0.01
sec

0.00 - 2.00

0.00

A A

A A

H4-01

Multi-function
Analog
Monitor 1
Selection
(Terminal 21)

1

1 - 38

2

B B

B B

5.31

H4-02

Multi-function
Analog
Monitor 1 Gain
(Terminal 21)

0.01

0.00 - 2.50

1.00

B B

B B

5.31

0 : 0 to 10 VDC
1 : ±10 VDC
2 : 4-20 mA

A1-19

Table A1-7. Drive HX-XX Parameters – Continued
PARAMETER

FUNCTION

NUMBER

NAME

H4-03

Multi-function
Analog
Monitor 1 Bias
(Terminal 21)

H4-04

Multi-function
Analog
Monitor 2
Selection
(Terminal 23)

H4-05

Multi-function
Analog
Monitor 2 Gain
(Terminal 23)

H4-06

Multi-function
Analog
Monitor 2 Bias
(Terminal 23)

H4-07

Multi-function
Analog Monitor
Signal Level
Selection
(Term. 21 & 23)

H5-01

Serial Comm.
Station
Address

H5-02

Serial Comm.
Baud Rate

0
1
2
3
4

H5-03

DESCRIPTION

INCRE-

SETTING

FACTORY

MENT

RANGE

SETTING

0.1 % –10.0 - +10.0

0.0

B B

B B

5.31

1

1 - 38

3

B B

B B

5.31

0.01

0.00 - 2.50

0.50

B B

B B

5.31

0.0

B B

B B

5.31

0.1 % –10.0 - +10.0

0 : 0 to 10 VDC
1 : ±10 VDC

ACCESS LEVEL PARA.
(See Note 2)
REF .
0
1
2
3

1

0, 1

0

B B

B B

5.31

1

0 - 1F

1F

A A

A A

5.28

1200 baud
2400 baud
4800 baud
9600 baud
19.2 kbaud

1

0-4

3

A A

A A

5.28

Serial Comm.
Parity Select

0 : No parity
1 : Even parity
2 : Odd parity

1

0-2

0

A A

A A

5.28

H5-04

Stopping
Method After
Serial Comm.
Error

0
1
2
3

1

0-3

3

A A

A A

5.28

H5-05

Serial Comm.
Fault Detect

0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

1

0, 1

1

A A

A A

5.28

:
:
:
:
:

:
:
:
:

Ramp to stop
Coast to stop
Fast-stop
Alarm only

NOTES:
1.

Factory settings in the parentheses are values obtained at a 3-wire initialization.

2.

Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level
( A 1 - 0 1 ) and Control Method ( A 1 - 0 2 ; 0 = V/f, 1 = V/f w/PG, 2 = Open Loop
Vector, 3 = Flux Vector) the drive is programmed for. Each column represents the
Access Level for a given Control Method: Q = Quick-start; B = Basic; A = Advanced;
— = not available.

A1-20

Table A1-8. Drive LX-XX Parameters
PARAMETER

FUNCTION

NUMBER

NAME

DESCRIPTION

0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled (Coast to Stop)

ACCESS LEVEL PARA.
(See Note 4)
REF .
0
1
2
3

INCRE-

SETTING

FACTORY

MENT

RANGE

SETTING

1

0, 1

1

B B

B B

5.41

0.1
min

0.1 - 20.0

8.0

B B

B B

5.41

1

0-2

0

B B

B B

5.29

L1-01

Motor
Overload
Protection
Selection

L1-02

Motor
Overload
Protection
Time Constant

L2-01

Momentary
Power Loss
Detection
Selection

L2-02

Momentary
Power Loss
Ride-thru Time

0.1
sec

0.0 - 2.0

(See Note 1)

B B

B B

5.29

L2-03

Momentary
Power Loss
Minimum Base
Block Time

0.1
sec

0.1 - 5.0

(See Note 1)

B B

B B

5.32 D

L2-04

Momentary
Power Loss
Recovery
Ramp Time

0.1
sec

0.0 - 5.0

(See Note 1)

A A

A A

5.32 D

L2-05

Undervoltage
Detection
Level

1V
sec

A A

A A

5.29

L2-06

KEB
Frequency

L3-01

Stall
Prevention
Selection
During Accel

L3-02

0 : Disabled
1 : Power loss ride-thru
2 : CPU power active

150 -210
(230V ratings)
300 - 420
(460V ratings)
431 - 603
(600V ratings)

190
(230V ratings)
380
(460V ratings)
546
(600V ratings)

0.1 %

0.0 - 100.0

0.0

A A

A A

1

0-2

1

B B

B —

5.39

Stall
Prevention
Level During
Accel

1%

0 - 200

150

B B

B —

5.39

L3-03

Stall
Prevention
Level During
Accel (CHP)

1%

0 - 100

50

A A

A —

5.39

L3-04

Stall
Prevention
Selection
During Decel

1

0-3

1

B B

B B

5.39

0 : Disabled
1 : General-purpose
2 : Intelligent (See Note 2)

0
1
2
3

:
:
:
:

Disabled
General-purpose
Intelligent (See Note 2)
Stall Prevent w/Resistor

A1-21

Table A1-8. Drive LX-XX Parameters – Continued
PARAMETER

FUNCTION

NUMBER

NAME

DESCRIPTION

0 : Disabled
1 : Decel time 1
2 : Decel time 2

ACCESS LEVEL PARA.
(See Note 4)
REF .
0
1
2
3

INCRE-

SETTING

FACTORY

MENT

RANGE

SETTING

1

0-2

1

B B — —

5.39

L3-05

Stall
Prevention
Selection
During
Running

L3-06

Stall
Prevention
Level During
Running

1%

30 - 200

160

B B — —

5.39

L4-01

Speed
Coincidence
Frequency

0.1 Hz

0.0 - 400.0

0.0

B B

B B

5.33

L4-02

Speed
Coincidence
Width

0.1 Hz

0.0 - 20.0

2.0

B B

B B

5.33

L4-03

Speed
Coincidence
Frequency (±)

0.1 Hz

–400.0 +400.0

0.0

A A

A A

5.33

L4-04

Speed
Coincidence
Width (±)

0.1 Hz

0.0 - 20.0

2.0

A A

A A

5.33

L4-05

Frequency
Reference
Loss
Detection
Selection

1

0, 1

0

A A

A A

5.20

L5-01

Number of
Auto Restart
Attempts

1
time

0 - 10

0

B B

B B

5.5

L5-02

Auto Restart
Operation
Selection

0 : No fault relay
1 : Fault relay active

1

0, 1

0

B B

B B

5.5

L6-01

Torque
Detection
Selection 1

0 : Disabled
1 : Detected during speed
agree, and operation
continues after detection
2 : Detected during running,
and operation continues
after detection
3 : Detected during speed
agree, and drive faults
4 : Detected during running,
and drive faults

1

0-4

0

B B

B B

5.44

0 : Stop
1 : Run at 80% of frequency
reference

A1-22

Table A1-8. Drive LX-XX Parameters – Continued
PARAMETER

FUNCTION

NUMBER

NAME

DESCRIPTION

INCRE-

SETTING

FACTORY

MENT

RANGE

SETTING

ACCESS LEVEL PARA.
(See Note 4)
REF .
0
1
2
3

L6-02

Torque
Detection
Level 1

1%

0 - 300

150

B B

B B

5.44

L6-03

Torque
Detection
Time 1

0.1
sec

0.0 - 10.0

0.1

B B

B B

5.44

L6-04

Torque
Detection
Selection 2

1

0-4

0

A A

A A

5.44

L6-05

Torque
Detection
Level 2

1%

0 - 300

150

A A

A A

5.44

L6-06

Torque
Detection
Time 2

0.1
sec

0.0 - 10.0

0.1

A A

A A

5.44

L7-01

Forward
Torque Limit

1%

0 - 300

200

— — B B

5.45

L7-02

Reverse
Torque Limit

1%

0 - 300

200

— — B B

5.45

L7-03

Forward
Regenerative
Torque Limit

1%

0 - 300

200

— — B B

5.45

L7-04

Reverse
Regenerative
Torque Limit

1%

0 - 300

200

— — B B

5.45

L8-01

Internal
Dynamic
Braking
Resistor
Protection

1

0, 1

0

B B

B B

5.27

L8-02

OH (Overheat)
Protection
Alarm Level

1 °C

50 - 130

(See Note 1)

A A

A A

5.27

0 : Disabled
1 : Detected during speed
agree, and operation
continues after detection
2 : Detected during running,
and operation continues
after detection
3 : Detected during speed
agree, and drive faults
4 : Detected during running,
and drive faults

0 : Not provided
1 : Provided

A1-23

Table A1-8. Drive LX-XX Parameters – Continued
PARAMETER

FUNCTION

NUMBER

NAME

DESCRIPTION

:
:
:
:

Ramp to stop
Coast to stop
Fast-stop
Alarm only

ACCESS LEVEL PARA.
(See Note 4)
REF .
0
1
2
3

INCRE-

SETTING

FACTORY

MENT

RANGE

SETTING

1

0-3

3

A A

A A

5.27

L8-03

Operation
Selection After
OH (Overheat)
Pre-alarm

0
1
2
3

L8-05

Input
Open-phase
Protection
Selection

0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

1

0, 1

0

A A

A A

5.34

L8-07

Output
Open-phase
Protection
Selection

0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

1

0, 1

1

A A

A A

5.35

L8-10

Output Ground
Fault Detection
Selection

0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

1

0, 1

1

A A

A A

5.27

L8-17

IGBT
Protection
at Low
Frequency

0 : Conventional
1 : Lower carrier frequency
when I > 100% and
Fout < 10.0 Hz
2 : Short Term OL2
(2 seconds if Fout
< 6.0 Hz and I > 175%
3 : Limit current to 150%

1

0-3

1

A A

A —

5.27

L8-19

OL2 Selection
at Low Speed

0 : Low frequency OL2
disabled
1 : Low frequency OL2
enabled

1

0, 1

0

A A

A A

5.27

NOTES:
1.

Factory setting differs depending on drive capacity.

2.

When Vector control ( A 1 - 0 2 = 2 or 3) is selected, set value 2 (Intelligent) cannot
be set.

3.

Factory setting differs depending on the Control Method selected by ( A 1 - 0 2 ) .

4.

Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level
( A 1 - 0 1 ) and Control Method ( A 1 - 0 2 ; 0 = V/f, 1 = V/f w/PG, 2 = Open Loop
Vector, 3 = Flux Vector) the drive is programmed for. Each column represents the
Access Level for a given Control Method: Q = Quick-start; B = Basic; A = Advanced;
— = not available.

A1-24

Table A1-9. Drive oX-XX Parameters
PARAMETER

FUNCTION

NUMBER

NAME

DESCRIPTION

ACCESS LEVEL PARA.
(See Note 2)
REF .
0
1
2
3

INCRE-

SETTING

FACTORY

MENT

RANGE

SETTING

1

4 - 38

6

B B

B B

5.12

1

1-4

1

B B

B B

5.12

1

0 - 39999

0

B B

B B

5.11

o1-01

Monitor
Selection

o1-02

Monitor
Selection
After Power-up

o1-03

Digital
Operator
Display
Selection

o1-04

Digital
Operator
Display Units

0 : Hz
1 : RPM

1

0, 1

0

— — — B

5.11

o1-05

Parameter /
Address
Display
Selection

0 : Parameter number
1 : MODBUS address

1

0, 1

0

A A

A A

5.11

o2-01

LOCAL/
REMOTE Key
Selection

0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

1

0, 1

1

B B

B B

5.26

o2-02

STOP Key
Function
During
Remote Run

0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

1

0, 1

1

B B

B B

5.26

o2-03

User
Parameter
Default Value

0 : Disabled
1 : Set default
2 : Clear all

1

0-2

0

B B

B B

5.46

o2-04

kVA Selection
(Drive Model
No.)

1

0 - FF

(See Note 1)

B B

B B

Table
A3-1

o2-05

Digital
Operator
"Motor
Operated Pot"

0 : Drive accepts frequency
command after ENTER
is pressed
1 : Drive accepts frequency
command immediately

1

0, 1

0

A A

A A

5.26

o2-06

Operation
Selection
When Digital
Operator is
Disconnected

0 : Disabled (operation
continues)
1 : Enabled (motor coasts to
stop and fault is displayed

1

0, 1

1

A A

A A

5.26

o2-07

Elapsed
Operating
Hour Timer
Set

1
hour

0 - 65535

—

A A

A A

5.26

1
2
3
4

:
:
:
:

Frequency reference
Output frequency
Output current
Selected monitor

A1-25

Table A1-9. Drive oX-XX Parameters – Continued
PARAMETER

FUNCTION

NUMBER

NAME

DESCRIPTION

INCRE-

SETTING

FACTORY

MENT

RANGE

SETTING

ACCESS LEVEL PARA.
(See Note 2)
REF .
0
1
2
3

o2-08

Elapsed
Operating
Hour Timer
Selection

0 : Timer active whenever
power is applied to drive
1 : Timer active whenever
drive is in "run" mode

1

0, 1

0

A A

A A

o2-09

Initial Mode
Selection

0 : Japanese Spec.
1 : American Spec.
2 : European Spec.

1

0-2

1

A A

A A

NOTES:
1.

Not initialized. Factory setting differs depending on the drive capacity.

2.

Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level
( A 1 - 0 1 ) and Control Method ( A 1 - 0 2; 0 = V/f, 1 = V/f w/PG, 2 = Open Loop
Vector, 3 = Flux Vector) the drive is programmed for. Each column represents the
Access Level for a given Control Method: Q = Quick-start; B = Basic; A = Advanced;
— = not available.

A1-26

5.26

Table A1-10. Drive UX-XX Parameters
PARAMETER
NUMBER

MONITOR ITEM

DESCRIPTION

DISPLAY

ANALOG MONITOR

UNIT

OUTPUT LEVEL

ACCESS L E V E L
(See Note 3)

0

1

2

3

U1-01

Frequency
Reference

(See
Note 1)

10V / max.
output freq.
( E1-04 )

O O O O

U1-02

Output
Frequency

(See
Note 1)

10V / max.
output freq.
( E1-04 )

O O O O

U1-03

Output Current

(See
Note 2)

10V / drive
rated current

O O O O

U1-04
(4)

Control Method

—

O O O O

U1-05
(4)

Motor Speed

10V / max.
output freq.
( E1-04 or
E4-01 )

— O O O

U1-06

Output Voltage

0.1 V

U1-07
(4)

DC Bus Voltage

0.1 V

U1-08
(4)

Output Power

0.1 kW

10V / drive
capacity (kW)

O O O O

U1-09
(4)

Torque
Reference
(internal)

0.1 %

10V / motor
rated torque

— — O O

U1-10
(4)

Input Terminal
Status

—

—

O O O O

—

—

O O O O

0
1
2
3

:
:
:
:

V/f control
V/f with PG feedback
Open loop vector
Flux vector

—

0.01 Hz

10V / 230V or
10V / 460V or
10V / 575V
10V / 400V or
10V / 800V or
10V / 1150V

O O O O
O O O O

11111111

Control circuit terminal 1 : "Closed"
Control circuit terminal 2 : "Closed"
Control circuit terminal 3 : "Closed"
Control circuit terminal 4 : "Closed"
Control circuit terminal 5 : "Closed"
Control circuit terminal 6 : "Closed"
Control circuit terminal 7 : "Closed"
Control circuit terminal 8 : "Closed"

U1-11
(4)

Output Terminal
Status

10000111

Control circuit terminals 9-10 : "Closed"
Control circuit terminal 25 : "Closed"
Control circuit terminal 26 : "Closed"
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Fault contact output active

A1-27

Table A1-10. Drive UX-XX Parameters – Continued
PARAMETER
NUMBER

U1-12
(4)

MONITOR ITEM

DESCRIPTION

Operation Status

DISPLAY

ANALOG MONITOR

UNIT

OUTPUT LEVEL

ACCESS L E V E L
(See Note 3)

0

1

2

3

—

—

O O O O

1 hour

—

O O O O

—

—

O O O O

11111111

During run
During zero-speed
During reverse run
During reset signal input
During speed agree
Drive operation ready
Minor fault
Major fault

U1-13
(4)

Elapsed
Operation
Time

U1-14
(4)

Software No.
(Flash ID No.)

U1-15
(4)

Control Circuit
Terminal 13
Input Voltage

0.1 %

10V / 10V

B

B

B

B

U1-16
(4)

Control Circuit
Terminal 14
Input Voltage

0.1 %

10V / 10V or
10V / 20mA

B

B

B

B

U1-17
(4)

Control Circuit
Terminal 16
Input Voltage

0.1 %

10V / 10V

B

B

B

B

U1-18
(4)

Motor Secondary
Current (Iq)

0.1 %

10V / motor
rated primary
current
( E2-01 )

B

B

B

B

U1-19
(4)

Motor Exciting
Current

0.1 %

10V / motor
rated primary
current
( E2-01 )

— — B

B

U1-20
(4)

Output
Frequency
After Soft-start

0.01 Hz

10V / max.
output freq.
( E1-04 )

A

A

U1-21
(4)

Automatic
Speed
Regulator Input

0.01 %

10V / max.
output freq.
( E1-04 )

— A — A

U1-22
(4)

Automatic
Speed
Regulator
Output

0.01 %

10V / motor
rated primary
current
( E2-01 )

— A — A

EXAMPLE: 01114

Analog monitor output level becomes
10V / max output frequency with V/F
control.

A1-28

A

A

Table A1-10. Drive UX-XX Parameters – Continued
PARAMETER
NUMBER

MONITOR ITEM

DESCRIPTION

DISPLAY

ANALOG MONITOR

UNIT

OUTPUT LEVEL

ACCESS L E V E L
(See Note 3)

0

1

2

3

U1-23
(4)

Speed Deviation
Regulator Input

0.01 %

10V / max.
output freq.
( E1-04 )

— A — A

U1-24
(4)

PID Feedback
Amount

0.01 %

10V / max.
output freq.
( E1-04 )

A

A

A

A

U1-25
(4)

DI-16H Input
Status

—

A

A

A

A

U1-26
(4)

Output Voltage
Reference Vq

0.1 V

10V / 230V or
10V / 460V or
10V / 575V

— — A

A

U1-27
(4)

Output Voltage
Reference Vd

0.1 V

10V / 230V or
10V / 460V or
10V / 575V

— — A

A

U1-28
(4)

CPU ID No.

—

A

A

A

U1-32
(4)

ACR (q-Axis)
Output

0.1 %

— — A

A

U1-33
(4)

ACR (d-Axis)
Output

0.1 %

— — A

A

U1-34
(4)

OPE Detected

—

—

A

A

U1-35
(4)

Zero-Servo
Pulse Count

Only available with Zero-Servo
function in Flux Vector control.

1 pulse

—

— — — A

U1-36

PID Input

Displays PID Error
(Setpoint minus Feedback)

0.01%

10V / 100%

A

A

A

A

U1-37

PID Output

Displays PID Output
(100% = E1-04)

0.01%

10V / 100%

A

A

A

A

U1-38

PID Setpoint

0.01%

10V / 100%

A

A

A

A

U2-01

Current Fault

—

—

O O O O

U2-02

Last Fault

—

—

O O O O

U2-03

Frequency
Reference

At time of most recent fault

0.01 Hz

—

O O O O

U2-04

Output
Frequency

At time of most recent fault

0.01 Hz

—

O O O O

U2-05

Output Current

At time of most recent fault

(See
Note 2)

—

O O O O

Displays an input value according to the
setting of F3-01 .

EXAMPLE: 00110

—

—

A1-29

A

A

A

Table A1-10. Drive UX-XX Parameters – Continued
PARAMETER
NUMBER

MONITOR ITEM

DESCRIPTION

DISPLAY

ANALOG MONITOR

UNIT

OUTPUT LEVEL

ACCESS L E V E L
(See Note 3)

0

1

2

3

U2-06

Motor Speed

At time of most recent fault

0.01 Hz

—

O O O O

U2-07

Output Voltage

At time of most recent fault

0.1 V

—

O O O O

U2-08

DC Bus Voltage

At time of most recent fault

1V

—

O O O O

U2-09

Output kWatts

At time of most recent fault

0.1 kW

—

O

U2-10

Torque
Reference

At time of most recent fault

0.1 %

—

— — — O

U2-11

Input Terminal
Status

At time of most recent fault

—

—

O O O O

—

—

O O O O

—

—

O O O O

1 hour

—

O O O O

O O

O

11111111

Control circuit terminal 1 : "Closed"
Control circuit terminal 2 : "Closed"
Control circuit terminal 3 : "Closed"
Control circuit terminal 4 : "Closed"
Control circuit terminal 5 : "Closed"
Control circuit terminal 6 : "Closed"
Control circuit terminal 7 : "Closed"
Control circuit terminal 8 : "Closed"

U2-12

Output Terminal
Status

At time of most recent fault

10000111

Control circuit terminals 9-10 : "Closed"
Control circuit terminal 25 : "Closed"
Control circuit terminal 26 : "Closed"
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Fault contact output active

U2-13

Inverter Status

At time of most recent fault

11111111

During run
During zero-speed
During reverse run
During reset signal input
During speed agree
Drive operation ready
Minor fault
Major fault

U2-14

Elapsed Time

At time of most recent fault

U3-01

Last Fault

Most recent fault

—

—

O O O O

U3-02

Fault
Message 2

2nd most recent fault

—

—

O O O O

A1-30

Table A1-10. Drive UX-XX Parameters – Continued
PARAMETER
NUMBER

MONITOR ITEM

DESCRIPTION

DISPLAY

ANALOG MONITOR

UNIT

OUTPUT LEVEL

ACCESS L E V E L
(See Note 3)

0

1

2

3

U3-03

Fault Message 3

3rd most recent fault

—

—

O O O O

U3-04

Fault Message 4

4th most recent (oldest) fault

—

—

O O O O

U3-05

Elapsed Time 1

Of most recent fault

1 hour

—

O O O O

U3-06

Elapsed Time 2

Of 2nd most recent fault

1 hour

—

O O O O

U3-07

Elapsed Time 3

Of 3rd most recent fault

1 hour

—

O O O O

U3-08

Elapsed Time 4

Of oldest fault

1 hour

—

O O O O

NOTES:
1.

Display unit differs depending on setting of o 1 - 0 3 .

2.

Display unit = 0.01A for models GPD515C-A003 thru -A033 (CIMR-G5M20P41F thru 27P51F),
-B001 thru -B021 (40P41F thru 47P51F), and -C003 thru -C012 (51P51F thru 57P51F).
Display unit = 0.1A for models GPD515C-A049 thru -A300 (CIMR-G5M20111F thru 20750F),
-B001 thru -B011 (40111F thru 43000F), and -C017 thru -C200 (50111F thru 51600F).

3.

Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level
( A 1 - 0 1 ) and Control Method ( A 1 - 0 2; 0 = V/f, 1 = V/f w/PG, 2 = Open Loop
Vector, 3 = Flux Vector) the drive is programmed for. Each column represents the
Access Level for a given Control Method: Q = Quick-start; B = Basic; A = Advanced;
— = not available.

4.

Monitor items U 1 - 0 4, U 1 - 0 5,and U 1 - 0 7 through U 1 - 3 5 can only be viewed from
within the U 1 Monitor Parameter function (i.e. press “down arrow” key, then
D A T A / E N T E R, then scroll up or down to view the desired monitor item). See
paragraph 4.3, Digital Operator Menu Trees for more details.

A1-31

Table A1-11. Run Operative Parameters
PARAMETER
NUMBER

FUNCTION NAME

PARA. REF.

A1-00
A1-01

Language Selection
Parameter Access Level

b5-02
b5-03
b5-04
b5-05
b5-06
b5-07
b5-08

Proportional Gain
Integral Time
Integral Value Limit
Derivative Time
PID Limit
Offset
Output Lag Filter Time

5.36
5.36
5.36
5.36
5.36
5.36
5.36

C1-01
C1-02
C1-03
C1-04
C1-10

Acceleration Time 1
Deceleration Time 1
Acceleration Time 2
Deceleration Time 2
Accel/Decel Time Setting Unit

5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2

C3-01

Slip Compensation Time

5.38

C4-01

Torque Compensation Gain

5.42

C5-01
C5-02

ASR Proportional Gain 1
ASR Integral Time 1

5.7
5.7

C5-03
C5-04

ASR Proportional Gain 2
ASR Integral Time 2

5.7
5.7

d1-01
d1-02
d1-03
d1-04
d1-05
d1-06
d1-07
d1-08
d1-09

Frequency Reference 1
Frequency Reference 2
Frequency Reference 3
Frequency Reference 4
Frequency Reference 5
Frequency Reference 6
Frequency Reference 7
Frequency Reference 8
Jog Frequency Reference

F4-02
F4-04

AO-08 / AO-12 Channel 1 Gain
AO-08 / AO-12 Channel 2 Gain

H3-02
H3-03
H3-06
H3-07
H3-10
H3-11

Auto Speed Reference Signal Gain (Term. 13)
Auto Speed Reference Signal Bias (Term. 13)
Multi-function Analog Input 1 Gain (Term. 16)
Multi-function Analog Input 1 Bias (Term. 16)
Multi-function Analog Input 2 Gain (Term. 14)
Multi-function Analog Input 2 Bias (Term. 14)

5.18
5.18
5.18
5.18
5.18
5.18

H4-02
H4-03
H4-05
H4-06

Multi-function
Multi-function
Multi-function
Multi-function

5.31
5.31
5.31
5.31

o1-01
o1-02

Monitor Selection
Monitor Selection After Power-up

Analog
Analog
Analog
Analog

Monitor
Monitor
Monitor
Monitor

2.3
Table A1-1

5.23,
5.23,
5.23,
5.23,
5.23,
5.23,
5.23,
5.23,
5.23,

1
1
2
2

5.25
5.25
5.25
5.25
5.25
5.25
5.25
5.25
5.25

B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B

Option Instr. Sheet
Option Instr. Sheet

Gain (Term. 21)
Bias (Term. 21)
Gain (Term. 23)
Bias (Term. 23)

5.12
5.12

A1-32

Appendix 2.

SPECIFICATIONS

Table A2-1. Standard Specifications
SECTION A. Input Voltage Related Specifications
208 / 230V Class drive
Input Power

Voltage : 3 Phase 200 / 208 / 220 / 230 VAC + 10%, – 15%
Frequency : 50 / 60 Hz ± 5%

Output Power

Voltage : 0 - 230V (proportional to input voltage)
Frequency: 0 - 400 Hz (V/Hz pattern selectable)

NEW DRIVE OLD DRIVE
MODEL NO. MODEL NO.
CIMR-G5M
GPD515C20P41F
20P71F
21P51F
22P21F
23P71F
25P51F
27P51F
20111F
20151F
20181F
20221F
20300F
20370F
20550F
20750F

A003
A006
A008
A011
A017
A025
A033
A049
A064
A080
A096
A130
A160
A224
A300

RATED
kVA

NOMINAL
HP

100% CONT.
OUTPUT
AMPS

RATED
INPUT
AMPS

1.2
2.3
3.0
4.2
6.7
9.5
13
19
24
30
37
50
61
85
110

0.75
1 & 1.5
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25 & 30
30
40 & 50
60
75
100

3.2
6
8
11
17.5
25
33
49
64
80
96
130
160
224
300

3.9
7.2
9.6
13.2
21
30
40
59
77
88
106
143
176
247
330

RECOMMENDED RECOMMENDED
MCCB
INPUT
RATING (1) (AMPS) FUSING (AMPS)(2)
7
15
15
30
30
50
50
75
100
150
150
250
250
400
400

5.6
10
12
17.5
30
45
60
90
100
125
175
200
250
400
400

380 / 415 / 460V Class drive
Input Power

Voltage : 3 Phase 380 / 400 / 415 / 440 / 460 VAC + 10%, – 15%
Frequency : 50 / 60 Hz ± 5%

Output Power

Voltage : 0 - 460V (proportional to input voltage)
Frequency: 0 - 400 Hz (V/Hz pattern selectable)

NEW DRIVE OLD DRIVE
MODEL NO. MODEL NO.
CIMR-G5M
GPD515C40P41F
40P71F
41P51F
43P71F
44P01F
45P51F
47P51F
40111F
40151F
40181F
40221F
40301F
40371F
40451F
40551F
40750F
41100F
41600F
41850F
42200F
43000F

B001
B003
B004
B008
B011
B014
B021
B027
B034
B041
B052
B065
B080
B096
B128
B165
B224
B302
B380
B450
B605

RATED
kVA

NOMINAL
HP

100% CONT.
OUTPUT
AMPS

RATED
INPUT
AMPS

1.4
2.6
3.7
6.1
8.6
11
14
21
26
31
40
50
61
73
98
130
170
230
290
340
460

0.75
1&2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200 & 250
300
300 & 350
400 & 500

1.8
3.4
4.8
8
11
14
21
27
34
41
52
65
80
96
128
165
224
302
380
450
605

2.2
4.1
5.8
9.6
13.2
16.8
26
33
40
46
58
72
88
106
141
182
247
330
456
540
726

RECOMMENDED RECOMMENDED
MCCB
INPUT
RATING (1) (AMPS) FUSING (AMPS)(2)
3
7
7
15
30
30
30
50
50
75
75
100
150
150
250
250
400
400
600
800
1000

3
6
8
12
17.5
20
30
45
50
70
90
100
125
150
200
250
400
400
600
400 (3)
450 (3)

( 1 ) Molded-case circuit breaker must be rated for at least 18,000 RMS symmetrical amperes interrupting capacity.
( 2 ) Fuses should be of the current-limiting time-delay type offering protection for semi-conductor devices.
( 3 ) Two fuses of this rating are required for each phase.
(table continued on next page)

A2-1

Table A2-1. Standard Specifications (Continued)
SECTION A. Input Voltage Related
600V Class drive
Input Power

Voltage : 3 Phase 500/ 575/ 600 VAC +/– 10%
Frequency : 50 / 60 Hz ± 5%

Output Power

Voltage : 0 - 575V (proportional to input voltage)
Frequency: 0 - 400 Hz (V/Hz pattern selectable)

NEW DRIVE
MODEL NO.
CIMR-G5M

OLD DRIVE
MODEL NO.
GPD515C-

RATED
kVA

NOMINAL
HP

100% CONT.
OUTPUT
AMPS

RATED
INPUT
AMPS

51P51F
52P21F
53P71F
55P51F
57P51F
50111F
50151F
50181F
50221F
50301F
50371F
50451F
50551F
50751F
50900F
51100F
51600F

C003
C004
C006
C010
C012
C017
C022
C027
C032
C041
C052
C062
C077
C099
C130
C172
C200

2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200

2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200

3.5
4.1
6.3
9.8
12.5
17
22
27
32
41
52
62
77
99
130
172
200

4.3
5.1
7.7
12.1
15.4
21
28
33
40
51
64
76
95
122
160
211
246

RECOMMENDED RECOMMENDED
MCCB
INPUT
RATING (1) (AMPS) FUSING (AMPS)(2)
10
10
20
20
20
30
50
60
60
100
100
100
150
225
225
300
400

10
10
15
25
30
40
50
60
70
100
125
156
200
250
300
400
500

( 1 ) Molded-case circuit breaker must be rated for at least 18,000 RMS symmetrical amperes interrupting capacity.
( 2 ) Fuses should be of the current-limiting time-delay type offering protection for semi-conductor devices.

A2-2

Table A2-1. Standard Specifications (Continued)
SECTION
C. ALL drives
SECTION C. ALL drives
Control Method
Frequency/Speed
Control

Control
Characteristics

Protective
Functions

Sine-coded PWM (Digital flux vector)
Range

100:1 (including at stall) (1000:1 possible with PG)

Precision

Digital ref.: ± 0.01% (–10 to 40°C, +14 to +140°F)
Analog ref.: ± 0.1% (25 ±10° C, 77 ±50°F)

Frequency Control Range

0.1 to 400 Hz

Speed Control Accuracy

± 0.2% (± 0.02% with PG)

Frequency/Speed Reference
Setting Resolution

Digital Operator reference: 0.01 Hz (12 bits)
(0.1 Hz @ 100 Hz and above)
Analog reference: 0.03 Hz/60 Hz (11 bits)

Starting Torque

150% / 1 Hz (150% / 0 RPM with PG)

Output Frequency Resolution

0.01 Hz

Auto Speed Reference Signal

± 10 VDC (20K Ohms), or 4-20mA (250 Ohms)

Accel / Decel Time

0 to 6000 sec (resolution: 0.1 sec)
(Accel / Decel times set independently, 4 steps available)

Torque Limit

4 types available

Braking Torque

Approximately 20%

V/F Pattern Selection

15 Standard Patterns:
4 for general purpose;
4 for high starting torque;
4 for fans and pumps;
3 for constant horsepower.
1 Custom Pattern: defined by parameter settings.

Selectable Functions

Multi-step speed operation (9 steps max.), S-curve accel/decel,
zero speed control, servo lock, arbitrary torque detection, etc.

Motor Overload Protection

Electronic thermal overload relay

Instantaneous Overcurrent

Motor coasts to a stop at approximately 200% rated current.

Fuse Blown Protection

Motor coasts to a stop by blown fuse.

Overload

Motor coasts a stop after 60 sec. at 150% of rated output
current.

Overvoltage

Motor coasts to a stop if drive DC bus voltage exceeds
400 VDC (230V unit), or 800VDC (460V unit), or 1050VDC
(600V unit).

Undervoltage

Motor coasts to a stop if drive DC bus voltage drops to
190 VDC or below (230V unit), 380 VDC or below (460V unit),
546VDC or below (600V unit).

Momentary Power Failure

Factory setting provides for motor to coast to a stop after
momentary power failure of more than 15 ms. Can be
reprogrammed to allow continuous operation (ride-through)
during power failure of up to 2 seconds or longer (see Note 2).

Heatsink Overheat

Thermistor

(table continued on next page)

A2-3

Table A2-1. Standard Specifications (Continued)
SECTION
drives
(Continued)
SECTIONC.
C. ALL
ALL drives
(CONTINUED)
Protective
Functions
(continued)

Environmental
Conditions

Stall Prevention

Stall prevention at acceleration /deceleration and constant
speed operation.

Ground Fault

Provided by electronic circuit.

Power Charge Indication

"CHARGE" lamp remains lit until bus voltage drops below 50 V.

Location

Indoor (protected from corrosive gases and dust)

Ambient Temperature

–10 to 40°C (+14 to 104°F) for NEMA 1;
–10 to 45°C (+14 to 113°F) for protected chassis

Storage Temperature (Note 3)

–20 to 60°C (–4 to 140°F)

Humidity

95% RH (no condensation)

Vibration

1 G at less than 20 Hz, up to 0.2 G at 20 to 50 Hz

Elevation

3300 ft (1000 m) or less
SECTION
D. All D
VCMs
SECTION

Rated speed

1750 rpm (4 poles, 60Hz)

Pulse Generator

1024 ppr

Thermistor

Standard

Load Connection

Direct coupling or belt drive

Insulation Type

Class F

Ambient Temperature

–20 to +40°C (–4 to +104°F)

Location

Indoor

NOTES:
1.

Overload capacity: 150% of rated for 60 sec.

2.

See paragraph 5.29 for detailed information.

3.

Temperature during shipping. Storing in this temperature for a long period may deteriorate main circuit capacitor.

4.

1HP motor VMB001C is an inverter-duty foot mount with C-Face.

A2-4

Appendix 3. CAPACITY & CONTROL METHOD
RELATED PARAMETERS
Parameter o 2 - 0 4 (Drive Capacity Selection) is factory preset per the input voltage and
output current ratings of the drive, although the drive displays the voltage and kW rating.
This parameter setting determines the factory settings for the parameters listed in the
table below. If the Control PCB has been replaced, the new board MUST have o 2 - 0 4
programmed to the appropriate set value BEFORE again operating the drive in the Drive
mode.
Table A3-1. Parameters Related to GPD 515 Capacity
PARAMETER
NEW
DRIVE
MODEL
NO.

OLD
DRIVE
MODEL
NO.

CIMR-G5M

GPD515C–

NOMINAL OUTPUT
o2-04

HP

C6-01

C6-02

AMPS
(kHz)

(kHz)

E2-01

E2-02

E2-03

E2-05

E2-06

&

&

&

&

&

L2-02

L2-03

L2-04

L8-02

E5-01

E5-02

E5-03

E5-05

E5-06

(Amps)

(Hz)

(Amps)

(ohms)

(%)

(sec.)

(sec.)

(sec.)

(sec.)

(watts)

1.20
1.80
2.80
3.00
4.50
5.10
8.00
11.2
15.2
15.7
18.5
21.9
38.2
45.6
72.0

9.842
5.156
1.997
1.601
0.771
0.399
0.288
0.230
0.138
0.101
0.079
0.064
0.039
0.022
0.023

18.2
13.8
18.5
18.4
19.6
18.2
15.5
19.5
17.2
20.1
19.5
20.8
18.8
20.5
20.0

0.7
1.0
1.0
1.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0

0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0

0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
1.0
1.0

95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95

14
26
53
77
112
172
262
245
272
505
538
699
823
852
960

2.90 0.60 38.198 18.2
2.60 0.80 22.459 14.3
2.50 1.40 10.100 18.3
2.70 2.30 3.333 19.3
2.70 2.30 3.333 19.3
1.50 2.60 1.595 18.2
1.30 4.00 1.152 15.5
1.70 5.6
0.922 19.6
1.60 7.6
0.550 17.2
1.67 7.8
0.403 20.1
1.70 9.2
0.316 23.5
1.80 10.9
0.269 20.7

1.0
1.0
1.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0

0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
1.0
1.0
1.0

0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.6
0.6
0.6

95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95

14
26
53
130
130
193
263
385
440
508
586
750

E2-10

2 3 0V
20P41F
20P71F
21P51F
22P21F
23P71F
25P51F
27P51F
20111F
20151F
20181F
20221F
20300F
20370F
20550F
20750F

A003
A006
A008
A011
A017
A025
A033
A049
A064
A080
A096
A130
A160
A224
A300

0.75
1 & 1.5
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25 & 30
30
40 & 50
60
75
100

3.2
6
8
11
17.5
25
33
49
64
80
96
130
160
224
300

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
b
C
E
F

15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0

15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0

1.90
3.30
6.20
8.50
14.00
19.60
26.60
39.7
53.0
65.8
77.2
105.0
131.0
190.0
260.0

2.90
2.50
2.60
2.90
2.73
1.50
1.30
1.70
1.60
1.67
1.70
1.80
1.33
1.43
1.39

4 6 0V
40P41F
40P71F
41P51F
43P71F
44P01F
45P51F
47P51F
40111F
40151F
40181F
40221F
40301F

B001
B003
B004
B008
B011
B014
B021
B027
B034
B041
B052
B065

0.75
1&2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50

1.8
3.4
4.8
8
11
14
21
27
34
41
52
65

20
21
22
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2b
2C

10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
8.0
8.0

10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
8.0
8.0

1.00
1.60
3.10
7.00
7.00
9.80
13.30
19.9
26.5
32.9
38.6
52.3

(table continued on next page)

A3-1

Table A3-1. Parameters Related to GPD 515 Capacity
PARAMETER
NEW
DRIVE
MODEL
NO.

OLD
DRIVE
MODEL
NO.

CIMR-G5M

GPD515C–

NOMINAL OUTPUT
o2-04

HP

C6-01

C6-02

AMPS
(kHz)

(kHz)

E2-01

E2-02

E2-03

E2-05

E2-06

&

&

&

&

&

E5-01

E5-02

E5-03

E5-05

E5-06

(Amps)

(Hz)

(Amps)

(ohms)

(%)

0.155
0.122
0.088
0.092
0.046
0.029
0.025
0.020
0.014

18.8
19.9
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0

L2-02

L2-03

L2-04

L8-02

(sec.)

(sec.)

(sec.)

(sec.)

(watts)

2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0

1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0

0.6
0.6
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0

95
95
100
95
110
100
95
95
95

925
1125
1260
1600
2150
2850
3200
3700
4700

E2-10

4 6 0 V – Continued
40371F
40451F
40551F
40750F
41100F
41600F
41850F
42200F
43000F

B080
60
B096
75
B128
100
B165
125
B224
150
B302 200 & 250
B380
300
B450 300 & 350
B605 400 & 500

80
96
128
165
224
302
380
450
605

2d
2E
2F
30
32
34
35
36
37

6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
5.0
5.0
2.0 *
2.0 *
2.0 *

6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
5.0
5.0
2.0
2.0
2.0

65.6
79.7
95.0
130.0
190.0
270.0
310.0
370.0
500.0

1.33 19.1
1.60 22.0
1.46 24.0
1.39 36.0
1.40 49.0
1.35 70.0
1.30 81.0
1.30 96.0
1.25 130.0

NOTES:
*

2.5 kHz is maximum carrier frequency.

Table A3-1. Parameters Related to GPD 515 Capacity
PARAMETER
NEW
DRIVE
MODEL
NO.

OLD
DRIVE
MODEL
NO.

CIMR-G5M

GPD515C–

NOMINAL OUTPUT
o2-04

HP

C6-01

C6-02

AMPS
(kHz)

(kHz)

E2-01

E2-02

E2-03

E2-05

E2-06

&

&

&

&

&

L2-02

L2-03

L2-04

L8-02

E5-01

E5-02

E5-03

E5-05

E5-06

(Amps)

(Hz)

(Amps)

(ohms)

(%)

(sec.)

(sec.)

(sec.)

(sec.)

(watts)

13.720
8.825
4.939
2.601
1.446
1.171
0.896
0.658
0.518
0.438
0.267
0.210
0.150
0.099
0.079
0.060
0.037

18.3
18.7
19.3
18.2
15.5
19.6
17.2
20.1
23.5
20.7
18.8
19.9
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0

1.0
1.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0

0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
2.0
2.0
2.0

0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5

95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95

53
77
130
193
263
385
440
508
586
750
925
1125
1260
1600
2150
2150
2850

E2-10

6 0 0V
51P51F
52P21F
53P71F
55P51F
57P51F
50111F
50151F
50181F
50221F
50301F
50371F
50451F
50551F
50751F
50900F
51100F
51600F

C003
C004
C006
C010
C012
C017
C022
C027
C032
C041
C052
C062
C077
C099
C130
C172
C200

2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200

3.5
4.1
6.3
9.8
12.5
17
22
27
32
41
52
62
77
99
130
172
200

42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52

10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0

10.0
2.70
10.0
3.90
10.0
6.10
10.0
9.00
10.0 11.00
10.0 17.0
10.0 22.0
10.0 27.0
10.0 32.0
10.0 41.0
10.0 52.0
10.0 62.0
10.0 77.0
1.0 99.0
1.0 125.0
1.0 144.0
1.0 192.0

2.50
3.00
2.70
1.50
1.30
1.70
1.60
1.67
1.70
1.80
1.33
1.60
1.46
1.39
1.39
1.40
1.35

NOTES:
* 2.5 kHz is maximum carrier frequency.

A3-2

0.90
1.20
1.90
2.70
3.30
5.1
6.6
8.1
9.6
12.3
15.6
18.6
23.1
29.7
38.5
43.2
57.6

Table A3-2. Parameters Related to Control Method ( A1-02 )
PARAMETER
NUMBER

FUNCTION NAME

INCREMENT

SETTING
RANGE

V/F
A1-02 = 0

b3-01

Speed Search Selection

b3-02

FACTORY SETTING
V/F
Open Loop
with PG
Vector
A1-02 = 1
A1-02 = 2

Flux Vector
A1-02 = 3

1

0, 1

0

1

0

1

Speed Search Deactivation
Current Level

1%

0 - 200

150

—

100

—

b8-04

Automatic
Energy-Saving Gain

0.1

0.0 - 10.0

—

—

0.7

1.0

b8-05

Automatic
Energy-Saving Time Constant

0.01
sec

0.00 - 10.00

—

—

0.50

0.01

C3-01

Slip Compensation Gain

0.1

0.0 - 2.5

0.0

—

1.0

1.0

C3-02

Slip Compensation Primary
Delay Time

1 ms

0 - 10000

2000

—

200

—

C4-02

Torque Compensation Time
Constant

1 ms

0 - 10000

200

200

20

—

C5-01

ASR Proportional Gain 1

0.01

0.00 - 300.00

—

0.20

—

20.00

C5-02

ASR Integral Time 1

0.001
sec

0.000 10.000

—

0.200

—

0.500

C5-03

ASR Proportional Gain 2

0.01

0.00 - 300.00

—

0.02

—

20.00

C5-04

ASR Integral Time 2

0.001
sec

0.000 10.000

—

0.050

—

0.500

E1-07,
E4-04

Mid. Output Frequency A

0.1 Hz

0.0 - 400.0

3.0

3.0

3.0

—

E1-08,
E4-05

Mid. Output Voltage A

V

0.0 - 250.0
0.0 - 510.0 (1)
0.0 - 733.1 (2)

17.2
34.5 (1)
49.5 (2)

17.2
34.5(1)
49.5 (2)

12.6
25.3(1)
36.3 (2)

—

E1-09,
E4-06

Min. Output Frequency

0.1 Hz

0.0 - 400.0

1.5

1.5

0.5

0.0

E1-10,
E4-07

Min. Output Voltage

0.1 V

0.0 - 250.0
0.0 - 510.0 (1)
0.0 - 733.1 (2)

10.3
20.7(1)
29.6 (2)

10.3
20.7(1)
29.6 (2)

2.3
4.6(1)
6.5 (2)

—

F1-09

Overspeed Detection
Delay Time

0.1
sec

0.0 - 2.0

—

1.0

—

0.0

NOTES:
1.
2.

Values are for 460V ratings.
Values are for 600V ratings.

A3-3

A3-4

Appendix 4.

GPD 515/G5 SPARE PARTS

PROCEDURE FOR INSTALLING REPLACEMENT CONTROL PCB
1 . Record all parameters that have been changed from their factory settings, by writing
down all settings that appear under the “Modified Constants” menu.
2 . Record the Control Method (“Initialize” menu, A 1 - 0 2 ) .
3 . Record the drive’s kVA selection ( o 2 - 0 4 ). This parameter is available only when
the Access Level is set to “Advanced” ( A 1 - 0 1 = 4 ) .
4 . Remove power, remove the old control board, and install the new control board.
5 . Reapply power to the drive. An “ o P E 0 1
if so, step 7 will correct it.

K V A S e l e c t i o n ” fault may appear –

6 . Set the Access Level to “Advanced” from the “Initialize” menu ( A 1 - 0 1 = 4 ) .
7 . Program the new control board for the correct drive size by setting parameter
o 2 - 0 4 to the value that was recorded in step 3.
8 . Set parameter o 2 - 0 9 to “American Spec” to ensure that all parameters are reset
to the “American” values when the initialization is performed in step 10.
9 . Set the new control board to the correct Control Method under the “Initialize” menu
( A 1 - 0 2 ).
1 0 . Reset the drive from the “Initialize” menu using the “Init Parameters” function
( A 1 - 0 3 ). Entering “ 2 2 2 0 ” will reset the drive for 2-wire control. Entering
“ 3 3 3 0 ” will reset the drive for 3-wire control. NOTE: After a successful
initialization, the “Init Parameters” display will return to “ No Initialize ” .
1 1 . Program all parameter settings with the data that was recorded in step 1.

A4-1

New Drive
Model No.
CIMR-G5M

Old Drive
Transistor Module Part No. 5P30–
Model No. Power Module Part No. 5P30–
GPD515C– 0174 0175 0178 0154 0155 0156 0157 0180 0160 0161 0176 0177 0477

20P41F
20P71F
21P51F
22P21F
23P71F
25P51F
27P51F
20111F
20151F
20181F
20221F
20300F
20370F
20550F
20750F

A003
A006
A008
A011
A017
A025
A033
A049
A064
A080
A096
A130
A160
A224
A300

New Drive
Model No.
CIMR-G5M

Old Drive
Model No.
GPD515C–

20P41F
20P71F
21P51F
22P21F
23P71F
25P51F
27P51F
20111F
20151F
20181F
20221F
20300F
20370F
20550F
20750F

A003
A006
A008
A011
A017
A025
A033
A049
A064
A080
A096
A130
A160
A224
A300

New Drive
Model No.
CIMR-G5M
20P41F
20P71F
21P51F
22P21F
23P71F
25P51F
27P51F
20111F
20151F
20181F
20221F
20300F
20370F
20550F
20750F

1

Diode Module
0478

0479

Part No. 5P50–

0490

0480

0482

No Diode Module in these
Drive Model No's; diodes are
contained in Power Module.

1
1
1
1
1
1

1

1

3

1

3
3
3

1
1
6

6

6
6

6
6

6

12

Power PCB
0422

0423

0424

0425

Part No. 5P90–
0426

0427

Gate Drive PCB

0428

0429

0410

0430

0414

Part No. 5P90–

0415 0416

Control PCB

0417

Part No. 5P90–0535

1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Old Drive
DC Bus Fuse Part No. 5P17–
Cooling Fan Part No. 5P16–
Control Fuse
Model No.
GPD515C– 0057 0058 0059 0061 0050 0062 0051 0504 0505 0488 0480 0481 0482 0483 0484 0485 0487
0500
A003
A006
A008
A011
A017
A025
A033
A049
A064
A080
A096
A130
A160
A224
A300

0481

1
1
1
1
1
2
2

1
1
1
1

1
1

1
1
3
3
3

1
1
1
1

0501

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
2

Part No. 5P17–

3
3
3
3

3

IMPORTANT
Numbers represent total quantity used in one Drive. To determine adequate inventory of spare parts, Yaskawa suggests using listed
value for quantities 2 and below. If listed value is greater than 2, factory suggests 1/3 of total listed.

A4-2

1
1
1
1

New Drive
Model No.
CIMR-G5M

Old Drive
Model No.
GPD515C–

40P41F
40P71F
41P51F
43P71F
44P01F
45P51F
47P51F
40111F
40151F
40181F
40221F
40301F
40371F
40451F
40551F
40750F
41100F
41600F
41850F
42200F
43000F

B001
B003
B004
B008
B011
B014
B021
B027
B034
B041
B052
B065
B080
B096
B128
B165
B224
B302
B380
B450
B605

New Drive
Model No.
CIMR-G5M

Old Drive
Model No.
GPD515C–

40P41F
40P71F
41P51F
43P71F
44P01F
45P51F
47P51F
40111F
40151F
40181F
40221F
40301F
40371F
40451F
40551F
40750F
41100F
41600F
41850F
42200F
43000F

B001
B003
B004
B008
B011
B014
B021
B027
B034
B041
B052
B065
B080
B096
B128
B165
B224
B302
B380
B450
B605

Power Module
Part No. 5P30–

Transistor Module

Xstr/Heatsink
Assy
Part No. 5P30–

Part No. 5P30–

Diode Module

Part No. 5P50–

0171 0162 0163 0164 0165 0166 0167 0181 0150 0151 0152 0153 0288 0289 0290 0483 0484 0485 0486 0491 0492 0487 0488 0496
1
1
1

No Diode Module in these
Drive Model No's; diodes are
contained in Power Module.

1
1
1

1
1

1
3
3

1
1
3
3

1
1
3

1
3
3

1
1
6
6

6
6
12

6
6

12
3

6
6
9

3
3

Power PCB

Gate Drive PCB

Control PCB
Part No. 5P90– 0535

Consult
Yaskawa
Consult
Yaskawa

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

IMPORTANT
Numbers represent total quantity used in one Drive. To determine adequate inventory of spare parts, Yaskawa suggests using listed
value for quantities 2 and below. If listed value is greater than 2, factory suggests 1/3 of total listed.

A4-3

New Drive
Model No.
CIMR-G5M

Old Drive
Model No.
GPD515C–

40P41F
40P71F
41P51F
43P71F
44P01F
45P51F
47P51F
40111F
40151F
40181F
40221F
40301F
40371F
40451F
40551F
40750F
41100F
41600F
41850F
42200F
43000F

B001
B003
B004
B008
B011
B014
B021
B027
B034
B041
B052
B065
B080
B096
B128
B165
B224
B302
B380
B450
B605

Cooling Fan

Part No. 5P16–

DC Bus Fuse

Control Fuse
Part No. 5P17–

Part No. 5P17–

0057 0058 0059 0061 0060 0050 0062 0051 0064 0504 0488 0480 0489 0490 0491 0492 0477 0478 0479 0500 0503 0502
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
2

1
1
1
1
1

2
2
1
1

1
1
1
1
1

1
2
2
2

1
1
1
3
3
3

1
1
1
1

1
1

3
3
3
3

3
3
3
3

No DC Bus Fuse in these Drive Model No's;
fuses are contained in Transistor/Heatsink Assembly.

IMPORTANT
Numbers represent total quantity used in one Drive. To determine adequate inventory of spare parts, Yaskawa suggests using listed
value for quantities 2 and below. If listed value is greater than 2, factory suggests 1/3 of total listed.

A4-4

1
1
1
1
1

New Drive
Model No.
CIMR-G5M

Old Drive
Model No.
GPD515C-

51P51F
52P21F
53P71F
55P51F
57P51F
50111F
50151F
50181F
50221F
50301F
50371F
50451F
50551F
50751F
50900F
51100F
51600F

C003
C004
C006
C010
C012
C017
C022
C027
C032
C041
C052
C062
C077
C099
C130
C172
C200

New Drive
Model No.
CIMR-G5M

Old Drive
Model No.
GPD515C-

51P51F
52P21F
53P71F
55P51F
57P51F
50111F
50151F
50181F
50221F
50301F
50371F
50451F
50551F
50751F
50900F
51100F
51600F

C003
C004
C006
C010
C012
C017
C022
C027
C032
C041
C052
C062
C077
C099
C130
C172
C200

New Drive
Model No.
CIMR-G5M

Old Drive
Model No.
GPD515C-

51P51F
52P21F
53P71F
55P51F
57P51F
50111F
50151F
50181F
50221F
50301F
50371F
50451F
50551F
50751F
50900F
51100F
51600F

C003
C004
C006
C010
C012
C017
C022
C027
C032
C041
C052
C062
C077
C099
C130
C172
C200

Diode Module

Transistor Module
Part No. STR___

Power Module
Part No. 5P30-

0179 0162 0163 0164 0165 1217 1219 1220

1221

Part No. 5P50-

Part No.

1200 1201 0483 0484 0485 0491 0492 0487 0488 SID3047

1
1

No Diode in these Drive Model Nos.; diodes are
contained in Power Module.
1
1
1

1
1

1
1

1
1
3
3

1
1
3

1
1

3
3

1
3

3
3

3
6
9
9

6
6
6

860

870

880

890

Control PCB

Gate Drive PCB
Part No. ETC615___

Power PCB
Part No. ETP615___
900

900

910

920

930

940

5P900535
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

960

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Cooling Fan
Part No. 5P16-

DC Bus Fuse
Part No.

0057 0058 0059 FU2067 50208016 50208017 FU2068 50205052 50205053 50205054 50208018 50208019 50208020
1
1

1
1
1
2
2

1
1
1
1

2
2

1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

IMPORTANT
Numbers represent total quantity used in one Drive. To determine adequate inventory of spare parts, Yaskawa suggests
using listed value for quantities 2 and below. If listed value is greater than 2, factory suggests 1/3 of total listed.

A4-5

A4-6

Appendix 5.

GPD 515/G5 DIMENSIONS

Table A5-1 lists dimensions for the drive in its standard enclosure. For information on
other types of enclosures available, consult your Yaskawa representative.

Table A5-1. Drive Size and Weight
NEW DRIVE OLD DRIVE
MODEL
MODEL
VOLTS
NO.
NO.
CIMR-G5M GPD515C–

2
3
0

4
6
0

NOMINAL ENCLOSURE
HP
TYPE

PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS MOUNTING
HEAT LOSS
(IN.)
DIM. (IN.) WEIGHT
(Watts)
(LB)
Heatsink Internal Total
H
W
D
H1
W1

20P41F
20P71F
21P51F

A003
A006
A008

0.75
1 &1.5
2

NEMA 1

11.02
11.02
11.02

5.51
5.51
5.51

6.30
6.30
6.30

10.47
10.47
10.47

4.96
4.96
4.96

7
7
7

15
25
40

50
65
80

65
90
120

22P21F
23P71F

A011
A017

3
5

NEMA 1

11.02
11.02

5.51
5.51

7.09
7.09

10.47
10.47

4.96
4.96

10
10

80
135

60
80

140
215

25P51F
27P51F

A025
A033

7.5
10

NEMA 1

11.81
11.81

7.87
7.87

8.07
8.07

11.22
11.22

7.32
7.32

12
13

210
235

90
110

300
725

20111F
20151F

A049
A064

15
20

NEMA 1

14.96
15.75

9.84
9.84

8.86
8.86

14.37
14.37

9.29
9.29

24
24

425
525

160
200

585
725

20181F
20221F

A080
A096

25 & 30
30

NEMA 1

24.02
26.57

12.99
12.99

11.22
11.22

17.13 10.83
17.13 10.83

71
71

655
830

230
280

885
1110

20300F
20370F

A130
A160

40 & 50
60

Protected 26.57
Chassis 26.57

16.73
16.73

13.78
13.78

25.59 12.60
25.59 12.60

134
137

930
1110

440
620

1370
1730

20550F
20750F

A224
A300

75
100

Protected 31.50
Chassis 36.42

18.70
22.64

13.78
15.75

30.51 14.57
35.24 17.52

176
298

1740
2050

890
1160

2630
3210

40P41F
40P71F
41P51F

B001
B003
B004

0.75
1&2
3

NEMA 1

11.02
11.02
11.02

5.51
5.51
5.51

6.30
6.30
7.09

10.47
10.47
10.47

4.96
4.96
4.96

7
7
9

10
20
30

50
65
80

60
85
110

43P71F
44P01F
45P51F

B008
B011
B014

5
7.5
10

NEMA 1

11.02
11.02
11.81

5.51
5.51
7.87

7.09
7.09
8.07

10.47
10.47
11.22

4.96
4.96
7.32

10
10
13

80
120
135

65
80
85

145
200
220

47P51F
40111F
40151F

B021
B027
B034

15
20
25

NEMA 1

11.81
14.96
14.96

7.87
9.84
9.84

8.07
8.86
8.86

11.22
14.37
14.37

7.32
9.29
9.29

13
24
24

240
305
390

120
150
180

360
455
570

40181F
40221F
40301F

B041
B052
B065

30
40
50

NEMA 1

24.02
24.02
30.91

12.99
12.99
12.99

11.22
11.22
11.22

17.13 10.83
17.13 10.83
24.02 10.83

68
68
106

465
620
705

195
260
315

660
880
1020

40371F
40451F

B080
B096

60
75

NEMA 1

30.91
33.46

12.99
12.99

11.22
11.22

24.02 10.83
24.02 10.83

106
106

875
970

370
415

1245
1385

40551F
40750F
41100F
41600F

B128
B165
B224
B302

100
125
150
200& 250

32.28
Protected 32.28
Chassis 36.42
36.42

17.91
17.91
22.64
22.64

13.78
13.78
14.76
15.75

31.30
31.30
35.24
35.24

13.78
13.78
17.52
17.52

174
176
298
320

1110
1430
1870
2670

710
890
1160
1520

1820
2320
3030
4190

41850F
42200F
43000F

B380
B450
B605

300
350
400 & 500

Protected 57.09
Chassis 57.09
62.99

37.40
37.40
37.80

17.13
17.13
17.91

55.12
55.12
61.02

*
*
*

794
794
926

3400
4740
6820

1510
2110
2910

4910
6850
9730

A5-1

Table A5-1. Drive Size and Weight
NEW DRIVE OLD DRIVE
MODEL
MODEL
VOLTS
NO.
NO.
CIMR-G5M GPD515C–

6
0
0

NOMINAL ENCLOSURE
HP
TYPE

PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS MOUNTING
HEAT LOSS
(IN.)
DIM. (IN.) WEIGHT
(Watts)
(LB)
Heatsink Internal Total
H
W
D
H1
W1

51P51F
52P21F
53P71F

C003
C004
C006

2
3
5

NEMA 1
NEMA 1
NEMA 1

11.02
11.02
11.81

5.51
5.51
7.87

7.08
7.08
8.07

10.47
10.47
11.22

4.96
4.96
7.32

9
9
13

35
45
65

55
60
75

90
105
140

55P51F
57P51F
50111F

C010
C012
C017

7.5
10
15

NEMA 1
NEMA 1
NEMA 1

11.81
11.81
14.96

7.87
7.87
9.84

8.07
8.07
8.85

11.22
11.22
14.37

7.32
7.32
9.29

14
14
29

100
130
180

105
90
150

205
220
330

50151F
50181F
50221F

C022
C027
C032

20
25
30

NEMA 1
NEMA 1
NEMA 1

14.96
29.53
29.53

9.84
15.75
15.75

8.85
11.22
11.22

14.37 9.29
28.74 11.81
28.74 11.81

29
97
97

250
310
380

210
230
340

460
540
720

50301F
50371F
50451F

C041
C052
C062

40
50
60

NEMA 1
NEMA 1
NEMA 1

33.47
33.47
33.47

22.64
22.64
22.64

11.81
11.81
11.81

32.48 18.70
32.48 18.70
32.48 18.70

159
159
159

430
680
900

390
540
750

820
1220
1650

50551F
50751F

C077
C099

75
100

NEMA 1
NEMA 1

41.34
41.97

22.64
22.64

12.80
12.80

40.35 18.70
40.35 18.70

198
198

1000
1100

750
1150

1750
2250

50900F
51100F
51600F

C130
C172
C200

125
150
200

49.21
Protected 62.99
Chassis
62.99

22.64
22.64
22.64

12.99
13.98
13.98

48.23 18.70
61.81 18.70
61.81 18.70

267
324
335

1150
1400
1870

1200
1800
2830

2350
3200
4700

A5-2

Appendix 6.

DYNAMIC BRAKING CONNECTIONS

GENERAL. Dynamic braking (DB) enables the motor to be brought to a smooth and
rapid stop. This is achieved by dissipating the regenerative energy of the AC motor
across the resistive components of the Dynamic Braking option. For further details on
dynamic braking operation, see the instruction sheet shipped with dynamic braking
components.
The GPD515C-A003 thru -A033 (CIMR-G5M20P41F thru 27P51F), -B001 thru -B034
(40P41F thru 40151F), and -C003 thru -C032 (51P51F thru 50221F) have an integral
braking transistor and require the addition of a Remote Mount Resistor Unit or a Heat Sink
Mount Resistor. All higher rated drives require the use of a Braking Transistor Unit and a
Remote Mount Resistor Unit.
Remote Mount Resistor Units typically mount outside of an electrical enclosure. Braking
Transistor Units mount inside of an electrical enclosure. Heat Sink Mount Resistors mount
to the back of the drive, attaching directly to the heat sink.
Available dynamic braking components are listed in Table A6-1 through A6-4.
Table A6-1. Dynamic Braking - 3% Duty Cycle - 230V
Heat Sink Mount Resistor
Approx. Dimensions (Inches)
Resistance Power
New Drive Old Drive
Braking.
Qty
(Watts)
(Ohms)
Model No. Model No. Part No. Reqd
Torque Height Width Depth
(Each)
(Each)
CIMR-G5M GPD515C(%)
A003
20P41F
50185430
1
200
150
220
7.16
1.73
0.51
A006
20P71F
50185430
1
200
150
220
7.16
1.73
0.51
A008
21P51F
50185431
1
100
150
125
7.16
1.73
0.51
A011
22P21F
50185432
1
70
150
120
7.16
1.73
0.51
A017
23P71F
50185433
1
62
150
100
7.16
1.73
0.51

Drive
Rated
Input

230 V

B001
B003
B004

40P41F
40P71F
41P51F

460 V

50185530
50185531
50185531

1
1
1

750
400
200

150
150
150

165
120
150

7.16
7.16
7.16

Table A6-2. Dynamic Braking - 10% Duty Cycle - 230V
Remote Mount Resistor Unit
Braking Transistor Unit
Dimensions
Minimum
Approx
Resistance Power
New Drive Old Drive
(Inches)
Rated
Connectable
Part No.
Qty
Part No.
Qty
Model No. Model No.
Braking
(Ohms)
(Watts)
Input
46S03331- Reqd Resistance
5P41Reqd
CIMR-G5M GPD515CTorque
(%)
(Each)
(Each)
Each (Ohms) Height Width Depth

1.73
1.73
1.73

0.51
0.51
0.51

Drive

230V

20P41F
20P71F
21P51F
22P21F
23P71F
25P51F
27P51F
20111F
20151F
20181F
20221F
20300F
20370F
20550F
20750F

A003
A006
A008
A011
A017
A025
A033
A049
A064
A080
A096
A130
A160
A224
A300

-------0010
0020
0020
0020
0020
0020
0020
0020

-------1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3

48
48
16
16
16
9.6
9.6
9.6
6.3
6.3
6.3
6.3
6.3
6.3
6.3

-------11.00
11.00
11.00
11.00
11.00
11.00
11.00
11.00

-------5.53
5.53
5.53
5.53
5.53
5.53
5.53
5.53

-------5.91
5.91
5.91
5.91
5.91
5.91
5.91
5.91

A6-1

0825
0826
0826
0827
0828
0829
0830
0831
0832
0833
0834
0834
0834
0834
0834

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3

200
100
100
70
40
30
20
13.6
10
8
6.8
6.8
6.8
6.8
6.8

250
250
250
250
846
824
1260
1500
1920
2592
2760
2760
2760
2760
2760

150
150
115
110
115
105
115
115
115
100
150
135
115
135
105

Dimensions
(Inches)
Height Width
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00

14.00
14.00
14.00
14.00
14.00
14.00
14.00
14.00
14.00
21.00
21.00
21.00
21.00
21.00
21.00

Depth
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
7.00
7.00
10.00
13.00
13.00
10.00
10.00
10.00
10.00
10.00
10.00

Table A6-3. Dynamic Braking - 10% Duty Cycle - 460V
Braking Transistor Module
Remote Mount Resistor Unit
Dimensions
Minimum
Resistance Power
Approx
New Drive
Old Drive
(Inches)
Part No.
Qty
Rated
Part No.
Qty
Connectable
Model No. Model No.
(Watts)
(Ohms)
Braking
46S03331- Reqd
Input
5P41Reqd
Resistance
CIMR-G5M GPD515C(Each)
(Each)
Torque
(%)
Each (Ohms) Height Length Depth
Drive

460 V

40P41F
40P71F
41P51F
43P71F
44P01F
45P51F
47P51F
40111F
40151F
40181F
40221F
40301F
40371F
40451F
40551F
40750F
41100F
41600F
41850F
42200F
43000F

B001
B003
B004
B008
B011
B014
B021
B027
B034
B041
B052
B065
B080
B096
B128
B165
B224
B302
B380
B450
B605

---------0050
0060
0060
0060
0060
0060
0060
0090
0090
0090
0090
0090

---------1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
2

460 V

41850F
---

B380
B506
B675

0090
0090
0090

1
1
2

96
---0835
1
750
600
96
---0836
1
400
500
64
---0837
1
250
500
32
---0838
1
150
500
32
---0839
1
100
975
32
---0840
1
75
1050
32
---0841
1
50
1600
20
---0842
1
40
2050
20
---0843
1
32
2340
20
11.00
5.53
5.91
0844
1
27
3000
12.7
11.00
5.53
5.91
0845
1
20
3850
12.7
11.00
5.53
5.91
0846
1
16
5440
12.7
11.00
5.53
5.91
0847
1
13.6
5715
12.7
11.00
5.53
5.91
0845
2
20
3850
12.7
11.00
5.53
5.91
0847
2
13.6
5715
12.7
11.00
5.53
5.91
0847
2
13.6
5715
3
14.50 10.63 7.25
0848
1
5.2
17,280
3
14.50 10.63 7.25
0849
1
4
19,600
3
14.50 10.63 7.25
0849
1
4
19,600
3
14.50 10.63 7.25
0849
1
4
19,600
3
14.50 10.63 7.25
0849
2
4
19,600
GPD506V-B041 thru GPD506V-B302 cannot be connected for Dynamic Braking.
3
14.50 10.63 7.25
0849
1
4
19,600
3
14.50 10.63 7.25
0849
1
4
19,600
3
14.50 10.63 7.25
0849
2
4
19,600

Dimensions
(Inches)
Height Length

Depth

150
115
125
125
125
125
125
120
120
115
120
120
115
125
135
110
120
95
80
70
95

5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
14.00
14.00
14.00
14.00
14.00

14.00
14.00
14.00
14.00
14.00
14.00
14.00
21.00
21.00
21.00
21.00
28.00
28.00
21.00
28.00
28.00
29.00
29.00
29.00
29.00
29.00

7.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
7.00
10.00
13.00
10.00
10.00
13.00
13.00
13.00
13.00
13.00
13.00
13.00
18.00
18.00
18.00
18.00
18.00

80
70
95

14.00
14.00
14.00

29.00
29.00
29.00

18.00
18.00
18.00

Table A6-4. Dynamic Braking - 10% Duty Cycle - 600V
Braking Transistor Module
Remote Mount Resistor Unit
Dimensions
Dimensions
Minimum
Resistance
Power
Approx
New Drive Old Drive
(Inches)
(Inches)
Rated
Part No.
Qty Connectable
Part No. Qty
Model No. Model No.
(Ohms)
(Watts)
Braking
Input
46S03331- Reqd Resistance
5P41- Reqd
CIMR-G5M GPD515C(Each)
(Each) Torque (%) Height Length Depth
Height
Length
Depth
Each (Ohms)
51P51F
C003
--150
---0851
1
150
840
150
5.00
14.00
7.00
52P21F
C004
--150
---0851
1
150
840
150
5.00
14.00
7.00
53P71F
C006
--130
---0851
1
150
840
150
5.00
14.00
7.00
55P51F
C010
--90
---0851
1
150
840
130
5.00
14.00
7.00
57P51F
C012
--65
---0852
1
100
1400
145
5.00
14.00 10.00
50111F
C017
--44
---0853
1
75
1680
130
5.00
14.00 13.00
50151F
C022
--32
---0854
1
50
2520
145
5.00
21.00 10.00
50181F
C027
--26
---0855
1
40
3000
145
5.00
21.00 10.00
600V
50221F
C032
--26
---0856
1
38
3248
130
5.00
21.00 13.00
50301F
C041
0080
1
24
11.00
5.53
5.91
0857
1
33
3800
110
5.00
21.00 13.00
C052
50371F
0080
1
24
11.00
5.53
5.91
0858
1
27
4464
110
5.00
28.00 13.00
C062
50451F
0080
2
24
11.00
5.53
5.91
0858
2
27
4464
150
5.00
28.00 13.00
C077
50551F
0080
2
24
11.00
5.53
5.91
0858
2
27
4464
145
5.00
28.00 13.00
C099
50751F
0080
2
24
11.00
5.53
5.91
0858
2
27
4464
110
5.00
28.00 13.00
C130
50900F
0080
3
24
11.00
5.53
5.91
0858
3
27
4464
130
5.00
28.00 13.00
C172
51100F
0080
3
24
11.00
5.53
5.91
0858
3
27
4464
110
5.00
28.00 13.00
C200
0080
4
24
11.00
5.53
5.91
0858
4
27
4464
110
5.00
28.00 13.00
51600F
Drive

A6-2

INSTALLATION
This option should only be installed by a TECHNICALLY QUALIFIED INDIVIDUAL who is
familiar with this type of equipment and the hazards involved.

WARNING
Hazardous voltage can cause severe injury or death. Lock all power
sources feeding the drive in the "OFF" position.

CAUTION
Failure to follow these installation steps may cause equipment damage or
personnel injury.
Preliminary Procedures
1 . Disconnect all electrical power to the
drive.
2 . Remove drive front cover.
3 . Use a voltmeter to verify that voltage
is disconnected from incoming power
terminals.

HEAT SINK
MOUNT
RESISTOR

Heat Sink Mount Resistor Installation
1 . Remove the drive from its mounting for
access to the rear of the heat sink.
2 . Attach the Heat Sink Mount Resistor on
the back of the drive’s heat sink, as
shown in Figure A6-1.
3 . Reinstall the drive in its mounting
position.
4 . Connect the leads from the Heat Sink
Mount Resistor to drive terminals
according to Figure A6-2.

Figure A6-1. Attaching Heat Sink Mount Resistor
on Heat Sink

5 . Proceed to "ADJUSTMENTS" on page
A6-7.

GPD 515/G5
B1

B2
P

B
HEAT SINK MOUNT
RESISTOR

Figure A6-2. Lead Connections For Heat Sink
Mount Resistor

A6-3

Remote Mount Resistor Unit Installation (for GPD515C-A003 thru -A033
[CIMR-G5M20P41F thru 27P51F], -B001 thru -B034 [40P41F thru 40151F],
C003 thru C032 [51P51F thru 50221F])
IMPORTANT
Since the Remote Mount Resistor Unit generates heat during dynamic braking
operation, install it in a location away from other equipment.
1 . Attach the Remote Mount Resistor Unit, maintaining a minimum 1.97 inch (50 mm)
clearance on each side and a minimum 7.87 inch (200 mm) clearance on top.
2 . Remove the Remote Mount
Resistor Unit cover to access
its terminal block. Connect
the Remote Mount Resistor
Unit to the drive and to
external control circuitry
according to the chart at right
and Figure A6-3.
3 . Reinstall and
secure
Remote
Mount Resistor
Unit cover and
drive front
cover.

CB

L3

Lead Size (AWG)
Lead Type

B, P

1, 2 *

12-10

18-14 *

600V ethylene propylene
rubber insulated, or equivalent

Terminal Screw

M4

* Power leads for the Remote Mount Resistor Unit generate high levels of
electrical noise; these signal leads must be grouped separately.

1M

L1 (R)

1M

L2 (S)

1M

L3 (T)

L1
L2

Terminals

T1 (U)

GPD 515/G5

T1
T2
T3

T2 (V)
T3 (W)

CONTROL
PCB
3

4 . Proceed to
"ADJUSTMENTS"
on page A6-8.

11
B1

B2

P
2

1

PART OF USER SUPPLIED
EXTERNAL CIRCUIT

THRX

THG

REMOTE
MOUNT
RESISTOR
UNIT

B

THRX

THRX

POWER
OFF

POWER
ON

1M

1M

FAULT
CONTACT

Figure A6-3. Wiring Remote Mount Resistor Unit to Drive
(GPD515C-A003 thru -A033 [CIMR-G5M20P41F thru 27P51F],
-B001 thru -B034 [40P41F thru 40151F], and -C003 thru -C032 [51P51F thru 50221F])

A6-4

Braking Transistor Unit(s) and Remote Mount Resistor Unit(s) Installation
(for GPD515C-A049 [CIMR-G5M20111F] and above, -B041 [40181F] and
above, C041 [50301F] and above)
IMPORTANT
Since the Remote Mount Resistor Unit generates heat during dynamic braking
operation, install it in a location away from other equipment.
Select mounting locations for the Braking Transistor Unit(s) and Remote Mount Resistor
Unit(s) so that wiring between the drive and the (Master) Braking Transistor Unit, and
between each Braking Transistor Unit and its associated Remote Mount Resistor Unit, is
less than 33 feet (10 m).
1 . Mount the Braking Transistor Unit(s) on a vertical surface. A Braking Transistor Unit
requires a minimum 1.18 inches (30 mm) clearance on each side and a minimum 3.94
inches (100 mm) clearance top and bottom. Attach the Remote Mount Resistor Unit
maintaining a minimum 1.97 inches (50 mm) clearance on each side and a minimum
7.87 inches (200 mm) clearance on top.
2 . In each Braking Transistor Unit, set the nominal line voltage jumper plug to the
correct setting for the installation; this is factory set at the 230V/460V/575V
position. To access jumper plugs, remove plexiglass cover.
3 . If multiple Braking Transistor Units are being installed, the unit closest to the drive
should have the SLAVE/MASTER jumper plug on its PCB set to the "MASTER" position
(factory setting); all others must have this jumper plug moved to the "SLAVE"
position.
4 . If a single Braking Transistor Unit and Remote Mount Resistor Unit are being installed,
connect them to the drive and external control circuitry according to the chart below
and Figure A6-4.
If two or more Braking Transistor Units and Remote Mount Resistor Units are being
installed, connect them to the drive and to external circuitry according to the chart
below and Figure A6-5.

UNIT

TERMINALS

LEAD SIZE
(AWG)

LEAD
TYPE

TERMINAL
SCREWS

Remote Resistor Unit

B, P
1, 2 *

12-10
18-14 *

600V ethylene propylene
rubber insulated or equivalent

M5
M4

Braking Transistor Unit

P, Po, N, B
1, 2 *

12-10
18-14 *

600V ethylene propylene
rubber insulated, or equivalent

M4

* Power leads for the Remote Mount Resistor Unit generate high levels of electrical noise; these signal leads must be
grouped separately.

A6-5

CB

1M

L1
L2
L3

T1 (U)

L1 (R)

1M

L2 (S)

1M

L3 (T)

GPD 515/G5

T1
T2
T3

T2 (V)
T3 (W)

CONTROL
PCB
3

11

—

See Note(1)
+3
P
IFU(2)

BRAKING
TRANSISTOR
UNIT

N
3

1OL

4
GND
(E)

B

Po

PART OF USER SUPPLIED
EXTERNAL CIRCUIT

120VAC
THRX

B

RC
POWER
THRX
OFF

POWER
ON

1M

1M

RC

1
1THG

P

REMOTE
MOUNT
RESISTOR
UNIT

FAULT
CONTACT

Figure A6-4. Wiring Single Braking Transistor Unit and Remote Mount Resistor Unit to Drive
(GPD515C-A049 thru -A080 [CIMR-G5M20111F thru 20181F], -B041 thru -B080 [40181F thru 40371F],
and -C041(1) and -C052(1) [50301F(1) and 50371F(1)])

5 . The Braking Transistor Unit and Remote Mount Resistor Unit MUST BE GROUNDED.
Observe the following precautions:

(1)
(2)

•

Use grounding leads conforming to National Electrical Code.

•

If the installation requires the Remote Mount Resistor Unit to be used without its
enclosure (with grounding terminal), ground it by attaching a ground lead
at one of the mounting screws.

•

Grounding resistance of the Braking Transistor Unit should be 100 ohms or less.

For 600V Units, use terminal ⊕ 1 .
Fuse required only if UL/CUL certification is needed. See separate instruction sheet
02Y00025-0393 for details.

A6-6

CB

1M

L1 (R)

L1
L2
L3

1M

L2 (S)

1M

L3 (T)

T1 (U)

GPD 515/G5

T1
T2
T3

T2 (V)
T3 (W)
CONTROL
PCB 11
3

1

See Note (1)

–

2

+3

BRAKING
TRANSISTOR UNIT #1

P

MASTER

N
(2)

IFU

NOT RECOMMENDED
WIRING CONFIGURATION
BRAKING
TRANSISTOR
UNIT
Po

Po

B

(E)

5

1
2
BRAKING
TRANSISTOR UNIT #2

(2)

REMOTE MOUNT
RESISTOR UNIT

IFU

B

3

SLAVE

GND

1
IFU(2)

Po
(E)

5

6

SLAVE

REMOTE
MOUNT
RESISTOR
1 UNIT

B

1OL

4
RC
POWER
THRX
OFF

POWER
ON

1M

1M

RC

Po
(E)

5

6

1
2
BRAKING
TRANSISTOR UNIT #4

P
IFU(2)

FAULT
CONTACT

N
3

SLAVE

NOTE: Connect only the number of braking
transistor units and remote mount resistor
units required for the application.

REMOTE
MOUNT
RESISTOR
1 UNIT
1THG

2
B

1OL

P

B

4
GND

P

B

THRX

GND

1THG

2

120VAC
3

P

B

BRAKING
1
2
TRANSISTOR UNIT #3

N

1THG
B

1OL

P

2

REMOTE
MOUNT
RESISTOR
1 UNIT
2

4

PART OF USER SUPPLIED
EXTERNAL
CIRCUIT

P

6

P

N

P

B
B
Po

GND

B

1THG

2

1OL

3
4

BRAKING
TRANSISTOR
UNIT

REMOTE
MOUNT
RESISTOR
1 UNIT

Po
(E)

Figure A6-5. Wiring Multiple Braking Transistor Units and Remote Mount Resistor Units to Drive
(GPD515C-A130 thru -A300 [CIMR-G5M20300F thru 20750F], -B096 thru -B605 [40451F thru 43000F],
and -C062 (1) thru -C200 (1) [50451F(1) thru 51600F(1)])

(1)
(2)

For 600V Units, use terminal + 1.
Fuse required only if UL/CUL certification is needed. See separate instruction sheet
02Y00025-0393 for details.

A6-7

6 . IMPORTANT: After wiring, test insulation resistance of each Braking Transistor
Unit/Remote Mount Resistor Unit with a 900V megger as follows:
a.

Disconnect leads between the Braking Transistor Unit and the drive. If
equipment with semiconductors is connected across terminals 1 & 2 of the
Braking Transistor Unit,
remove the wiring.

b.

Connect common leads
(jumpers) across Braking
Transistor Unit terminals
N, P, Po, and B, and across
3 & 4, as shown in
Figure A6-6.

c.

REMOTE MOUNT
RESISTOR
UNIT

P
P

P0

BRAKING
TRANSISTOR
UNIT

N

c

3

B
B

4
GND (E)

a

Measure the insulation
resistance at points a, b,
and c in Figure A6-6 with
the megger.

b

Figure A6-6. Megger Testing Set-up

ADJUSTMENTS
7 . ALL drives: Program L 3 - 0 4 to " 0 ", to disable stall prevention during deceleration.
8 . Only with Heat Sink Mount Resistor: Program L 8 - 0 1 to " 1 ", to enable overheat
protection for the braking resistor.
OPERATION CHECK
9.

During dynamic braking operation, verify that the "BRAKE" lamp inside the Braking
Unit is lit.

1 0 . During dynamic braking operations, ensure that the required deceleration
characteristic is obtained. If not, contact MagneTek for assistance.
1 1 . Reinstall and secure covers on the Braking Transistor Units, Remote Mount Resistor
Units, and the drive.

CAUTION
During normal operation, the Braking Transistor Unit and the Remote Mount
Resistor Unit enclosures must be kept closed, since high voltage is applied to
the dynamic braking circuit.

A6-8

INDEX

- A -

- C -

Accel/Decel Time ............................................ 5-3
Setting Unit .................................................. 5-5
Acceleration
Stall Prevention Level During ..................... 5-86
Stall Prevention. Limit During ..................... 5-86
Stall Prevention. Selection During ............. 5-86
Time 1 .......................................................... 5-3
Time 2 .......................................................... 5-3
Time 3 .......................................................... 5-3
Time 4 .......................................................... 5-3
Access Level ................................................... 5-7
Analog Inputs, Multi-function
(Term. 14 & 16) ......................................5-53
Analog Monitor Output, Multi-function
(Term. 21-23) ........................................ 5-57
Bias ............................................................ 5-57
Gain ........................................................... 5-57
Signal Level Selection ................................ 5-57
Output Selection ........................................ 5-57
At Set Frequency (Output Signal) ................. 5-73
Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR) ................. 5-9
ASR Integral Reset .................................... 5-59
Integral Time 1 ............................................. 5-9
Integral Time 2 ........................................... 5-11
Proportional Gain 1 ...................................... 5-9
Proportional Gain 2 .................................... 5-11
Output Lag Time ........................................ 5-11
Auto Restart .................................................... 5-7
Fault Contact Status During ......................... 5-8
No. of Attempts ............................................ 5-7
Auto-Tuning, Running
in Open Loop Vector Control ....................... 2-4
in Flux Vector Control ................................... 2-9
Auto-Tuning Faults & Corrective Actions ......... 6-6
Auxiliary Input and Output
Power Option Devices ...........................1-11

Calculating Motor Parameters
[for Initial Start-up] ................................ 2-20
Capacity Related Parameters ....................... A3-1
Carrier Frequency ......................................... 5-12
Lower Limit ................................................. 5-12
Proportional Gain ....................................... 5-12
Upper limit .................................................. 5-12
Changing the Language on
the Digital Operator .............................. 2-19
Checking Encoder Pulses
[Troubleshooting] .................................. 6-29
Communication Error, Stop Method at
(MODBUS Control) ............................ A1-17
Conformance to European EMC
Directive ................................................. 1-13
Connections, Vector Control Motor ............... 1-24
Blower Motor .............................................. 1-26
Encoder Feedback (PG) ............................ 1-27
Motor Windings .......................................... 1-24
Control Circuit
Terminals .................................................... 1-17
Terminal (13, 14) Input Voltage
[Monitor Items] ................................... A1-28
Wiring ......................................................... 1-15
Control Method [Monitor Item] .................... A1-27
Control Method Related Parameters ............ A3-3
Control Method Selection ................................ 2-2
CPU ID No. [Monitor Item] .......................... A1-29
Critical Frequency Rejection ......................... 5-13
Current, DC Injection Braking ....................... 5-15
Current Meter (Analog Monitor) .................... 5-57
Current, Motor Rated (FLA) ................. 2-20, 5-90

- B Base Block, External ..................................... 5-63
Base Block Time, Min. ................................... 5-63
Basic Programming ......................................... 4-8
Baud Rate, Ser. Comm.
(MODBUS Control) ........................... 5-49
Bias, Frequency Reference ........................... 5-29
Braking, DC Injection .................................... 5-14
Current ........................................................ 5-15
Start Frequency .............................. 5-15, 5-103
Time at Start ..................................... 5-14, 5-15
Time at Stop ............................................... 5-15
Braking, Dynamic .......................................... A6-1

- D DATA/ENTER Key .................................... 4-1, 4-3
DC Bus Voltage [Monitor Item] ................... A1-27
Deactivation Time, Power Loss Ride-thru ..... 5-50
Deceleration
Stall Prevention Selection During .............. 5-86
Time 1 .......................................................... 5-3
Time 2 .......................................................... 5-3
Time 3 .......................................................... 5-3
Time 4 .......................................................... 5-3
Deadband, Prohibited Frequency ................. 5-13
Delay Time, Excessive Speed Deviation
Detection (PG) .................................. 5-23
Derivative Time (PID) .................................... 5-80
Detection, Frequency (Output Signal) ........... 5-73
Detection, Speed (Output Signal) ................. 5-73
Diagnostics — see Troubleshooting
Digital "Motor Operated Pot" ......................... 5-45
Digital Operator ............................................... 4-1
Changing the Language on ....................... 2-19

I-1

Display Selection ....................................... 5-17
Menu Trees .................................................. 4-4
Mode Selection ............................................ 4-9
Monitor Selection (At Power-up) ................ 5-19
Test Run Using ........................................... 2-24
Dimensions ................................................... A5-1
Diode and IGBT (Transistor) Module
Resistance Test .................................... 6-27
Displaying Faults ............................................. 6-7
“Down Arrow” Key .................................... 4-1, 4-3
DRIVE Indicator Lamp ............................. 4-1, 4-2
Droop ............................................................. 5-19
Dwell .............................................................. 5-20
Dynamic Braking ........................................... A6-1
Dynamic Braking Resistor
Protection, Internal ............................... 5-46

- E Elapsed Operation Time [Monitor Item] ...... A1-28
Elapsed Timer
Selection .................................................... 5-46
Setting ........................................................ 5-45
Encoder (PG) Constant ................ 2-7, 2-15, 5-21
Encoder (PG) Parameters ............................. 5-21
Energy Saving Operation .............................. 5-27
Gain ........................................................... 5-27
Enclosure ...................................................... A5-1
Environment .......................................... 1-1, A2-3
ESC Key ................................................... 4-1, 4-4
European EMC Directive,
Conformance to ......................................1-13
Excessive Speed Deviation
Detection Delay Time ................................. 5-23
Detection Level .......................................... 5-23
External Fault Inputs ..................................... 5-28

- F Fast-Stop Decel Time .............................. 5-3, 5-4
Fault Contact Status
During Auto Restart .................................... 5-8
Fault Indication & Troubleshooting .................. 6-1
Faults & Corrective Action, Auto-Tuning .......... 6-6
FLA, Motor ........................................... 2-20, 5-90
Flash ID No. [Monitor Item] ......................... A1-28
Frequency
Base ......................................................... 5-108
Carrier ........................................................ 5-12
Detection Output Signal.............................. 5-73
Max. Output .............................................. 5-108
Meter (Analog Monitor) .............................. 5-57
Mid. Output ............................................... 5-108
Min. Output ............................................... 5-108
Prohibited ................................................... 5-13

INDEX – Co n t i n u e d
Frequency Detection Multifunction Output ..................................... 5-73
Frequency Reference 1 ................................. 5-39
Frequency Reference 2 ................................. 5-39
Frequency Reference 3 ................................. 5-39
Frequency Reference 4 ................................. 5-39
Frequency Reference
Bias ............................................................ 5-29
Gain ........................................................... 5-29
Input Signals (Auto/Manual) ....................... 5-32
Jog .................................................... 5-36, 5-38
Limit, Lower ................................................ 5-34
Limit, Upper ................................................ 5-34
Loss Detection ........................................... 5-33
Retention .................................................... 5-33
FWD Indicator Lamp ................................ 4-1, 4-2
FWD/REV Key ......................................... 4-1, 4-2

- G Gain
Analog Monitor ........................................... 5-57
Energy Saving ............................................ 5-26
Frequency Reference ................................. 5-29
Proportional (PID) ...................................... 5-80
Torque Compensation ................................ 5-93
Zero-Servo ............................................... 5-110
Grounding ...................................................... 1-11

- H Hunting Prevention ........................................ 5-35

-

I

-

Indicator Lamps ....................................... 4-1, 4-2
Initial Start-up ("Local" Control) ....................... 2-1
Initialize Parameters (Reset Codes) ............. 5-83
Input and Output Power Option
Devices, Auxiliary ................................. 1-11
Input Phase Loss Detection .......................... 5-77
Input Selection
Analog, Multi-function ................................ 5-53
Multi-function Terminals ............................. 5-58
Input Terminal Status [Monitor Item] ........... A1-27
Input Voltage ................................................. A2-1
Inputs
Analog ........................................................ 5-53
Frequency Reference ................................. 5-31
Inspection (Receiving) ..................................... 1-1
Installation
Physical ........................................................ 1-1
Electrical ...................................................... 1-2
Integral Time (PID) ........................................ 5-80
Integral Value Limit (PID) .............................. 5-80
Integral Reset, ASR (PID) ............................. 5-82

Integral Value During Accel/
Decel Selection (PG) ............................ 5-24
Interconnection
2-wire Control ............................................. 1-20
3-wire Control ............................................. 1-22
Internal Dynamic Braking
Resistor Protection ............................... 5-46

- J Jog Frequency Reference .................... 5-35, 5-36
JOG Key .................................................. 4-1, 4-2

- K Keypad — see Digital Operator

- L Lag Filter Time, Output (PID) ........................ 5-81
Lamps, Indicator .............................. 4-1, 4-2
LCD Display ............................................ 4-1
Limit, Integral Value (PID) ..................... 5-80
Line-to-Line Resistance, Motor ................... A1-13
Listing of Parameters .................................... A1-1
LOCAL/REMOTE Key ..................................... 4-1
Selection .................................................... 5-44
Local/Remote Reference
Selection .................................................... 5-39
Lower Limit, Frequency Reference ............... 5-34

- M Main Circuit
Block Diagrams ............................1-8, 1-9, 1-10
Terminals .............................................. 1-3, 1-5
Input/Output Wiring ...................................... 1-2
Max. Output Frequency ...................... 2-20, 5-108
Max. Voltage ....................................... 2-21, 5-108
Mechanical resonance — see
Critical Frequency Rejection
MENU Key ............................................... 4-1, 4-3
Menu Trees, Digital Operator .......................... 4-5
Mid. Output Frequency ................................ 5-108
Mid. Output Voltage ..................................... 5-108
Min. Base Block Time .................................... 5-65
Min. Output Frequency ................................ 5-108
Min. Output Voltage ..................................... 5-108
Miscellaneous Parameters ............................ 5-44
Miscellaneous Protective Features ............... 5-46
MODBUS Control .......................................... 5-48
Operation Mode Selection ......................... 5-48
Reference Selection ................................... 5-48
Ser. Comm. Baud Rate ..................... 5-48, 5-49
Ser. Comm. Parity Selection ............. 5-48, 5-49
Ser. Comm. Station Address ............ 5-48, 5-49
Stopping Method at Ser.
Comm. Error ................................... A1-17

I-2

Mode Selection ............................................... 4-8
Model Numbers, Drive .................. xvii, A2-1,
A3-1, A5-1
Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru ................. 5-50
Deactivation Time ...................................... 5-50
Protection ................................................... 5-50
Monitor Selection (At Power-Up) ................... 5-19
Motor
Exciting Current [Monitor Item] ................ A1-28
Line-to-Line Resistance ........................... A1-13
Mechanical Loss ...................................... A1-13
Overload Protection Selection ................... 5-90
No-Load Current (NLA) .................. 2-20, A1-13
Parameters, Calculating
[Initial Start-up] ..................................... 2-20
Rated Current (FLA) ............. 5-90, 2-20, A1-13
Rated Voltage ................................ 2-20, A1-13
Secondary Current (Iq)
[Monitor Item] ..................................... A1-28
Selection (for OL Protection) ..................... 5-90
Speed [Monitor Item] ............................... A1-27
Stopping Method Selection ............... 5-14, 5-88
Switching — see Speed Search
Wiring .................................................. 1-2, 1-25
Mounting
Clearances ................................................... 1-1
Dimensions ................................................ A5-1
Location .............................................. 1-1, A2-4
Multi-function Analog Inputs
(Term. 14 & 16) ..................................... 5-53
Multi-function Input Terminals
(Term. 3-8) ............................................ 5-58
Multi-function Output Terminals
(Term. 9 & 10; 25-27) ........................... 5-71
Multi-step Speed Operation .......................... 5-40

- N Number of PG Gear Teeth 1 ......................... 5-25
Number of PG Gear Teeth 2 ......................... 5-25

- O Off-delay Timer .............................................. 5-66
Offset (PID) ................................................... 5-80
OH (Overheat) Protection Alarm Level ......... 5-46
OH Stopping Method Selection .................... 5-46
On-delay Timer .............................................. 5-66
Operation Method for Frequency
Reference Loss Detection .................... 5-33
Operation Mode Selection ............................. 5-39
Operation Selection
at Overspeed (PG) ..................................... 5-22
at PG Open Circuit ..................................... 5-22
at Speed Deviation (PG) ............................ 5-23
Operation Status [Monitor Item] .................. A1-28
Operator Detection Selection ........................ 5-45

INDEX – Co n t i n u e d
Operator Display (LCD) ................................... 4-1
Options — see Peripheral Devices
Output, Analog Monitor ................................. 5-57
Output Current [Monitor Item] ..................... A1-27
Output Frequency
Max. .............................................. 5-108, A1-12
Mid. ............................................... 5-108, A1-12
Min. ............................................... 5-108, A1-12
[Monitor Item] ........................................... A1-27
Output Lag Filter Time (PID) ......................... 5-81
Output Phase Loss Detection ....................... 5-77
Output Power [Monitor Item] ....................... A1-27
Output Selection, Analog Monitor ................. 5-57
Output Terminal Status [Monitor Item] ........ A1-27
Output Voltage [Monitor Item] ..................... A1-27
Output Voltage Ref. (Vd) [Monitor Item] ...... A1-29
Output Voltage Ref. (Vq) [Monitor Item] ...... A1-29
Outputs
Analog Monitor ........................................... 5-57
Contact/Open Collector .............................. 5-70
Overload Prot. Selection, Motor .................... 5-90
Overspeed Detection Level (PG) .................. 5-22
Overtorque Detection
Function Selection ..................................... 5-98
Level ........................................................... 5-98
Time ........................................................... 5-98

- P Parameter Selection/Initialization
(Reset Codes) ....................................... 5-83
Parameters
Factory Reset (Initialize) ............................ 5-83
Listing of .................................................... A1-1
Quick Reference For ..................................... xiv
Programming ............................................. 4-10
Related to Capacity ................................... A3-1
Related to Control Method ........................ A3-3
Parity Selection, Ser. Comm.
(MODBUS Control) ........................... 5-49
Peripheral devices
AC reactor .................................................. 1-12
Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) ........ A2-1
Noise filter .................................................. 1-12
PG Open Circuit Detection Delay Time ........ 5-21
PG Open Circuit, Operation Selection at ...... 5-21
PG Rotation ................................................... 5-24
PG Setup ....................................................... 5-21
Phase Loss Detection
Input ........................................................... 5-77
Output ........................................................ 5-77
Physical Installation ......................................... 1-1
PID Control .................................................... 5-78
Disable ....................................................... 5-60
Feedback Amount [Monitor Item] ............ A1-29

Feedback Signal Selection ........................ 5-79
Integral Value Limit .................................... 5-80
Offset ......................................................... 5-80
Output Filter Lag Time ............................... 5-81
PID Limit .................................................... 5-80
PID Selection ............................................. 5-78
PID Settings
Derivative Time ....................................... 5-80
Integral Time ........................................... 5-80
Proportional Gain ................................... 5-80
Potentiometer (External Speed) ........................ vii
Power Loss Ride-thru Time ........................... 5-51
Power On and Preliminary Checks
(Initial Start-up) ....................................... 2-2
Power Supply ......................................... 1-5, A2-1
Power Voltage Selection in
460V GPD 515 ....................................... 2-1
Pre-Operation Considerations ....................... 2-27
Preset Speeds — see Multi-step Speeds
Programmable Features .................................. 5-1
Prohibited Frequency 1 ................................. 5-13
Prohibited Frequency 2 ................................. 5-13
Prohibited Frequency 3 ................................. 5-13
Prohibited Frequency 4 ................................. 5-13
Prohibited Frequency Deadband .................. 5-13
Proportional Gain (PID) ................................. 5-80
Protection
Overcurrent, Instantaneous ....................... A2-3
Overheat, Heatsink .................................... A2-3
Overtorque ................................................. 5-98
Overvoltage ............................................... A2-3
Thermal Overload ...................................... 5-90
Undervoltage ............................................. A2-3
PWM Frequency — see Carrier Frequency

- R Rated Current, Motor ........................... 2-20, 5-90
Ratings .................................................. xvii, A2-1
Receiving ......................................................... 1-1
Reference Selection (Local/Remote) ............ 5-39
REMOTE Indicator Lamps ....................... 4-1, 4-2
Reset Codes ................................................. 5-83
RESET Key .............................................. 4-1, 4-3
Resistance, Motor Line-to-Line ................... A1-13
REV Indicator Lamp ................................. 4-1, 4-2
Reverse Run Prohibit .................................... A1-2
Ride-thru, Momentary Power Loss ................ 5-51
Deactivation Time ...................................... 5-51
"Right Arrow" Key ..................................... 4-1, 4-3
Rotation, PG .................................................. 5-24
RUN Indicator Lamp ................................ 4-1, 4-2
RUN Key .................................................. 4-1, 4-2
Running
Forward ...................................................... 2-24
Reverse ...................................................... 2-24

I-3

Stall Prevention Level During ..................... 5-87
Stall Prevention Selection During .............. 5-87

- S Sample/Hold Function ....................................5-67
Scaling Display (Digital Operator) ................. 5-17
S-Curve Characteristics .................................. 5-6
Shock Resistance –– see S-Curve
Skip Frequency –– see Prohibited Frequency
Slip Compensation ........................................ 5-84
Gain ........................................................... 5-84
Limit ........................................................... 5-84
Primary Delay Time ................................... 5-84
Selection During Regeneration .................. 5-84
Soft Start — see S-Curve
Spare Parts ................................................... A4-1
Specifications ................................................ A2-1
Speed
Detection Output Signal ............................. 5-74
Range ........................................................ A2-1
Search ........................................................ 5-64
Speed Reference, Multiple (Multi-step
Speed Operation) ................................. 5-39
Speed Search Level ...................................... 5-64
Stall Prevention
Level During Accel ..................................... 5-86
Level During Running ................................ 5-87
Limit During Accel ...................................... 5-86
Selection During Accel ............................... 5-86
Selection During Decel .............................. 5-86
Selection During Running .......................... 5-87
Start-up, Initial ................................................. 2-1
Start-up Procedure, Simplified ............................ i
Station Address, Ser. Comm.
(MODBUS Control) ........................... 5-49
STOP Indicator Lamp .............................. 4-1, 4-2
STOP Key ................................................ 4-1, 4-2
Function During Remote Run .................... 5-45
Stop Method Sel. (OH) ............................... A1-46
Stopping Method .................................. 5-14, 5-88
Stopping Method at Comm. Error
(MODBUS Control) ............................... 5-50
Storage Function ........................................... 2-27
Switching Frequency, Accel/Decel .................. 5-5

- T Temperature
Ambient .............................................. 1-1, A2-4
Storage ...................................................... A2-4
Terminals
Description .......................................... 1-6, 1-17
Functions ............................................ 1-6, 1-17
Screw Sizes ................................................. 1-3
Test Run Using Digital Operator
("Local" Control) ................................... 2-24

INDEX – Co n t i n u e d
Thermal Overload Protection ........................ 5-90
Motor OL Protection Selection ................... 5-90
Motor OL Protection Time Constant .......... 5-90
Motor Rated Current .................................. 5-90
Motor Selection .......................................... 5-91
Torque Compensation ................................... 5-93
Gain [KT] .................................................... 5-93
Time Constant ............................................ 5-93
Torque Control (Command) ........................... 5-95
Selection .................................................... 5-95
Simplified Block Diagram ........................... 5-97
Speed/Torque Control Selection Timer ...... 5-95
Speed Limit ................................................ 5-96
Speed Limit Selection ................................ 5-96
Torque Reference Delay Time .................... 5-96
Torque Detection ........................................... 5-98
Overtorque Detection Level ....................... 5-98
Overtorque Detection Time ........................ 5-98
Selection .................................................... 5-98
Torque Limit ................................................. 5-101
Forward Torque Limit ............................... 5-101
Forward Regenerative Torque Limit ......... 5-101
Reverse Torque Limit ............................... 5-101
Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit ......... 5-101

Torque Reference (Internal) [Monitor Item] . A1-27
Trim Control ................................................... 5-69
± Speed Limits ........................................... 5-69
Troubleshooting ............................................... 6-1
Flowcharts .................................................. 6-10

- U Up/Down Function ......................................... 5-68
Upper Limit, Freq. Ref. .................................. 5-34
"Up Arrow" Key ........................................ 4-1, 4-3
User Parameters ......................................... 5-106

- W Weight ........................................................... A5-1
Wiring
2-wire Control ................................. 1-10b, 1-20
3-Wire Control ................................. 1-10b, 1-22
Control Circuit ............................................ 1-15
Diagrams .......................................... 1-15, 1-23
Distances ............................................ 1-2, 1-15
Main Circuit Input/Output ............................. 1-2
Encoder/PG-X2 Connections ..................... 1-24

- Z - V V/f Pattern
Custom ..................................................... 5-108
Standard .................................................. 5-106
Voltage
Input ............................................... 5-108, A2-1
Max. ......................................................... 5-108
Mid. Frequency ........................................ 5-108
Motor Rated ........................................ 2-5, 2-10

I-4

Zero-Servo Control ...................................... 5-110
Zero-Servo Gain ...................................... 5-111
Zero-Servo Completion Width .................. 5-111
Zero Speed Control ..................................... 5-112
Zero Speed Operation ............................. 5-112
Min. Output Frequency ............................. 5-112

GPD 515/G5 Drive
YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA, INC.
Drives Division 16555 W. Ryerson Rd., New Berlin, WI 53151, U.S.A.
Phone: (800) YASKAWA (800-927-5292) Fax: (262) 782-3418
Internet: http://www.drives.com

YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD.
Head Office: 151 Lorong Chuan, #04-01, New Tech Park Singapore 556741, Singapore
Phone: 65-282-3003 Fax: 65-289-3003
TAIPEI OFFICE (AND YATEC ENGINEERING CORPORATION)
10F 146 Sung Chiang Road, Taipei, Taiwan
Phone: 886-2-2563-0010 Fax: 886-2-2567-4677

MOTOMAN INC.
805 Liberty Lane, West Carrollton, OH 45449, U.S.A.
Phone: (937) 847-6200 Fax: (937) 847-6277
Internet: http://www.motoman.com

YASKAWA JASON (HK) COMPANY LIMITED
Rm. 2909-10, Hong Kong Plaza, 186-191 Connaught Road West, Hong Kong
Phone: 852-2803-2385 Fax: 852-2547-5773

YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
New Pier Takeshiba South Tower, 1-16-1, Kaigan, Minatoku, Tokyo, 105-0022, Japan
Phone: 81-3-5402-4511 Fax: 81-3-5402-4580
Internet: http://www.yaskawa.co.jp

BEIJING OFFICE
Room No. 301 Office Building of Beijing International Club,
21 Jianguomanwai Avenue, Beijing 100020, China
Phone: 86-10-6532-1850 Fax: 86-10-6532-1851

YASKAWA ELETRICO DO BRASIL COMERCIO LTDA.
Avenida Fagundes Filho, 620 Bairro Saude Sao Paolo-SP, Brasil CEP: 04304-000
Phone: 55-11-5071-2552 Fax: 55-11-5581-8795
Internet: http://www.yaskawa.com.br

SHANGHAI OFFICE
27 Hui He Road Shanghai 200437 China
Phone: 86-21-6553-6600 Fax: 86-21-6531-4242

YASKAWA ELECTRIC EUROPE GmbH
Am Kronberger Hang 2, 65824 Schwalbach, Germany
Phone: 49-6196-569-300 Fax: 49-6196-888-301
MOTOMAN ROBOTICS AB
Box 504 S38525, Torsas, Sweden
Phone: 46-486-48800 Fax: 46-486-41410

SHANGHAI YASKAWA-TONJI M & E CO., LTD.
27 Hui He Road Shanghai 200437 China
Phone: 86-21-6533-2828 Fax: 86-21-6553-6677
BEIJING YASKAWA BEIKE AUTOMATION ENGINEERING CO., LTD.
30 Xue Yuan Road, Haidian, Beijing 100083 China
Phone: 86-10-6232-9943 Fax: 86-10-6234-5002

MOTOMAN ROBOTEC GmbH
Kammerfeldstrabe 1, 85391 Allershausen, Germany
Phone: 49-8166-900 Fax: 49-8166-9039

SHOUGANG MOTOMAN ROBOT CO., LTD.
7, Yongchang-North Street, Beijing Economic & Technological Development Area,
Beijing 100076 China
Phone: 86-10-6788-0551 Fax: 86-10-6788-2878

YASKAWA ELECTRIC UK LTD.
1 Hunt Hill Orchardton Woods Cumbernauld, G68 9LF, Scotland, United Kingdom
Phone: 44-12-3673-5000 Fax: 44-12-3645-8182

YEA, TAICHUNG OFFICE IN TAIWAIN
B1, 6F, No.51, Section 2, Kung-Yi Road, Taichung City, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Phone: 886-4-2320-2227 Fax:886-4-2320-2239

GPD 515/G5 Technical Manual

YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA, INC.
Chicago-Corporate Headquarters
2121 Norman Drive South, Waukegan, IL 60085, U.S.A.
Phone: (800) YASKAWA (800-927-5292) Fax: (847) 887-7310
Internet: http://www.yaskawa.com

GPD 515/G5 Drive
Technical Manual

YASKAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CORPORATION
Paik Nam Bldg. 901 188-3, 1-Ga Euljiro, Joong-Gu, Seoul, Korea
Phone: 82-2-776-7844 Fax: 82-2-753-2639

0 4 / 01/02

Data subject to change without notice.

SWV: 01114

Document Number: TM4515 (Supercedes: YEA-TOA-S616-10.11 and 10.12) 04/01/2002 Software Version: 01114

Models: GPD515C- and CIMR-G5M Document Number: TM 4515



---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.5
Linearized                      : Yes
Page Count                      : 297
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : XMP toolkit 2.9.1-13, framework 1.6
About                           : uuid:93e1367a-85a2-472d-becd-5e5bf17b6f3e
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 4.0 for Macintosh
Modify Date                     : 2004:12:06 13:42:50-06:00
Create Date                     : 2001:04:13 08:04:54-06:00
Metadata Date                   : 2004:12:06 13:42:50-06:00
Document ID                     : uuid:d84ca186-c18b-42c8-9576-e49d05842f05
Format                          : application/pdf

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools